Automate Premium Application

4 Application-specific modules and solutions
Contents
Analogue I/O Selection guide pages 0472Q/2 and 0472Q/3
Analogue I/O modules i

TSX AEYi
i
TSX ASYi pages 43530/6 and 43530/7
Process control TSX P57 i i

i3M pages 43620/2 to 43620/9
T PCX 57 i i
i3M
Counter and Selection guide pages 0452Q/2 and 0452Q/3

measurement modules
Counter module TSX CTY 2A/4A page 43540/5
Counter and measurement modules TSX CTY 2C page 43541/5
Electronic cam module TSX CCY 1128 page 43542/4
Motion control Selection guide pages 0453Q/2 and 0453Q/3

modules
For servomotors with analogue setpoint i

TSX CAYi pages 43550/5 and 43550/6
For SERCOS® digital ring drives TSX CSY 84 page 43555/5
For stepper motors TSX CFY 11/21 page 43551/5
Lexium motion control pages 43545/2 and 43545/3
ISP Plus integrated weighing i

TSX ISP Yi page 43552/7
system
Process power supply i

TSX SUP 1i page 43560/3
units and modules
Warm Standby redundant TLX CD WSBY page 43566/6

architecture
S0209/3
Premium automation platform
Analogue I/O modules
Selection guide
Applications Analogue inputs
Type of I/O Low level isolated inputs, Thermocouple inputs High level inputs with common point
thermocouples, temperature
probes
Type Multirange Multirange Voltage/current
Range ± 10 V, ± 5 V, 0-10 V, 0…5 V, 1…5 V - 80…+ 80 mV ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V, 1…5 V

4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, external shunt Thermocouples 0-20 mA,
supplied, B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U 4-20 mA
thermocouples
Pt 100, Pt 1000 thermal probes,
Ni 1000 2 or 4-wire
Modularity 4 channels 16 channels 8 channels
Isolation Between channels : c 2830 V rms. Between channels : ± a 100 V Between channels : common point
Between bus and channels : Between bus and channels : Between bus and channels :
c 1780 V rms. c 1000 V rms. c 1000 V rms.
Between channels and earth : Between channels and earth : Between channels and earth :
c 1780 V rms. c 1000 V rms. c 1000 V rms.
Read time 550 ms 1120 ms (normal scan) 27 ms (normal scan)

70 ms/channel used (fast scan) 3 ms/channel used (fast scan)
Response time User-definable filtering 0 to 68.5 s User-definable filtering 0.04 Te to User-definable filtering 0 to 3.44 s
0.012 Te (Te : module scan time)
Resolution 16 bits 16 bits 12 bits
Connection 20-way screw terminal : Two 25-way SUB-D connectors 25-way SUB-D connector
TSX BLY 01
or 2 Telefast 2 sub-bases or 1 Telefast 2 sub-base
(ABE-7CPA12) (ABE-7CPA02/03)
Type of module
TSX AEY 414 TSX AEY 1614 TSX AEY 800
Page 43530/6
0472Q/2
Analogue outputs
High level isolated inputs High level input with Isolated outputs between Outputs with common point
between channels common point channels
Voltage/current
± 10 V
0-20 mA,
4-20 mA
16 channels 8 channels 4 channels 8 channels
Between channels : common Between channels : ± a 200 V Between channels : com- Between channels : c 1500 Between channels : com-
point mon point V rms. mon point
Between bus and channels : Between bus and channels : Between bus and channels : Between bus and channels : Between bus and channels :
c 1000 V rms. c 1000 V rms. c 1000 V rms. c 1500 V rms. c 1000 V rms.
Between channels and earth : Between channels and earth : Between channels and earth : Between channels and earth : Between channels and earth :
c 1000 V rms. c 1000 V rms. c 1000 V rms. c 1000 V rms. c 1000 V rms.
51 ms (normal scan) 126.4 ms (normal scan) 1 ms – –

3 ms/channel used 3.3 ms/channel used
(fast scan) (fast scan)
User-definable filtering User-definable filtering – 2.5 ms 5 ms

0 to 6.50 s 0 to 3.82 s
12 bits 16 bits 11 bits + sign 13 bits + sign for voltage

13 bits for current
Two 25-way SUB-D 25-way SUB-D connector 25-way SUB-D connector 20-way screw terminal : 25-way SUB-D
connectors TSX BLY 01 connector
or via 2 Telefast 2 sub-bases or 1 Telefast 2 sub-base or 1 Telefast 2 sub-base or 1 Telefast 2 sub-base
(ABE-7CPA02/03) (ABE-7CPA02/31) (ABE-7CPA03/21) (ABE-7CPA02)
TSX AEY 1600 TSX AEY 810 TSX AEY 420 TSX ASY 410 TSX ASY 800
43530/6
0472Q/3
Presentation, description
Characteristics :
pages 43530/4 and 43530/5
References :
pages 43530/6 and 43530/7
Presentation
Analogue I/O modules for Premium PLCs are equipped with :

i Either one 25-way SUB-D connector (TSX AEY 420/800/810 and TSX ASY 800)
i Or two 25-way SUB-D connectors (TSX AEY 1600/1614)
i Or a screw terminal block (TSX AEY 414, TSX ASY 410)
They can be installed in any position in TSX RKY iii racks except for the positions reserved for power supply modules.
Analogue I/O modules can be removed while the PLC is powered up.
The maximum number of analogue channels in a Premium configuration depends on the processor used, see pages
43511/8, 43513/5 and 43620/9.
Description
The front panels of TSX AEY/ASY analogue I/O modules comprise :
1 A display and module diagnostics block
1 2 A connector for receiving the screw terminal block
3 A rotating support containing the module locating device
4 A removable screw terminal for direct connection of the

2 I/O to the sensors and preactuators TSX BLY 01 (to be
ordered separately)
5 A pivoting cover for accessing the terminal block screws

and holding the identification label
3 4
6 A screw terminal block encoder
5
7 A 25-way SUB-D connector for connecting the sensors
6 7
Connection using Connection

screw terminal block using SUB-D
connector
Connection principle for TSX AEY/ASY modules with SUB-D connector
The Telefast 2 pre-wired system simplifies the installation of modules by providing access to the inputs (or outputs) at
the screw terminals.
Connection is via a TSX CAP 030 3 metre shielded cable equipped with SUB-D connectors at either end.
i The Telefast ABE-7CPA02 sub-base enables 8

channels to be connected
i The Telefast ABE-7CPA03/31 sub-base enables the

connection of 8 channels and :
Premium (extension rack) - provides channel by channel supply for 2 and 4-wire
TSX CAP 030
+ + – –
sensors with a 24 V (for sub-base ABE-7CPA03)
- channel by channel isolated supply for 2 and 4-wire
GND
GND
N1
N1
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
24 V sensors (for sub-base ABE-7CPA31)

11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
ABE-7CPA02 - ensures continuity of current loops when the SUB-D

TSX CAP 030 + + – – connector is removed
- protects the current shunt within the modules against
overvoltages
GND
GND
N1
N1
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
ABE-7CPA03/31
i The Telefast ABE-7CPA12 sub-base enables 16 thermo-
couples to be connected. The terminal block is fitted with
a temperature probe for cold junction compensation.
43530/2
Functions
Characteristics :
pages 43530/4 and 43530/5
References :
pages 43530/6 and 43530/7
TSX AEY 420, TSX AEY 800/810, TSX AEY 1600 analogue input modules
TSX AEY iii modules are high level analog input modules with 4 inputs for the TSX AEY 420 module, 8 inputs for
TSX AEY 800/810 modules and 16 inputs for the TSX AEY 1600 module.
Used with sensors or transmitters, they perform monitoring, measurement and process control functions for continuous
processes.
Depending on the choice made during configuration, TSX AEY 420/800/810/1600 modules offer the following ranges for
each of their inputs ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V, 1…5 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA.
Functions
i Scanning of input channels, protection against overvoltages, adaptation of signals by analogue filtering, scanning by
solid state multiplexing.
i Adaptation to input signals : gain selection, drift compensation.
i Digitisation of signals : 12-bit analogue/digital conversion for TSX AEY 800/1600 and 16 bit analogue/digital conversion
for TSX AEY 420/810.
i Converting input measurements to user format: recalibration coefficient, filtering, scaling.
i Module monitoring : conversion circuit test, range overshoot test, terminal block presence test, “watchdog” test.
i Isolation of input channels on TSX AEY 810.
i Fast processing of inputs (1 ms) on TSX AEY 420.
TSX AEY 414, TSX AEY 1614 analogue input modules
The TSX AEY 414 module is a multirange input module with 4 channels isolated from each other.
Depending on the choice made during configuration, the following ranges are available for each of its inputs :
i thermocouples B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, U or - 13…+ 63 mV electrical range.
i 2 or 4-wire Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000 temperature probe, or ohmic range: 0…400 ohms, 0…3850 ohms.
i High level ± 10 V, 0…10 V, ± 5 V, 0…5 V (0…20 mA with external shunt) or 1…5 V, 4…20 mA (4…20 mA with external
shunt).
The TSX AEY 1614 module is an analogue input module with 16 thermocouple inputs. Depending on the selections made
during configuration, the following range is available for each of the input channels (supporting a common mode between
them of a 250 V or c 280 V) :
i Thermocouples B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T or U, or electrical range - 80 mV….+ 80 mV.
Functions
i Scanning of input channels, gain selection according to input signals, multiplexing.

i Digitisation of input signals.
i Converting input measurements to user format: recalibration coefficient, linearisation, cold junction compensation,
filtering, scaling.
i Module monitoring : conversion circuit test, range overshoot test, terminal block presence test, sensor link test,
“watchdog” test.
TSX ASY 410, TSX ASY 800 analogue output modules
The TSX ASY 410 module has 4 analogue outputs isolated from each other, and the TSX ASY 800 module has 8 outputs
with common point.
Depending on the choice made during configuration, the modules offer the following range for each of its inputs :
± 10 V, 0…20 mA and 4…20 mA without external supply.
Functions
i Protection of the module against overvoltages.

i Adaptation to the different actuators : voltage or current output.
i Conversion of digital signals to analogue signals (11 bits + sign for TSX ASY 410 and 13 bits + sign for TSX ASY 800).
i Transforming application data into data which can be used by the digital/analogue converter.
i Module monitoring and fault indication to the application: converter test, range overshoot test, terminal block presence
test, “watchdog” test.
PL7 Junior software performs configuration and debugging functions :

i Choice of modules used.
i Configuration of channels according to the type of module: scanning (normal or fast), cold junction compensation
(internal or external), range, filtering, display format, task (MAST or FAST), detection of terminal block presence, wiring
check.
i Debugging, access to certain parameter settings, module/channel diagnostics, forcing, calibration.
43530/3
Characteristics
References :
pages 43530/6 and 43530/7
Characteristics of analogue input modules
Type of input module TSX AEY 800 TSX AEY 1600 TSX AEY 810 TSX AEY 420
Number of channels 8 16 8 4
Input range ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V,

1…5 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA
Analogue/digital conversion 12 bits 16 bits
Read Time
Normal scan ms 27 51 29.7 1
Fast scan ms 3 x (no. of channels used + 1) 3.3 x (no. of channels used + 1) –
Max. error ± 10 V 0…5 V 0…20 mA ± 10 V 0…5 V 0…20 mA ± 10 V 0…5 V 0…20 mA

0…10 V 1…5 V 4…20 mA 0…10 V 1…5 V 4…20 mA 0…10 V 1…5 V 4…20 mA
at 25 °C %FS 0.19 0.15 0.25 0.244 0.13 0.142 0.1 0.2 0.2
0…60 °C %FS 0.22 0.22 0.41 0.305 0.191 0.12 0.2 0.4 0.4
Isolation Betw. ch. and bus V rms 1000

Betw. ch. and earth V rms 1000
Betw. channels aV Common point ± 200 Common point
Common mode betw. channels None ± 200 None
Max. overvoltage/overcurrent on ± 30 V voltage

the inputs ± 30 mA current
Standards IEC 1131
Consumption mA See page 43605/2
Type of input module TSX AEY 414 TSX AEY 1614
Number of channels 4 16
Input range i B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U thermocouples or electrical range : i B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U

- 13…+ 63 mV thermocouples or electrical
i Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000 2 or 4-wire temperature probes, or ohmic range : - 80…+ 80 mV
range : 0…400 Ω, 0…3850 Ω
i ± 10 V, 0…10 V, ± 5 V, 0…5 V (0…20 mA with external shunt) or
1…5 V, 4…20 mA (4…20 mA with external shunt)
Analogue/digital conversion 16 bits 16 bits
Read time
Normal scan ms 550 70 ms/channel
Fast scan ms – –
Max. error
at 25 °C %FS See page 43530/5 See page 43530/5
0…60 °C %FS See page 43530/5 See page 43530/5
Isolation Betw. ch. and bus V rms 1780 1000

Betw. ch. and earth V rms 1780 1000
Betw. channels V rms 2830 –
Common mode V c 240 or a 100 between channels and earth a 250 betw. channels and earth
c 415 or a 200 between channels a 250 betw. channels or c 280
Max. overvoltage/overcurrent on ± 30 V powered up without 250 Ω external resistance a ± 30 V in differential mode

the inputs ± 15 V powered down without 250 Ω external resistance
± 25 mA powered up/down with 250 Ω external shunt
Standards Sensor : IEC 584, IEC 751, DIN 43760, DIN 43710, NFC 42-330
PLC : IEC 1131
43530/4
Characteristics (continued)
References :
pages 43530/6 and 43530/7
Input range for TSX AEY 414
Voltage/current range ± 10 V 0…10 V ± 5 V 0…5 V 1…5 V 0…20 mA 4…20 mA 13…63 mV 0…4000 Ω 0…3850 Ω
Max. error at 25 °C %FS (1) 0.27 0.16 0.27 0.22 0.27 0.36 0.45 0.19 0.13 0.22
Max. error at 0…60 °C %FS (1) 0.50 0.39 0.50 0.45 0.56 0.69 0.86 0.44 0.27 0.48
Temperature probe range Pt 100 Pt 1000 Ni 1000

Max. error at 25 °C °C 1.2 2.5 1
Max. error at 0…60 °C °C 2.4 5 2
Thermocouple range B E J K L N R S T U
Max. error at 25 °C IC (2) °C 3.5 6.1 7.3 7.8 7.5 6 6 6.6 6.6 5.4
EC (3) °C 1.5 1.5 1.8 2.3 2 2 3.2 3.4 1.5 1.5
Max. error at 0…60 °C IC (2) °C 8.1 8.1 9.5 10.5 9.8 8.7 11 12 8.8 7.3
EC (3) °C 3.5 3.2 3.8 4.7 4.1 4.3 7.7 8.5 3.2 3.1
Input range for TSX AEY 1614
Thermocouple range B E J K L N R S T U
Max. error at 25 °C °C 2.5 0.8 0.9 1 0.9 1.1 2.1 2.2 1 1
(4)
Max. error at 0…60 °C °C 4 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.4 1.7 2.4 3.7 1.3 1.3
(4)
Characteristics of analogue output modules
Type of output module TSX ASY 410 TSX ASY 800
Number of channels 4 8
Output range ± 10 V, 0…20 mA and 4…20 mA, outputs supplied by PLC (or 24 V SELV external on TSX ASY 800, see
page 43560/3)
Analogue/digital conversion 11 bits + sign 13 bits + sign (voltage), 13 bits current
Conversion time ms 2.5 5
Maximum resolution Voltage output 5.12 mV (5), current output 10.25 µ A (6) Voltage output 1.28 mV, current output 2.56 µ A
Output load Voltage output, impedance > 1 kΩ, load < 0.1 µ F, current output, impedance < 600 Ω, load < 300 µ H
Measurement error as a % of FS
Voltage output, FS = 10 V %FS 0.45 to 25 °C, 0.75 from 0 to 60 °C ± 0.14 to 25 °C, ± 0.28 from 0 to 60 °C
Current output, FS = 20 mA %FS 0.52 to 25 °C, 0.98 from 0 to 60 °C ± 0.21 to 25 °C, ± 0.52 from 0 to 60 °C
Isolation between channels and bus V rms 1500 1000
Isolation between channels and earth a 500 V 1000 V rms
Isolation between channels V rms 1500 Common point
Type of protection Short-circuits and overload
Max. voltage without damage V ± 30
Standards IEC 1131

(1) %FS : error as a % of full scale.
(2) IC : with internal cold junction compensation.
(3) EC : with external cold junction compensation (with class A Pt 100 probe on channel 0).
(4) Max. errors, regardless of type of internal or external cold junction compensation (via Telefast sub-base or with class
A Pt 100 probe).
(5) Value given for TSX ASY 410 (software version : II > 10), for TSX ASY 410 (software version : II ≤ 10). This value is
4.88 mV.
(6) Value given for TSX ASY 410 (software version : II > 10), for TSX ASY 410 (software version : II ≤ 10). This value is
9.77 µA.
43530/5
References
Characteristics :
pages 43530/4 and 43530/5
Analogue input modules

Type Input signal Resolution Connection No. of Reference Weight
of inputs range channels (1) kg
Analogue, ± 10 V, 16 bits 1 x 25-way 4 fast TSX AEY 420 0.330

high level 0...10 V, SUB-D channels
with common 0...5 V, connector
point 1...5 V,
0...20 mA,
4...20 mA
TSX AEY 800/420 Analogue, ± 10 V, 0...10 V, 16 bits Screw terminal 4 channels TSX AEY 414 0.320
low level 0...5 V, 1...5 V, block (2)
isolated ± 5 V, 0...20 mA,
4...20 mA,
-13...+63 mV,
0...400 Ω,
0...3850 Ω,
temperature probe,
thermocouple
Analogue, ± 10 V, 12 bits 1 x 25-way 8 channels TSX AEY 800 0.310

high level 0...10 V, SUB-D
with common 0...5 V, connector
point 1...5 V,
0...20 mA,
4...20 mA
TSX AEY 1600/1614 2 x 25-way 16 channels TSX AEY 1600 0.340

SUB-D
connectors
Analogue, ± 10 V, 16 bits 1 x 25-way 8 channels TSX AEY 810 0.330

high level 0...10 V, SUB-D
isolated 0...5 V, connector
1...5 V
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
Thermo- ± 63 mV, 16 bits 2 x 25-way 16 channels TSX AEY 1614 0.350

couple (B, E, J, K, L, SUB-D
N, R, S, T, U) connectors
TSX ASY 410/AEY 414
Analogue output modules

Type Output signal Resolution Connection No. of Reference Weight
of outputs range channels (1) kg
Analogue, ± 10 V, 11 bits Screw terminal 4 channels TSX ASY 410 0.350

isolated 0...20 mA, + sign block (2)
4...20 mA
Analogue, ± 10 V, 13 bits 1 x 25-way 8 channels TSX ASY 800 –

with common 0...20 mA, + sign SUB-D (3)
TSX ASY 800 point 4...20 mA connector
1) Product supplied with a bilingual Quick Reference Guide : English and French.
(2) TSX BLY 01 screw terminal block not supplied. To be ordered separately.
(3) The number of TSX ASY 800 modules is limited to 2 per rack with double format power supply (when this supplies
the a 24 V voltage required by outputs). See power supply modules selection page 43605/3.
43530/6
References (continued)
Characteristics :
pages 43530/4 and 43530/5
Connection accessories
Description Compatible with Use Reference Weight
module (1) kg
Telefast 2 TSX AEY 800 Distribution of 8 channels on screw ABE-7CPA02 0.290

sub-bases TSX AEY 810 (2) terminals
TSX AEY 1600
ABE-7CPA0i TSX ASY 800 (3)
TSX AEY 420/800 Distribution of 8 channels with ABE-7CPA03 0.330

TSX AEY 1600 common point on screw terminals,
protected sensor supply,
continuity of current loops during
disconnection, protection against
overvoltages
TSX AEY 810 Distribution of 8 isolated channels ABE-7CPA31 0.410

on screw terminals, channel by
channel sensor supply (without
common point), protection against
overvoltages
TSX AEY 1614 Distribution of 16 channels on screw ABE-7CPA12 0.360

terminals, integrates temperature
probe for external cold junction
compensation
TSX AEY 420 Distribution of 4 channels on screw ABE-7CPA21 0.200

(4) terminals
Connection TSX AEY 420/800 Link between 25-way SUB-D TSX CAP 030 0.670
cables TSX AEY 810/1600 connectors of analogue
TSX AEY 1614 (5) I/O modules and
TSX ASY 800 ABE-7CPAii sub-bases
Length 3 m
TSX ASY 410 Link between 1.5 m ABF-Y25S150 0.500

module and
ABE-7CPA21
sub-bases (6) 2m ABF-Y25S200 0.560
3m ABF-Y25S300 0.740
5m ABF-Y25S500 0.920
Screw terminal TSX AEY 414 To be ordered separately with TSX BLY 01 0.100
20-way TSX ASY 410 with each I/O module for
connection via screw terminal block
Set of 4 TSX AEY 414 Adaptation for current range TSX AAK2 0.020
TSX BLY 01 resistors (supplied with TSX AEY 414)
(1) Product supplied with a bilingual quick reference guide : French and English.
(2) If the TSX AEY 810 module is used with the ABE-7CPA02 sub-base, the module channels cannot be isolated.
(3) Can be used with TSX AEY 420 module.
(4) Can be used with TSX ASY 410 module by using the ABF-Y25Sii0i cables.
(5) Necessity to use two TSX CAP 030 cables to connect the ABE-7CPA12 sub-base.
(6) Includes the TSX BLY 01 20-way screw terminal block.
43530/7
Process control
Presentation
References :
pages 43511/8 and 43513/5
Characteristics :
page 43620/9
4
The process control
range integrated as
standard in Premium
platforms enables the 2
setup and debugging of
process control loops
specifically designed for 1
machine control
1 User-definable process control TSX P57 2i3/3i3/453M processors and T PCX 57 203/353M
functions coprocessors can be used, depending on the model, to
manage 10 to 20 control channels (of 3 loops each).
These channels can be configured in order to execute
algorithms used in industrial processes :
i Cascaded loop
i Process loop
i Autoselective loop
i Setpoint programmer
i Controller with three simple loops
TSX P57 2i3/3i3/453M processors and TPCX 57 203/353M

2 I/O coprocessors manage an entire station consisting of
racks connected on Bus X.
The I/O interfaces necessary for process control
processing are analogue or discrete module channels in :
i In-rack I/O modules
i TBX or Momentum distributed I/O modules
The software setup of control loops is performed by

3 Control loops entering parameters (Plug and Play technology) when
configuring the TSX P57/T PCX 57 processor or
coprocessor.
The user completes predefined loop diagrams which also
integrate management of the operating mode and the link
with the I/O.
4 Operator dialogue and control XBT-F and T XBT-F operator dialogue terminals have
preconfigured screens dedicated to process control which
simplify loop operation and control. These screens show
the controller front panels as well as trending views and
monitoring views.
43620/2
Process control
Presentation, functions
References :
pages 43511/8 and 43513/5
Characteristics :
page 43620/9
Presentation
TSX P57 2i3/3i3/453M processors and T PCX 57 ii3M coprocessors can be used to configure 10, 15 or 20 continuous
or semi-continuous process control channels.
The control functions of these processors are particularly suitable for :

i Sequential processing requiring auxiliary control functions such as packaging machines, surface treatment machines,
presses, etc.
i Simple processes such as metal processing furnaces, ceramic furnaces, refrigeration units, etc.
i Feedback or mechanical control where sampling time is critical, eg torque control, speed control, etc.
Premium processors have, amongst others, the following characteristics :

i Each configurable control channel can be used to manage 1 to 3 loops depending on the type of loop chosen.
i Process control processors can be inserted in the overall architecture of a site as the PLC can be integrated in various
communication networks.
i Calculations related to process control are performed in floating point mode, expressed as physical units.
Description : TSX P57 ii3M processors, see page 43511/3; TPCX 57 ii3M coprocessors, see page 43513/3.
Characteristics and performance, see page 43620/9.
Functions
Control loops
Premium processors can be used to set up 10 to 20 control channels, each one adopting one of the following 5 loop
profiles :
i Process loop : loop with a single controller
i Controller with 3 simple loops : controller which can increase the capacity of the number of loops
i Autoselective loop also known as secondary : comprises 2 loops in parallel with an output selection algorithm
i Cascaded loop : comprises 2 dependent loops (the master loop output is the slave loop setpoint)
i Setpoint programmer : comprises a maximum of 6 compound profiles with a total of 48 segments
Since the channels are independent, configuration of 10 channels can be used to obtain :
i 30 simple loops
i 5 setpoint programmers, each one associated with 5 control loops
i 2 setpoint programmers and 8 process loops
The various loops are characterised by :

i Their different algorithms
i 5 processing branches (process value, setpoint, Feed Forward, loop controller and output processing)
i Calculation functions (gain, filtering, square root, etc) defined using parameters
Types of control loop
Predefined algorithms, whose parameters can be defined by the user, are shown below :
Process loop Simple loop
Autoselective loop Cascaded loop
43620/3
Process control
Functions (continued)
References :
pages 43511/8 and 43513/5
Characteristics :
page 43620/9
Processing branches
Parameter definition (choice of functions to be used) of control loop profiles enables the algorithm to be adapted to the
process to be controlled.
Process value processing
Process value processing can be performed either in standard fashion or externally.

i Standard processing, the user has the following functions at his disposal : filtering, process value between limits,
function generator with scaling, alarm management on threshold overrun, totalizer and simulation of the measured
value.
i External processing is used to obtain, at the loop controller input, a process value, PV, which was processed outside
the control loop. This solution is useful if measurement calculation of the process value requires specific or customised
functions.
Setpoint processing
Depending on the type of loop chosen, it is possible to opt for one of the following 4 setpoints : ratio setpoint, selection
setpoint, simple setpoint (remote with scaling) or setpoint programmer.
When using the controller with 3 single loops or the secondary loop (in an autoselective loop), only the simple setpoint
and the setpoint programmer can be used.
Feed Forward processing
Feed Forward processing corrects a measurable disturbance as soon as it appears. This open loop processing anticipates
the effect of the disturbance. It has the Leading function (phase lead/lag).
Loop controller and command processing
There are 6 different types of loop controller to choose from : autotuning PID, controller in discrete mode with 2 or 3 states,
hot/cool controller (PID or autotuning model) or Split Range controller (PID or autotuning model).
Output processing
There are 3 types of output processing : analogue output, servomotor output or PWM output. Whatever the type of output,
the control calculated by the controller crosses a ramp limiter and a limiter where the lower and higher limits can be used
to define the output variation range.
Setpoint programmer
The setpoint programmer offers a maximum of 6 profiles with a total of 48 segments. It is therefore possible to create a
48-segment programmer, six 8-segment programmers or one 24-segment programmer with one 16-segment programmer
and one 8-segment programmer, etc
Each segment is configured as a ramp or dwell time. It is

characterised by :
i The setpoint to be reached
i Duration of the segment or gradient of the segment (if a
ramp)
A profile can be executed once, a certain number of times

or continually looped back. Moreover, due to the concept of
guaranteed dwell time, the time will only need to be
downcounted if the process value is actually in the specified
range.
43620/4
Process control
References :
pages 43511/8 and 43513/5
Characteristics :
page 43620/9
Configuration of control channels
Special screens, accessible using PL7 Junior/Pro software, enable the configuration of control loops.
Configuration of control channels

By simply selecting from the menus, the “Loops” interface
on PMX process control processors enables the following
to be configured :
i The type of loop (out of the 5 existing ones)
i The choice of functions used in the 5 processing branches
i Parameters linked to each function
i Assignment of PLC variables to different loop branches
(memory words, input words or output words depending
on the processing branch)
i Automatic presymbolization of variables used in the
loops
Configuration of process, single, autoselective and cascaded loops proposes parameter entry by default. The various
functions integrated in the algorithms (square root, function generator, etc) and the initial value of each parameter are
predefined.
Example : configuration of a process loop

Once the type of loop has been chosen, parameter entry is
performed by selecting or deselecting options in the
processing branches. No programming is therefore
necessary, loop diagrams are enhanced or simplified as
parameters are validated.
The screen opposite shows how selecting the PID controller
can display the various parameters valid for this type of
controller (KP, TI, TD, etc).
For the setpoint programmer, configuration of the various profiles (6 maximum) is done using a table defining each
segment.
Once the type of segment has been chosen (ramp or dwell

time), configuration consists of defining the setpoint to be
reached (for the ramp) and duration (for the ramp or dwell
time).
While making selections, the lower part of the screen

shows the profile display with the setpoint limit values.
This screen also allows the cycles of this profile to be

defined : execution once, a certain number of times or
continually looped back (32,767 times maximum).
Execution of control channels
The loop sampling period is predefined at 300 ms. This defines the loop controller processing period in automatic mode.
It is possible to modify this period in the loop configuration screen.
The user can access all the I/O and parameters for the various configured control channels via the program or by using
the various PL7 Junior/Pro software tools (in particular language editors and animation tables).
43620/5
Process control
References :
pages 43511/8 and 43513/5
Characteristics :
page 43620/9
Debug functions
Adjustment and debugging of control loops is performed in a simple and user-friendly way using the loop configuration
application-specific screen which, when online, can access the following functions :
i Display and animation of the loop algorithm diagram
i Display of alarms linked to the process and channel faults
i Simulation of input interface values : for example when they are not connected (process value, Feed Forward)
i Addition, removal or replacement of calculation functions in online mode
i Modification of adjustment parameters for each function
i Modification of loop controller operating modes and manual control
With the controllers integrated in control loops, it is possible to use the autotuning function which calculates a set of
adjustment parameters (Kp, Ti, Td or Ks, T1, T-delay) upon request.
Once the loop has been debugged, it is possible to save the current test values as the initial loop parameter values. Hence,
on restarting the loop, it will contain the correct values.
Loop debugging
The debugging screen :
i Displays the values of variables linked to the loop
dynamically
i Shows the parameters chosen (or can even modify
them)
i Displays alarms
The menus enable manual control of the loop, autotuning,

parameter backup, etc
Setpoint programmer debugging

Setpoint programmer channels have their own debugging
screen which displays :
i The number of the current segment and the iteration
number
i Execution time of the current segment
i Overall execution time
Runtime screens
The runtime screen tool available in PL7 Pro/Pro-Dyn

software integrates front panel views and trending views in
its object library which can be used to adjust and operate
control loops.
Front panel views and trending views

Predefined controller front panel views provide the user
with the traditional appearance of controller front panels.
The user only enters the variables used by the loop being
dealt with in the various fields in this view.
Similarly, trending views display changes in loop parameters
in graph form as well as useful operating information :
operating mode, alarms, etc.
43620/6
Process control
References :
pages 43511/8 and 43513/5
Characteristics :
page 43620/9
Control and operation
Tools integrated in PL7 software (loop debugging screens,

runtime screens, etc) which are associated with XBT-F and
TXBT-F Magelis graphic screen terminals offer screens
dedicated to the control and operation of control loops.
Setup
These predefined screens offer runtime and control views whose characteristics depend on the type of terminal used :
i XBT-F : Magelis graphic screen terminals

i TXBT-F02 : Magelis graphic stations under Windows operating system
As standard, PL7 Junior/Pro software contains the application developed with XBT-L1003/L1004 development software,
which comprises predefined runtime and control views. When using this dialogue application, animation of runtime and
control views is automatic.
Presentation of views
Each control loop is associated with a certain number of views depending on the size of the Magelis terminal screen.
i With 5" screen terminals, the user has 7 views at his disposal :
- monitoring view
- front panel (bar chart)
- supervisory control view (trending)
- adjustment view
- autotuning view
- setpoint programmer view
- alarm view
With this type of terminal, it is possible to operate 8 loops.
i With 10" screen terminals, the user has 5 views at his disposal :
- monitoring view
- front panel view integrating the display of the front panel, loop adjustment and autotuning
- supervisory control view
- setpoint programmer view
- alarm view
With this type of terminal, it is possible to operate 16 loops.
All runtime pages are based on the same presentation module :

i An alarm zone is positioned at the bottom of the screen. It shows the last active alarm
i Dynamic function keys execute one and only one function (access to the adjustment page, starting autotuning,
navigation between the various pages, selecting a loop, etc.)
It is of course possible for the user to customise the screens to suit his requirements.
43620/7
Process control
Function (continued)
References :
pages 43511/8 and 43513/5
Characteristics :
page 43620/9
Presentation of views (continued)
Monitoring view
This view is the control application entry point. It gives an
overall view of all loops being operated on a single screen.
For each loop, this view displays the loop name,
measurement/setpoint deviation, operating mode, alarms
and the execution of autotuning if applicable.
The user can select a loop and access the front panel for
example.
Front panel view

The front panel view uses the traditional format of controller
front panels with the process value, the setpoint and the
deviation between the 2. This view also integrates the
operating mode as well as any alarms on the loop.
Function keys allow navigation between pages as well as

control of loop operating modes.
Adjustment view
This view is used to adjust the loop controller. This function
must be executed by qualified personnel. All the adjustment
parameters are therefore write protected by a password.
However, this view is always accessible in read mode.
The password applies to the whole man-machine interface.
Supervisory control view

This view displays the same information as the front panel view and also shows the 3 trends which are characteristic of
the loop. The most recent trend history is recorded.
Function keys allow navigation between pages as well as control of the loop operating modes.
Setpoint programmer adjustment view

Two views specific to setpoint programmers are supplied. One is used to display the various profile names and to select
one of them, the other is used to follow a given profile.
The second view is used to :

i Display the setpoint profile
i Modify the segments, ramps and dwell time
i Access the given profile
i Track the process value
i Control the profile
43620/8
Process control
Characteristics
References :
pages 43511/8 and 43513/5
Characteristics
The table below summarises the main characteristics of Premium processors and coprocessors presented in pages 43511/6, 43511/7 and 43513/4.
Type of processor TSX P57 2i3M/T PCX 57 203M TSX P57 3i3M/T PCX 57 353M TSX P57 453M
Number of racks 16 (1) 16 (1) 16 (1)
Number of discrete I/O (2) 1024 1024 2048
Number of analogue channels (2) 80 128 256
Number of app.-specific channels (2) 24 32 64
Number of control channels 10 15 20
Process control functions Process loop

3 simple loops
Cascaded loop
Autoselective loop
Setpoint programmer
Network connections 1 3 4
Fipio bus manager connection 1 (integrated with model 1 (integrated with model 1 (integrated)
TSX P57 253M ) TSX/T PCX 57 353M)
Third-party bus connections 1 2 2
AS-i bus connections 4 8 8
Memory Internal RAM Kwords 48/64 depending on model 64/80 or 80/96 depending on model (3) 96/176 (3)
Capacity on PCMCIA card Kwords 160 384 512
Memory occupation Kwords 5 per type of loop + 5 per type of loop + 5 per type of loop +
0.5 per control channel 0.5 per control channel 0.5 per control channel
(1) Maximum number of TSX RKY racks. Using the TSX RKY 12EX rack (12 slots) is the same as using 2 racks with 4,
6 or 8 slots.
(2) The maximum numbers of discrete I/O, analogue I/O and application-specific channels are cumulative. The number
of remote I/O is not counted.
(3) The second value corresponds to the capacity of the integrated memory when the processor is fitted with a PCMCIA
memory card.
43620/9
Counter and electronic cam modules
Selection guide
Applications Counter modules
Number of channels 2 channels 4 channels

Frequency per channel 40 kHz 40 kHz
Module cycle time 5 ms 10 ms
Counter/ Counting Up to 40 kHz :

measure- pulses - proximity sensor type 2
ment a 24 V - mechanical contacts
inputs Incremental Up to 40 kHz :
encoder - a 10…30 V,
- a 5 V RS 422 with zero marker
Absolute –
encoder
Reflex I/O Per channel :

- 3 inputs a 24 V : enable, preset and read, 1 input a 24 V line check, incremental encoder power supply
- 2 reflex outputs a 24 V
Counting capacity 24 bits + sign (0 to + 16 777 215 points or ± 16 777 215 points)
Functions Downcounting with preset input, upcounting with reset to zero input
Up/down counting with preset input, configurable upcounter input :
- 1 upcounter input/1 downcounter input
- 1 up/down counter input and 1 direction input
- Incremental encoder with phase-shifted signals
Processing Inputs :
Counter enable, counter preset, read current value
Comparison :
Downcounting : to value 0. Upcounting : 2 thresholds and 1 setpoint. Up/down counting : 2 thresholds and 2 setpoints.
Reflex outputs :
Downcounting function : 1 passage through zero output. Upcounting function : 1 passage through setpoint value output.
Up/down counting function : 2 user-definable outputs.
Events User-definable activation of the event-triggered task (threshold crossing, setpoint crossing, preset or reset, enable,
capture)
Connection - 15-way SUB-D connectors (1 per counter channel, direct or TSX TAP S15ii accessory)
- HE 10 connector for auxiliary I/O and power supply
- Telefast 2 system (ABE-7CPA01, ABE-7H08R10/16R20)
Type of module TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 4A
Page 43540/5 43540/5
0452Q/2
Fast counter and measurement module Electronic cam module
2 channels 1 channel
500 kHz
1 ms
Up to 1 MHz : –
- proximity sensor type 2
- mechanical contacts
500 kHz in multiplication by 1, 250 kHz in multiplication by 4 :
- a 10…30 V,
- a 5 V RS 422 with zero marker
Power supply a 5 V or a 10…30 V :
- SSI absolute encoder up to 25 bits
- parallel absolute encoder up to 24 bits (with Telefast ABE-7CPA11 sub-base)
Per channel :
- 2 inputs a 24 V : preset and read - 3 proximity sensor compatible inputs 24 V type I
- 1 enable input or a 24 V output, configurable - 24 track outputs 24 V/0.5 A protected
- 2 reflex outputs a 24 V
- 1 programmable frequency output 24 V
- 1 encoder power supply input a 5 V/24 V
24 bits + sign (0 to + 16 777 215, upcounting) or 256 to 32 768 points per cycle and from 1 to 32 768 cycles
24 bits + sign (- 16 777 215 to + 16 777 215, downcounting, (absorbs play on reverse)
up/down counting). Up to 25 bits for SSI absolute encoder
Up/down counting with preset input, configurable counter input : Processing of 128 cams/32 tracks (of which 24 with direct output)
- 1 upcounter input/1 downcounter input Output update cycle :
- 1 up/down counter input and 1 direction input - 50 µs for 16 cams, 100 µs for 64 cams, 200 µs for 128 cams
- incremental encoder with phase-shifted signals - 1 parts counter
Measurement 2 : - 2 capture registers
- SSI absolute encoder - control/recalibration of axis slip
- parallel output absolute encoder with ABE-7CPA11 sub-base
Inputs : Cam profiles :

Counter enable, counter preset, read current value 3 basic types (position, monostable, brake)
Comparison : Associated functions :
2 thresholds - elimination of axis backlash, position recalibration
Reflex outputs : 2 user-definable outputs - measurement capture
Speed monitoring - switching feedforward
Special functions - parts counter
User-definable activation of the event-triggered task (crossing of thresholds User-definable activation of the event-triggered task (cams, track, adjustment,
or modulo value, preset, enable, capture) read, etc.)
- 15 way SUB-D connectors (1 per counter channel, direct or TSX TAP S15ii accessory)
- HE 10 connector for reflex I/O and power supply
- Telefast 2 system (ABE-7CPA01, ABE-7H16R20, ABE-7CPA11)
TSX CTY 2C TSX CCY 1128
43541/5 43542/4
0452Q/3
Motion control modules
Selection guide
Applications Motion control modules for servomotors. Compatible with Lexium servodrives with analog setpoint and Altivar 58
Number of axes 2 axes 4 axes 2 axes 4 axes
Frequency per axis Counter : 500 kHz with incremental encoder. Acquisition : 200 kHz with SSI serial absolute encoder or parallel output
Counter input Per axis : Per axis :

- Incremental encoder a 5 V, RS 422/RS 485 - Incremental encoder a 5 V, RS 422/RS 485
or Totem pole, - SSI serial absolute encoder 12 to 25 bits
- SSI serial absolute encoder 16 to 25 bits a 10…30 V - Parallel output absolute encoder 12 to 24 bits
- Parallel output absolute encoder 16 to 24 bits conversion sub-base (ABE-7CPA11)
a 5/10/30 V with Telefast 2 conversion sub-base
(ABE-7CPA11)
Control outputs Per axis :

- 1 analog output ± 10 V, 13 bits + sign servodrive setpoint
Per axis :
Auxiliary - 4 discrete I/O a 24 V (homing cam, event, recalibration, emergency stop)
I/O - 1 input/1 output for servodrive control
- 1 reflex output a 24 V
Counter capacity
Functions Servo Control on individual linear axis Servo Control on individual infinite axis
Follower axes (dynamic ratio)
Realtime correction of servodrive offset
Processing Positioning of a moving part on an axis according to motion control functions supplied by the PLC processor
Axis parameter setting, adjustment and debugging using PL7 Junior/Pro software
Events User-definable activation of the event-triggered task
Connection - 9 and 15-way SUB-D connectors for encoder input (direct or via TSX TAP S15ii accessory), speed reference
- HE 10 connector for auxiliary inputs
- Telefast 2 system (ABE-7CPA01, ABE-7H16R20, ABE-7CPA11)
- Specific accessories (TSX TAP MAS)
Type of module TSX CAY 21 TSX CAY 41 TSX CAY 22 TSX CAY 42
Page 43550/5 43550/5 43550/5 43550/5
0453Q/2
ATV-58F variable speed drives Motion control modules for servomotors. Motion control modules for stepper motor
Compatible with Lexium MHDS servodrives with
SERCOS® digital link
3 axes 8 axes 1 axis 2 axes
absolute encoder SERCOS® ring : 4 M bauds/s 187 kHz
Per SERCOS® digital link Per axis, translator inputs a 5 V, negative logic
or Totem pole (translator loss of step checks)
a 5/10/30 V with Telefast 2
Per SERCOS® digital link Per axis, RS 422 translator outputs, TTL 5 V
compatible (+/- pulses, boost, enable, reset loss
of step check)
Per SERCOS® digital link Per axis :

- 6 discrete inputs a 24 V
- 1 output a 24 V (brake control)
24 bits + sign (± 16,777,215 points)
Servo Control on individual linear or infinite axis Individual linear or infinite axis
Linear interpolation on 2 or 3 axes Linear interpolation on 2 to 8 axes
Realtime correction of servodrive offset Follower axes (6 slaves) by gearing or camming
Open loop control of the position of a moving part

on a limited linear axis according to motion control
functions supplied by the PLC processor
Communication with the servodrives via SERCOS® Axis parameter setting, adjustment and debugging
digital link (adjustment, diagnostics) using PL7 Junior/Pro software
- 2 SMA type connectors for plastic (or glass) fiber - 15-way SUB-D connector for translator
optic cable - 20-way HE 10 connector for auxiliary I/O
- Telefast 2 system (ABE-7H16R20)
TSX CAY 33 TSX CSY 84 TSX CFY 11 TSX CFY 21
43550/5 43555/4 43551/5 43551/5
0453Q/3
TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules
Characteristics :
page 43540/3 Presentation, description, operation
Connections :
page 43540/4
References :
page 43540/5
Presentation
Counting functions are required for counting parts or events, grouping objects, incoming or outgoing flow control, and
measuring the length or the position of elements.
Premium PLCs perform these functions using TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules which have a counting frequency of
40 kHz maximum. In a Premium PLC configuration, the number of TSX CTY counter modules is added to the number of
other application-specific modules (communication, motion control and weighing). See pages 43511/8 and 43513/5. They
can be disconnected while powered up. Counter modules are characterised by the number of channels :
i 2 channels with downcounting, upcounting and up/down counting functions for the TSX CTY 2A module
i 4 channels with downcounting, upcounting and up/down counting functions for the TSX CTY 4A module
The parameters of these functions are set by software configuration. The modules accept a 5 V or a 10 to 30 V solid
state output sensors (incremental encoders, proximity sensors, photoelectric detectors) and mechanical contact output
sensors (in this case the counting frequency is limited to 100 Hz).
Description
The front panel of TSX CTY 2A (2-channel) and TSX CTY 4A

3
(4-channel) counter modules comprises :
4
1 One 15-way SUB-D type connector per channel for
1 connecting :
i Counting sensors or incremental encoder
i Sensor power supply
i Encoder supply feedback for checking it is correctly
3 supplied
4
2 One 20-way HE10 type connector for 2 channels for
2 1 connecting on each channel :
i Auxiliary inputs : preset, enable
TSX CTY 2A i Reflex outputs
i Power supplies for auxiliary I/O and incremental
encoders
3 Rigid casing which :

2 i Holds the electronic card
i Locates and locks the module in its slot, etc
TSX CTY 4A 4 Module diagnostic LEDs :

i Module diagnostics :
- green RUN LED : module operating
4 - red ERR LED : internal fault, module failure
CH2 CH0 RUN ERR - red I/O LED : external fault
CH3 CH1 I/O i Channel diagnostics :
- green CHi LED : channel diagnostics available
Operation block diagram
Block diagram of a channel
Configuration
and adjustment Configuration Discrete sensor or Incremental encoder input
%KW, %MW parameters incremental Sensor inputs
encoder signals
Auxiliary Counter enable input

Upcounting and/or I/O Read input
%Q, %QW downcounting function processing Preset input
with processing :
%I, %IW - measurement comp-
arison with 2 thresholds
and 2 setpoints Reflex output 0
- event management Reflex output 1
Counter modules are set up using PL7 Junior/Pro software (see page 43100/2).
43540/2
Characteristics
References :
page 43540/5
Connections :
page 43540/4
Electrical characteristics
Type of module TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 4A
Modularity 2 channels 4 channels
Frequency on counter inputs kHz 40 maximum 40 maximum
Consumption mA See page 43605/2 See page 43605/2
Dissipated power W 4.5 typical (6 maximum) 8 typical (11.5 maximum)
Sensor power supply check Yes Yes
Module cycle time ms 5 10

Event processing response time ms Acceptance of event-triggered input (enable/read/preset) and positioning of :
- reflex output on TSX CTY 2A/4A : 1 ms
- discrete module output; TSX DSY 8T22 : 2.1 ms; TSX DSY 32T2K : 3.2 ms
Input characteristics
Type of input Counter inputs Auxiliary inputs

(IA/IB/IZ) (preset, enable, read)
Nominal Voltage V 5 24 24
values Current mA 18 18 7
Limit Voltage V ≤ 5.5 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, 19...30 (up to 34 V possible,
values limit 1 hr per 24 hr period) limit 1 hr per 24 hr period)
At state 1 Voltage V ≥ 2.4 ≥ 11 ≥ 11
Current mA > 3.7 (for U = 2.4 V) > 6 (for U = 11 V) > 6 (for U = 11 V)
At state 0 Voltage V ≤ 1.2 ≤5 ≤5
Current mA < 1 (for U = 1.2 V) < 2 (for U = 5 V) < 2 (for U = 5 V)
Logic Positive Positive Positive
Sensor voltage
check At loss of 24 V ms – – < 2.5
response
time At return of 24 V ms – – < 10
Input impedance for nominal U Ω 400 1400 3400
Input impedance for U = 2.4 V Ω > 270 – –
(RS 422 compatibility)
Response time Maximum permissible frequency 40 kHz with incremental encoder < 250 µ s
Immunity 1.6 ms with mechanical contact
Type of input Resistive Resistive Current sink
IEC 1131 conformity – Type 2 Type 2
2-wire proximity sensor compatibility – 2-wire/3-wire 2-wire/3-wire
Output characteristics
Type of output Auxiliary outputs (2 per channel)
Nominal voltage V a 24
Voltage limits V 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, limit 1 hr per 24 hr period)
Nominal current mA 500
Maximum voltage drop when ON V < 0.5
Leakage current mA < 0.1
Switching time µs < 250
Electrostatic discharge time s L/R

Switching frequency
on inductive load Hz F < 0.6 / (LI2)
Compatibility with
d.c. inputs All positive logic inputs with input resistance < 15 kΩ
IEC 1131-2 compatibility Yes

Protections against overloads
and short-circuits Current limiter and thermal tripping (reactivated via program or automatically)
Protection against channel
overvoltages Zener diode between outputs and + 24 V
Protection against polarity
inversions Diode reverse-mounted on supply
43540/3
Connections, dimensions
Characteristics :
page 43540/3
References :
page 43540/5
Connections
Examples of connecting counter inputs Counter sensor
28
++ – – a 24 V supply + 24 VDC 26
1 2 + + – – – 0 VDC 27
Telefast 2 – 0 VDC 25
TSX CTY 4A
GND
3 3 EPSR 18
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
Channel 2 Channel 0 IZ – 16
ABE-7CPA01
–
Channel 1 IZ + 24 V 14 Z
Channel 3
4 3-wire PNP
+
proximity sensor
IB – 10
–
IB + 24 V 8 B
+
Channels 2 and 3 Channels 0 and 1
IA – 1
–
IA + 24 V 4 A
+
GND
Examples of connecting auxiliary I/O

Auxiliary I/O
++ – – a 24 V supply Q1 315
115 Reflex
6 ++ – –
Q0 314 outputs
Telefast 2 114
5
110
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
ICapt1 Read
1
2
3
4
+
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
210
Channel 1
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
109
ABE-7H16R20 IVal1 Enable
+
+ ABE-7BV20 209
108
IPres1 Preset
+
208
313
Q1
113 Reflex
312 outputs
Q0
112
106
ICapt0 Read
+
206 Channel 0
105
1 Incremental encoder Enable
+
2 TSX TAP S15 05/24 connector IVal0

205
TSX TAP S15 05 TSX TAP S15 24
1 IB - 7 NC 1 NC 7 NC 104
Preset
2 Power ret. 8 IB + 5 V 2 NC 8 IB + 24 V
+
IPres0
204
3 IZ + 5V 9 NC 3 IZ + 24 V 9 NC
4 IZ - 10 0 V 4 NC 10 0 V
5 IA + 5 V 11 NC 5 IA + 24 V 11 NC
6 IA - 12 + 5 V 6 NC 12 + 10…30 V 102
Encoder
3 TSX CCP S15 cable with connector 101 a 10...30 V
power supply
4 TSX CAP S15 connector
100
5 TSX CDP ii1 preformed cable with connector and flying leads a5V
6 TSX CDP ii2 or TSX CDP ii3 rolled ribbon or preformed cable with connectors
Dimensions
Connection interface for incremental encoder
TSX TAP S15 05/24
Ø 5,5
43
70,4
i
27,4
31 38 Mounting through enclosure (dust and damp proof)

55 47 - cut-out Ø 37
- maximum panel thickness 5 mm
43540/4
References
Characteristics :
page 43540/3
Counter modules
Type of input Characteristics No. of Reference Weight
chan. (1) kg
2/3-wire prox. sensors Counting 40 kHz 2 TSX CTY 2A 0.320

PNP/NPN, a 24 V, Cycle time 5 ms
Incremental encoders,
a 5 V RS 422,
a 10…30 V Totem Pole Counting 40 kHz 4 TSX CTY 4A 0.430
Cycle time 10 ms
TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 4A Connection accessories

Description For connecting Connector type Unit Weight
on TSX CTY ii reference kg
SUB-D Counter sensors SUB-D, 15-way TSX CAP S15 0.050

connectors or incremental encoder
(sold in lots of 2)
Telefast 2 Counter sensors and SUB-D, 15-way ABE-7CPA01 0.300

ABE-7CPA01 connection a 24 V power supply
sub-bases
Auxiliary inputs, HE 10, 20-way ABE-7H16R20 0.300
a 24 V power supply and (for 2 channels )
a 5 V/10…30 V
encoder power supply
Additional 20 shunted terminals (Sold in lots of 5) ABE-7BV20 0.030

terminal block for ABE-7H16R20
sub-base
ABE-7H16R20
Connection Encoder a 5 V RS 422 SUB-D, 15-way TSX TAP S15 05 0.260
interfaces for
incremental
encoder Encoder a 10...30 V SUB-D, 15-way TSX TAP S15 24 0.260
Totem Pole
Connecting cables
TSX TAP S15 ii Description From TSX CTY ii To Length Reference Weight
module kg
Cables 15-way SUB-D ABE-7CPA01/ 0.5 m TSX CCP S15 050 0.110
(cross-section connector ABE-CPA11
2
0.205 mm ) sub-bases or
TSX TAP S15ii 1m TSX CCP S15 100 0.160
accessory
(15-way SUB-D
connector) 2.5 m TSX CCP S15 0.300
20-wire Auxiliary inputs, Free end with 3m TSX CDP 301 0.400
preformed a 24 V power supply and colour-coded wires
cables a 5 V/10…30 V 5m TSX CDP 501 0.660
(500 mA max.) encoder power supply
(HE 10, 20-way 10 m TSX CDP 1001 1.210
TSX CCP S15 iii TSX CDP i01 moulded connector)
Rolled Auxiliary inputs, ABE-7H16R20 1m TSX CDP 102 0.090

ribbon cable a 24 V power supply and Telefast 2 sub-base
(100 mA max.) a 5 V/10…30 V (HE 10, 20-way 2m TSX CDP 202 0,170
encoder power supply connector)
(HE 10, 20-way 3m TSX CDP 302 0.250
connector)
Connecting Auxiliary inputs, ABE-7H16R20 0.5 m TSX CDP 053 0.085

cables a 24 V power supply and Telefast 2 sub-base
(500 mA max.) a 5 V/10…30 V (HE 10, 20-way 1m TSX CDP 103 0,150
encoder power supply connector)
(HE 10, 20-way 2m TSX CDP 203 0.280
connector)
3m TSX CDP 303 0.410
5m TSX CDP 503 0.670

TSX CDP i02 TSX CDP i03
(1) Product supplied with a bilingual Quick Reference Guide : English and French
43540/5
TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module
Presentation, description, operation

Characteristics :
page 43541/3
References :
page 43541/5
Presentation
The TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module is used with fast machines requiring precise measurements with
short cycle times and high input frequencies (timber machines, packing machines, etc).
The TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module provides the standard functions (speed monitoring, reflex outputs,
etc) enabling a simple position control function to be performed by the application program.
The TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module also enables special functions to be managed.
Description
The front panel of a TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module comprises :
1 One 15-way SUB-D connector per channel for

3 connecting :
4 i Counting sensors or incremental encoder
i SSI absolute encoder or parallel output encoder with
1 ABE-7CPA11 sub-base
i Sensor power supply
i Encoder power supply feedback for checking it is
correctly supplied
2 One 20-way HE10 connector for connecting on each

channel :
2 i Auxiliary inputs : preset, enable and read
i Reflex outputs
i Programmable frequency output
TSX CTY 2C i Power supplies for auxiliary I/O and encoders
3 Rigid casing which :

i Holds the electronic card
i Locates and locks the module in its slot, etc
4 Module diagnostic lamps :

- green RUN lamp : module operating
- red ERR lamp : internal fault, module failure
- red I/O lamp : external fault
i Channel diagnostics :
4 - green CHi lamp : channel diagnostics available
CH0 RUN ERR
CH1 I/O
Block diagram of a channel :
Configuration
and adjustment Configuration Discrete sensor Incremental encoder input
%KW, %MW parameters signals or Detector inputs
incremental SSI absolute encoder inputs
encoder or SSI Parallel output encoder inputs
absolute encoder
Auxiliary I/O Enable input (1)

Upcounting/downcounting
processing Read input
function and measurement
%Q, %QW Preset input
with processing :
- measurement comparison Reflex output 0
%I, %IW
with 2 thresholds Reflex output 1
- event management Output 2 (1)
- speed monitoring Programmable frequency output 3
Counter modules are set up using PL7 Junior/Pro software (see page 43100/2). This requires the use of TSX P/PCX
57ii2/3M processors.
(1) The enable input and output 2 cannot be used simultaneously.
43541/2
Characteristics
References :
page 43541/5
Type of module TSX CTY 2C
Modularity 2 channels
Frequency on counter inputs Counting : 1 MHz.

With phase-shifted signal encoder : multiplication by 1 : 500 kHz, multiplication by 4 : 250 kHz.
Dissipated power W 7 typical (10 max)
Sensor power supply check Yes
Module cycle time ms 1 (for 2 channels)

Event processing ms Acceptance of event-triggered input (enable/read/preset) and positioning of :
response time - a reflex output : 1 ms
- discrete output modules TSX DSY 8T22 : 2.1 ms ; TSX DSY 32T2K : 3.2 ms
Type of input Counter inputs Auxiliary inputs

(IA/IB/IZ or SSI absolute encoder) (IA/IB/IZ ) (preset, enable, read)
Nominal Voltage V 5 24 24
values Current mA 18 16 8
Limit Voltage V ≤ 5.5 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, 19...30 (up to 34 V possible,
values limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period) limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period)
At state 1 Voltage V ≥ 2.4 ≥ 11 ≥ 11
Current mA > 3.6 (for U = 2.4 V) > 6 (for U = 11 V) > 6 (for U = 11 V)
At state 0 Voltage V ≤ 1.2 ≤5 ≤5
Current mA < 1 (for U = 1.2 V) < 2 (for U = 5 V) < 2 (for U = 5 V)
Sensor voltage check
response time
At loss of 24 V ms – – < 2.5
At return of 24 V ms – – < 10

Input impedance for U = 2.4 V Ω > 270 – –
(RS 422 compatibility)
Response time µs – – < 50
Type of input Resistive Resistive Current sink
Proximity sensor compatibility – 2-wire/3-wire 2-wire/3-wire
Type of output Auxiliary outputs (2 per channel)
Voltage limits V 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, limited to 1 hour per 24 hour period)
Maximum voltage drop when ON V < 0.5
Leakage current mA < 0.1
Switching time µs < 250
Electrostatic discharge time s L/R

Switching frequency
on inductive load Hz F < 0.6 / (LI2)
Compatibility with
d.c. inputs All positive logic inputs with input resistance < 15 kΩ
IEC 1131-2 compatibility Yes

Protection against overloads
and short-circuits Current limiter and thermal tripping (reactivation via program or automatically)
Protection against channel
overvoltages Zener diode between outputs and + 24 V
Protection against polarity
inversions Diode reverse-mounted on supply
43541/3
`
Connections, dimensions
Characteristics :
page 43541/3
References :
page 43541/5
Connections
Examples of connecting counter inputs Counter sensor 28
++ – – a 24 V power supply + 24 VDC 26
1 4 + + – – – 0 VDC 27
Telefast 2 – 0 VDC 25
TSX CTY 2C
EPSR 18
GND
5 5
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
Channel 0 Channel 0 IZ – 16
ABE-7CPA01
–
2 IZ + 24 V 14 Z
6 Channel 1 Channel 1
3-wire PNP
+
++ – – proximity sensor
IB – 10
–
5 + + – –
IB + 24 V 8 B
Telefast 2
+
Channels 0 and 1
IA – 1
GND
–
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
A
1
3
5
7
9
IA + 24 V 4
ABE-7CPA11
+
3
GND
Examples of connecting auxiliary I/O

Auxiliary I/O
++ – – a 24 V power supply 315
Q1
115 Reflex
8 ++ – – 314
Q0 outputs
Telefast 2 114
7 311 Frequency
Q3
111 output
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
110
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
ICapt1 Read
+
Channel 1
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
210
C
C
C
C
ABE-7H16R20 109 Enable

IVal1
+
+ ABE-7BV20
209
108
IPres1 Preset
+
208
313
Q1 Reflex
113
312 outputs
Q0
112
307 Frequency
Q3
107 output
106
ICapt0 Read
+
1 Incremental encoder Channel 0

206
2 SSI serial absolute encoder fitted with its cable
105
3 Parallel output absolute encoder IVal0
+
Enable
4 TSX TAP S15 05/24 connector 205
TSX TAP S15 05 TSX TAP S15 24 104
IPres0 Preset
+
1 IB - 7 NC 1 NC 7 NC 204
2 Power ret. 8 IB + 5 V 2 NC 8 IB + 24 V
3 IZ + 5V 9 NC 3 IZ + 24 V 9 NC
4 IZ - 10 0 V 4 NC 10 0 V
103 Reference voltage
5 IA + 5 V 11 NC 5 IA + 24 V 11 NC
6 IA - 12 + 5 V 6 NC 12 + 10…30 V 102
Encoder
5 TSX CCP S15iii cable with connectors 101
power supply
100
7 TSX CDP ii1 preformed cable with connectors a5V
8 TSX CDP ii2 or TSX CDP ii3 rolled ribbon or preformed cable with connectors
Dimensions
TSX TAP S15 05/24
Ø 5,5
43
i
70,4
27,4
Mounting through enclosure (dust and damp proof)

31 38
- cut-out Ø 37
55 47 - maximum panel thickness 5 mm
43541/4
References
Characteristics :
page 43541/3
Measurement and counter module

chan. (1) kg
2/3-wire prox. sensors Counting 2 TSX CTY 2C 0.340

PNP/NPN, a 24 V, Cycle time 1 ms
Incremental encoders,
a 5 V RS 422,
a 10…30 V Totem Pole
SSI serial or parallel output Cycle time 1 ms 2 TSX CTY 2C 0.340

absolute encoders with
ABE-7CPA11 sub-base
TSX CTY 2C
Description For connecting Connector type Unit Weight
on TSX CTY 2C reference kg
SUB-D Counter sensors SUB-D, 15-way TSX CAP S15 0.050

connector or incremental
(Sold in lots of 2) encoder
ABE-7CPA01 Telefast 2 Counter sensors and SUB-D, 15-way ABE-7CPA01 0.300

connection
sub-bases
a 24 V power supply
Auxiliary inputs, HE 10, 20-way ABE-7H16R20 0.300
4
supply a 24 V (for 2 channels)
and encoder supply
a 5 V/10…30 V
Additional 20 shunted terminals for (Order in multiples of 5) ABE-7BV20 0.030

terminal block ABE-7H16R20 sub-base
ABE-7H16R20 Adaptor Parallel output SUB-D, 15-way ABE-7CPA11 0.300
sub-base for absolute encoders
TSX CTY 2C a 5 V, a 10…30 V
module (2)
Connection Encoder a 5 V RS 422 SUB-D, 15-way TSX TAP S15 05 0.260

interfaces for
incremental Encoder a 10...30 V SUB-D, 15-way TSX TAP S15 24 0.260
TSX TAP S15 ii encoder Totem Pole
Connecting cables
Description From TSX CTY 2C To Length Reference Weight
module kg
Cables 15-way, SUB-D ABE-7CPA01/ 0.5 m TSX CCP S15 050 0.110
(cross-section connector ABE-CPA11
0.205 mm2) sub-bases or
TSX TAP S15ii 1m TSX CCP S15 100 0.160
accessory
(15-way, SUB-D
connector) 2.5 m TSX CCP S15 0.300
20-wire Auxiliary inputs Free end with 3m TSX CDP 301 0.400
preformed supply a 24 V flying leads
cables and encoder supply 5m TSX CDP 501 0.660
TSX CCP S15 iii TSX CDP i01 (500 mA max) a 5 V/10…30 V
(20-way, HE 10 10 m TSX CDP 1001 1.210
moulded connector)
Rolled ribbon Auxiliary inputs ABE-7H16R20 1m TSX CDP 102 0.090

cables supply a 24 V Telefast 2 sub-base
(100 mA max) and encoder supply (20-way, HE 10 2m TSX CDP 202 0.170
a 5 V/10…30 V connector)
(20-way, HE 10 3m TSX CDP 302 0.250
connector)
Connecting Auxiliary inputs ABE-7H16R20 0.5 m TSX CDP 053 0.085

cables supply a 24 V Telefast 2 sub-base
(500 mA max) and encoder supply (20-way, HE 10 1m TSX CDP 103 0.150
a 5 V/10…30 V connector) 2m TSX CDP 203 0.280
(20-way, HE 10 3m TSX CDP 303 0.410
moulded connector) 5m TSX CDP 503 0.670
(1) Product supplied with a bilingual Quick Reference Guide : English and French.
TSX CDP i02 TSX CDP i03 (2) Enables multiplexing of 2 absolute encoders on the same channel (up to 4 absolute encoders when using 2
ABE-7CPA11 adaptor sub-bases).
43541/5
TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module
Characteristics :
page 43542/3 Description, operation
References :
page 43542/4
Connections, dimensions:
page 43542/5
The TSX CCY 1128 module performs the “electronic cam”

function for an animated axis of a rotary movement in a
single direction, alternating, cyclical (with periodic arrival of
Premium parts for processing) or endless (with random arrival of
parts for processing). The axis is managed by an incremental
or absolute encoder.
The TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module manages,
Encoder Motor independently, up to 128 cams which may be spread over a
maximum of 32 tracks to which 24 discrete physical outputs
and 8 logic outputs may be assigned.
Processing is structured in 4 groups of 8 tracks each, with
Track outputs groups 0 and 1 associated with the module connector 0 and
groups 2 and 3 with connector 1.
Preactuators The TSX CCY 1128 module can be used for the following
functions : elimination of axis backlash, position recalibration,
capturing measurements (part length, number of points per
revolution, angle of arrival of parts, slip, etc), anticipation of
switching, parts counter, generating events.
Like all application-specific modules, the TSX CCY 1128
module can be installed in any slot of a Premium PLC,
except those dedicated to the power supply and the
processor.
Description
The front panel of the TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module comprises :
1 One 15-way SUB-D connector for connecting the
incremental or absolute encoder
5
2 One 20-way HE 10 connector for connecting the track
6 outputs on groups 0 and 1 (connector 0)
3 One 20-way HE 10 connector for connecting the track

outputs on groups 2 and 3 (connector 1)
1
2 4 One 20-way HE 10 connector for connecting the auxiliary
inputs and the encoder power supply
3
4 5 Rigid casing for the following functions :
i Holding the electronic cards
TSX CCY 1128 i Attaching and locking the module in its slot
6 Module diagnostic indicator lights :

- green RUN indicator lamp : module on
- red ERR indicator lamp : internal fault, module
6 defective
CH0 RUN ERR
- red I/O indicator lamp : external or application fault
I/O i Channel diagnostics :
- green CH0 indicator lamps : channel diagnostics
operative
Operation
Channel mimic diagram :
Configuration
+ adjustment Configuration Servo Encoder inputs
%KW.%MW
parameters loop
Track outputs
Processing Auxiliary Recalibration input

%O, %QW input Read input 1
Read input 2
processing
%I, %IW
The electronic cam module is set up using PL7 Junior/Pro (version ≥ 3.4) and requires the use of processors with software
version ≥ 3.3.
43542/2
Characteristics
References :
page 43542/4
Connections, dimensions:
page 43542/5
Operating characteristics
Number of cams 128 position, monostable, brake type

Number of tracks 32 (24 directly associated with the 24 physical outputs, 8 logic)
Position encoder inputs Incremental with RS 422/485 line emitter or Totem Pole output
Absolute with SSI serial link
Absolute with parallel outputs (via ABE-7CPA11 adaptor sub-base)
Controlled outputs 24 discrete outputs 24 V, 0.5 A
Associated functions Elimination of axis backlash, position recalibration, measurement capture, switching feedforward,
parts counter, generation of events
Modularity 1 axis
Max. frequency on encoder input
SSI absolute encoder 8 to 25 bits CLK transmission frequency kHz 200
Incremental encoder x1 kHz 500
x4 kHz 250
Current drawn by the module On internal 5 V with internal mA 660
(typical) module fan during operation
On 24 V sensors/preactuators mA 15
(auxiliary inputs and track outputs)
On 10…30 V (use of an SSI mA 11
encoder and single 24 V power supply)
Power dissipated in the module W 7
(typical)
Monitoring of sensor/ Yes
preactuator power supplies
Output refresh cycle µs 50 (up to 16 cams), 100 (up to 32 cams),
200 (up to 128 cams)
Type of input Encoder inputs (IA/IB/IZ) Auxiliary inputs

with RS 422 with 10…30 V (recalibration, capture
0, capture 1)
Logic Differential inputs Positive or negative Positive
Nominal Voltage V – 24 24
values Current mA 10 15.5 8
Sensor power supply V ≤ 5.5 19…30 (possible up to 34 V limited to
1 hr in 24 hrs)
Limit values
At state 1 Voltage V >3 ≥ 11 ≥ 11
Current mA > 5.8 >5 >3
At state 0 Voltage V ≤ -3 <5 <5
Current mA ≤ - 5.8 <2 < 1.5
Input impedance for nominal U Ω – 1500 3000
Type of input Resistive Resistive Resistive
Response time µs – – < 100
Conformity with IEC 1131 – – Type 1
Compatibility w. 2-wire sensors – – Yes (with 24 V)
Compatibility w. 3-wire sensors – – Yes (with 24 V)
Type of output Track outputs
Nominal Voltage V 24
values Current mA 500
Limit Voltage V 19…30 (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hr in 24 hrs)
values Max. current Per output for U a 30 or 34 V mA 600
Per connector A ≤6
Per module A ≤ 12
Maximum power for W 10
tungsten filament lamp
Switching frequency on Hz < 0.6/LI2
an inductive load
Electro. discharge time s < L/R
Preactuator voltage monitoring OK V > 18
threshold Fault V < 14
Compatibility with d.c. inputs All positive logic inputs whose input resistance
is < 15 kΩ
Protection against overloads and By current limiter and thermal circuit-breaker
short-circuits
against overvoltages on outputs By Zener diode between the outputs and the + 24 V
against polarity inversions By reverse diode on the power supply
Conformity with IEC 1131-2 Yes
43542/3
References
Characteristics :
page 43542/3
Connections, dimensions :
page 43542/5
Electronic cam module

axes (1) kg
Incremental encoder 500 kHz 1 TSX CCY 1128 0.480

Supplied with 5 V or 10…30 V, counting
with RS 422/485, or 5 V w. incremental
Totem Pole (2) outputs encoder
Absolute encoder Acquisition 200 kHz

RS 485 serial or with serial
parallel (3) absolute encoder
Description For Type of Ref. Unit Weight
TSX CCY 1128 connection connectors on (4) reference
of TSX CCY 1128 kg
SUB-D SSI 15-way 4 TSX CAP S15 0.050

connector absolute/ SUB-D
(sold in lots of 2) incremental
encoder
TSX TAP S15ii
Connection a 5 V RS 422/ 15-way 6 TSX TAP S15 05 0.260
interfaces RS 485 encoder SUB-D
for incremental
encoder a 10…30 V 15-way 6 TSX TAP S15 24 0.260
Totem Pole SUB-D
encoder
Telefast 2 Auxiliary 20-way HE 10 – ABE-7H16R20 0.300

connection inputs, (1 per module)
ABE-7CPA11 sub-base a 5…24 V
encoder
power supply
Track outputs 20-way HE 10 – ABE-7H16R20 0.300

(1 for 2 groups)
Adaptor Absolute 15-way – ABE-7CPA11 0.300

sub-base encoder with SUB-D
parallel outputs
(16 to 24 bits)
ABE-7H16R20 a 5 V, 10…30 V
Connection cables
Description From To Ref. Length Unit Weight
(4) reference kg
Cables with TSX CCY 1128 TSX TAP S15 ii 5 0.5 m TSX CCP S15 050 0.110
connectors module, interface
15-way or ABE-7CPA11 1m TSX CCP S15 100 0.160
SUB-D adaptor
connector sub-base 2.5 m TSX CCP S15 0.220
(15-way
SUB-D
connector)
Connection TSX CCY 1128 ABE-7H16R20 7, 9 0.5 TSX CDP 053 0.085
cables module, sub-base
(500 mA max.) 20-way (20-way 1 TSX CDP 103 0.150
insulated HE 10 HE 10
TSX CDP i03 TSX CDP i01 connector connector) 2 TSX CDP 203 0.280
3 TSX CDP 303 0.410
5 TSX CDP 503 0.670
Preformed TSX CCY 1128 Auxiliary 8 3 TSX CDP 301 0.400

cables module, inputs,
with flying leads 20-way power supply 5 TSX CDP 501 0.660
(500 mA max.) insulated HE 10 signals
connector (free end)
TSX CCP S15 iii (2) Totem Pole encoder with complementary Push/Pull outputs.
(3) Absolute encoders with parallel outputs with ABE-7CPA11 adaptor interface.
(4) Diagram references (see page 43542/5).
43542/4
Connections
Characteristics :
page 43542/3
References :
page 43542/4
Examples of encoder connections Examples of auxiliary input connections
1 4
Auxiliary input sensor
++ – – a 24 V power supply
–
307
4 ++ – –
1a 107 Read 1 input
Telefast 2 207
+
108
+ Read 2 input
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
208
1
2
3
4
2 6 5
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
104 Recalibration input
204
+
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE-7H16R20 103 Encoder supply monitoring
102
+ 10/30 V
5 +5V Encoder
100 supply
0V
101
+ + – –
Telefast 2 7
TSX CCY 1128
GND
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
8
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
Example of track output preactuator

ABE-7CPA11
Track output preactuator
connection
8 ++ – – a 24 V power supply
211
Track 3 Q1/3,3
++ – – 111 –
3 210
9 Telefast 2 Track 2 Q1/3,2
110 –
209 Groups 1 and 3
Track 1 Q1/3,3
109 –
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
208
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
Track 0 Q0/3,3
108 –
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
207
C
C
C
C
Track 7 Q0/2,7
ABE-7H16R20 107 –
206 Track 6 Q0/2,6
106 –
205 Track 5 Q0/2,5
105 –
204 Q02,4 Groups 0 and 2
Track 4
104 –
203
Track 3 Q0/2,3
103 –
1 Incremental or absolute encoder 202
Track 2 Q0/2,2
102 –
1aIncremental or absolute encoder with 12-way DIN connector output 201
2 5 V RS 422/485 Totem Pole incremental encoder Track 1 Q0/2,1
101 –
3 Absolute encoder with parallel outputs 200
Track 0 Q0/2,0
4 TSX CAP S15 connector 100 –
5 TSX CCP S15 iii cable with connectors 115
114
6 TSX TAP S15 05/24 connector 113
TSX TAP S15 05 TSX TAP S15 24 112
+ 24 V commons
1 IB- 7 NC 1 NC 7 NC 1
2 Sup. Ret. 8 IB + 5 V 2 NC 8 IB + 5 V
3 IZ + 5 V 9 NC 3 IZ + 24 V 9 NC
4 IZ - 10 0 V 4 NC 10 0V
5 IA + 5 V 11 NC 5 IA + 24 V 11 NC
6 IA - 12 + 5 V 6 NC 12 + 10…30 V?
7 TSX CDP ii3 cable with connectors
8 TSX CDP i01 preformed cable with flying leads
9 TSX CDP i03 cable with connectors
Dimensions
Connection interface for TSX TAP S15 05/24 incremental encoder
Ø 5,5
43
70,4
27,4
31 38
55 47
Enclosure feedthrough mounting (dust and damp proof)

- cut-out Ø 37
- maximum panel thickness 5 mm
43542/5
Characteristics : TSX CAY motion control modules for servomotors
pages 43550/3 and 43550/4
References :
pages 43550/5 and 43550/6 Description
Connections :
pages 43550/7 to 43550/10
Dimensions :
page 43550/11
The TSX CAY ii servo loop positioning axis control range

is intended for machines which require simultaneous
high-performance motion control together with sequential
Premium control by programmable controller.
TSX CAY 21/22 modules control 2 individual axes (axes 0
Lexium and 1). The TSX CAY 41/42 modules control up to 4 axes
servo- (axes 0 to 3). The TSX CAY 33 module controls 3 interpolated
drive linear axes. They can be used with servodrives with analog
inputs ± 10 V such as Lexium 17D servodrives, reference
MHDA 10iiN00.
TSX CAY ii modules can be installed, like all application-
specific modules, in any position on a Premium PLC.
Motor
Description
The front panel of TSX CAY ii axis control modules comprises :
1 One 15-way SUB-D connector per axis for connecting

5 an incremental or absolute encoder
6
2 One 9-way SUB-D connector for all axes for connecting :
1 i 1 “speed reference” analog output for each axis
3 One 20-way HE 10 connector for all channels for

2 connecting :
i Auxiliary inputs for servodrive control
i External power supply for servodrive I/O
3 4 One 20-way HE 10 connector for 2 axes (0/1 or 2/3) for

4 connecting :
TSX CAY 21/22 i Auxiliary inputs : homing cam, emergency stop, event,
recalibration
i Reflex outputs
i External power supplies for sensors and preactuators
5 5 Rigid casing which :

6 i Holds the electronic card
i Locates and locks the module in its slot
1
6 Module diagnostic lamps :
2 - green RUN lamp : module operating
- red ERR lamp : internal fault, module failure
3 i Axis diagnostics :
4 - green CHi lamps : axis diagnostics available
TSX CAY 41/42
5
6
1
3
4
TSX CAY 33
CH2 CH0 RUN ERR 6

CH3 CH1 I/O
43550/2
TSX CAY motion control modules for servomotors
References :
pages 43550/5 and 43550/6 Operation, characteristics
Connections :
pages 43550/7 to 43550/10
Dimensions :
page 43550/11
Operation
Block diagram of an axis
Configuration
Configuration Servo loop Encoder input
+ adjustment
%KW.%MW parameters
Servodrive speed reference

output
SMOVE function Auxiliary I/O Cam input (homing)

Processing processing Event input
%O, %QW Recalibration input
Emergency stop input
%I, %IW Drive fault input
Drive enable output

Reflex output
Axis control modules are set up using PL7 Junior/Pro software (see page 43553/2).
Type of module TSX CAY 21/22 TSX CAY 41/42 TSX CAY 33
Servo loop Proportional with feedforward and gain switching

2 ms period 4 ms period
Paths Speed profile Trapezoidal or parabolic
Resolution Minimum 0.5 position unit per point

Maximum 1000 position units per point
Length of axis Minimum TSX CAY 21 : 32,000 points TSX CAY 41 : 32,000 points TSX CAY 33 : 256 points
TSX CAY 22 : 256 points TSX CAY 42 : 256 points
Maximum 32,000,000 points
Speed Minimum 54,000 points/min
Maximum 270,000 points/min
Acceleration
(from 0 to VMAX) Minimum s 10
Maximum ms 8 16
Operating modes
OFF Measurement mode, inhibition of servo loop
The module operates in current speed and position acquisition mode
DIR DRIVE Direct drive mode, inhibition of servo loop
The module operates in analog output mode only
MAN Motion controlled by operator
- visual control of movement
- incremental movement
AUTO Movement sequence controlled by PLC program. Movements are described using a syntax similar to that of
ISO language. Movements can be expressed in absolute or relative terms (either in relation to current position,
or in relation to a home point).
Operation is possible in “step by step” mode, by motion stop/start, by speed correction
FOLLOWER The n axis of the module is governed by : –
- either the 0 axis of the same module
- or a command profile transmitted by the application program
Checks Environment Encoder link, drive present, emergency stop
Motion Check correct execution of movements (following error, in-position band, software position limits)
Commands Check consistency of commands
Parameters Check validity of parameters
Functions
Type of module TSX CAY 21 TSX CAY 22 TSX CAY 41 TSX CAY 42 TSX CAY 33
Linear interpolation, 2/3 axes – – – – Yes
Limited axes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Infinite axes – Yes – Yes Yes
Follower axes Static ratio Yes – Yes – –
Dynamic ratio – Yes – Yes –
Correction of servodrive offset – Yes – Yes Yes
43550/3
References :
pages 43550/5 and 43550/6 Characteristics (continued)
Connections :
pages 43550/7 to 43550/10
Dimensions :
page 43550/11
Type of module TSX CAY 21 TSX CAY 22 TSX CAY 41 TSX CAY 42 TSX CAY 33
Modularity 2 axes 2 axes 4 axes 4 axes 3 axes

Maximum frequency
at counter inputs
SSI absolute encoder 16 to 25 bits 12 to 25 bits 16 to 25 bits 12 to 25 bits 12 to 25 bits
CLK transmission frequency kHz 200
Incremental encoder x 1 kHz 500
x4 kHz 250 kHz as input or 1 MHz as counter
Consumption a 5 V - 1100 mA a 5 V - 1500 mA a 5 V - 1500 mA

a 24 V - 15 mA a 24 V - 30 mA a 24 V - 30 mA
Current drawn by the module
on the 10/30 V encoder at 24 V
(24 V absolute encoder) Typical mA 11 (20 max) 22 (40 max)
Power dissipated in the module

Typical W 7.2 (11.5 max) 10 (17 max)
Type of input Counter inputs a 5 V Servodrive check inputs Auxiliary inputs

(IA/IB/IZ) (1 per axis) (homing, event,
recalibration, emergency stop)
Nominal values
Voltage V 5 24 24
Current mA 18 8 8
Limit values
Voltage V ≤ 5.5 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, 19...30 (up to 34 V possible,
limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period) limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period)
At state 1 Voltage V ≥ 2.4 ≥ 11 (OK state) ≥ 11
Current mA > 3.7 (for U = 2.4 V) > 3.5 (for U = 11 V) > 6 (for U = 11 V)
At state 0 Voltage V ≤ 1.2 ≤ 5 (fault state) ≤5
Current mA < 1 (for U = 1.2 V) < 1.5 (for U = 5 V) < 2 (for U = 5 V)
Voltage/encoder feedback check Presence check – –

Type of inputs Resistive Resistive Current sink
2-wire proximity sensor compatibility – – Yes (all prox. sens. 24 V)
3-wire proximity sensor compatibility – – Yes (all prox. sens. 24 V)
Type of output Analog outputs Drive enable Reflex outputs

(1 per axis) (1 relay output per axis) (1 per axis)
Range V ± 10.24 – –
Resolution 13 bits + sign – –
Value of LSB mV 1.25 – –
Nominal voltage V – a 24 a 24
Voltage limit V – 5…30 19...30 (up to 34 V possible,
limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period)
Current mA – – 500 nominal
Maximum current mA 1.5 200 (resistive load at 30 V) 625 (for U = 30 or 34 V)
Minimum permitted load – 1 V/1 mA –
Maximum voltage drop when ON V – – <1
Leakage current mA – – < 0.3

Switching time – < 5 ms < 500 µs
Compatibility with d.c. inputs – – All positive logic inputs
with input resistance
< 15 kΩ
IEC 1131 conformity – – Yes
Protection against overloads – – Current limiter and

and short–circuits thermal tripping
Protection against channel – – Zener diode between outputs
overvoltage and + 24 V supply
Protection against polarity – – Reverse-mounted diode on
inversions supply
43550/4
Characteristics :
pages 43550/3 and 43550/4 References
Connections :
pages 43550/7 to 43550/10
Dimensions :
page 43550/11
Motion control modules for servomotors

Type of input Characteristics Functions No. of Reference Weight
axes (1) (2) kg
Incremental 500 kHz Servo control on 2 TSX CAY 21 0.480

encoders counter with independent linear axis
a 5 V RS 422 incremental
a 10…30 V encoder 4 TSX CAY 41 0.610
Totem Pole (3) Acquisition
Absolute 200 kHz
encoders with serial - Servo control on 2 TSX CAY 22 0.480
RS 485 serial absolute independent infinite axis
TSX CAY 2i TSX CAY 4i or parallel (4) encoder - Follower axes
- Realtime correction of 4 TSX CAY 42 0.610
servodrive offset
- Servo control on 3 TSX CAY 33 0.610

linear or infinite axis
- Linear interpolation on
2 or 3 limited axes
- Realtime correction of
servodrive offset
Description Connection Type of connector on No. Reference Weight
TSX CAY ii module (5) kg
TSX CAY 33 SUB-D Incremental/SSI SUB-D, 15-way 4 TSX CAP S15 0.050
connectors absolute encoder (1 per axis)
(Sold in lots of 2)
Speed SUB-D, 9-way 7 TSX CAP S9 0.050

references (1 per TSX CAY module)
Connection Incremental SUB-D, 15-way 6 TSX TAP S15 05 0.260

TSX TAP S15 interface for encoder (1 per axis)
incremental a 5V
encoder RS 422/RS 485
Splitter Speed SUB-D, 9-way – TSX TAP MAS 0.590

block references to (1 per TSX CAY
servodrives module)
Telefast 2 Speed SUB-D, 9-way – ABE-7CPA01 0.300

connection references (1 per TSX CAY module)
sub-bases
TSX TAP MAS
Auxiliary inputs,
reflex outputs, HE 10, 20-way – ABE-7H16R20 0.300
I/O power supply
a 24 V (1 for 2 axes)
encoder power
supplies a 5/24 V
Control signals, HE 10, 20-way – ABE-7H16R20 0.300

servodrive (1 per TSX CAY module)
ABE-7CPA01 I/O power
supply
a 24 V
Adaptor Parallel output SUB-D, 15-way – ABE-7CPA11 0.300

sub-base absolute
encoders
(16 to 24 bits)
a 5 V,
a 10…30 V
ABE-7H16R20
(1) TSX CAY 41/42/43 modules, double format.
(3) Totem Pole encoder with complementary Push/Pull outputs.
(4) Parallel output absolute encoders with ABE-7CPA11 adaptor interface.
(5) See pages 43550/7 to 43550/10 for key.
43550/5
Characteristics :
pages 43550/3 and 43550/4 References (continued)
Connections :
pages 43550/7 to 43550/10
Dimensions :
page 43550/11
Connecting cables
Description From To No. Length Reference Weight
(1) kg
Cables with TSX CAYii TSX TAP S15 05 interface, 5 0.5 m TSX CCP S15 050 0.110
connector module, or ABE-7CPA11
15-way adaptor sub-base 1m TSX CCP S15 100 0.160
SUB-D (15-way SUB-D connector)
connector 2.5 m TSX CCP S15 0.220
TSX CAYii ABE-7CPA01 sub-base or 8 2.5 m TSX CXP 213 0.270

module, TSX TAP MAS block
9-way (15-way SUB-D connector)
SUB-D 6m TSX CXP 613 0.580
connector
TSX CDP ii3 (speed
reference)
Preformed TSX CAY ii Speed reference on 9 6m TSX CDP 611 0.790

cables module, or Lexium MHDA servodrive
(cross-section TSX TAP MAS and other speed drives
0.205 mm2) block (free end on drive side)
(2)
Connecting TSX CAY ii ABE-7H16R20 sub-base 10 0.5 m TSX CDP 053 0.085
cables module, (20-way HE 10 connector) 1m TSX CDP 103 0.150
(500 mA max) (HE 10 2m TSX CDP 203 0.280
20-way 3m TSX CDP 303 0.410
moulded 5m TSX CDP 503 0.670
connector)
Preformed TSX CAY ii Auxiliary inputs, 11 3m TSX CDP 301 0.400

cables module, reflex output, control
20-wire (HE 10 signals, power supplies
(500 mA max) 20-way (free end) 5m TSX CDP 501 0.660
moulded
connector)
Connecting cables for Lexium MHDA servodrive

Description From To No. Length Reference Weight
(1) kg
Cables TSX CAY ii Simulated incremental 12 2m TSX CXP 235 0.210

TSX CDP i01 fitted with module, encoder feedback
connectors 15-way (9-way SUB-D 6m TSX CXP 635 0.470
for Lexium SUB-D connector)
MHDA connector
servodrive (encoder input) Simulated absolute encoder 13 2m TSX CXP 245 0.210
feedback (9-way SUB-D
connector) 6m TSX CXP 645 0.470
Connection accessories for servodrives

Description From To No. Cable Reference Weight
(1) length kg
Cables fitted TSX CAY ii NUM MDLA 14 2.5 m TSX CXP 233 0.220
with connectors module, modular speed drive
NUM MDLA 15-way (15-way, high density,
speed drive SUB-D SUB-D connector) 6m TSX CXP 633 0.470
(2) connector
(encoder input)
TSX TAP MAS Speed reference 15 2.5 m TSX CXP 223 0.340
block, on NUM MDLA
(9-way modular speed drive
SUB-D (25-way SUB-D
connector) connector)
Block Speed reference 15 2.5 m TSX CXP 223 0.340
Cables fitted TSX CAY ii Speed reference 16 1m VY1-X411CA15 0.400

with splitter module for Altivar 58 ATV-58F
block asynchronous motors
for ATV-58F
speed drive
(1) See pages 43550/7 to 43550/10 for key.
(2) See page A0000/3.
43550/6
Characteristics :
pages 43550/3 and 43550/4 Connections
References :
pages 43550/5 and 43550/6
Dimensions :
page 43550/11
Examples of encoder connections Examples of speed reference signal connections
23 GND-ANA link
1 4 7 21
(terminals 5, 11, 15 and 19)
19
+ + – – 20 – Vref 3
8
18 + Axis 3
1 4 Telefast 2
15 Speed drive
16 – Vref 2 with differential
GND
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
14 + Axis 2 inputs
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
ABE-7CPA01 11 Common (0 V)
2 6 5 12 – Vref 1 Ref –
10 + Axis 1 Ref +
GND
9
8 – Vref 0 Ref
6 + Axis 0 Common
5 GND
GND Speed drive with

Axis 2 Axis 0
2-wire input
Example of speed drive connection

Power supply a 24 V (auxiliary I/O)
++ – –
Axis 3 Axis 1 ++ – –
303 0V
TSX CAY 41 10 Telefast 2 113 Drive check input
104 Drive enable
204 24 V Axis 1
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
203
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
103
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE-7H16R20 301 0V
+ + – – 112 Drive check input
101 Drive enable
Telefast 2 201 24 V Axis 0
200
GND
100
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
P4
ABE-7CPA11
3 11
Power supply a 24 V Example of auxiliary I/O connection
++ – – auxiliary I/O sensors
++ – – 314
12 114
Reflex output Q0
Telefast 2
–
311
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
111 Recalibration I3
1
2
3
4
+
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
211
–
310
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE-7H16R20 110 Event I2

210
+ Axes 1 and 3
–
309
109 Emergency I1
209
+ stop
–
308
108 Homing I0
208
+
1 Incremental or absolute encoder
312
2 5 V RS 422 incremental encoder 112
Reflex output Q0
3 Parallel output absolute encoder 107
4 TSX CAP S15 connector 207
+ Recalibration I3
5 TSX CCP S15 iii cable with connectors 106
6 TSX TAP S15 05 connector 206
+ Event I2 Axes 0 and 2
1 IB- 7 NC 105
2 Sup. Ret. 8 IB + 5 V 205
+ Emergency I1
stop
3 IZ + 5 V 9 NC 104
204
+ Homing I0
4 IZ - 10 0 V
5 IA + 5 V 11 NC 102
+ 10/30 V
6 IA - 12 + 5 V 100
+5V Encoder
7 TSX CAP S9 connector 0V power supply
101
8 TSX CXP 213/613 cable with connector
9 TSX CDP 611 preformed cable with connector
10 TSX CDP ii3 cable with connector
11 TSX CDP i01 preformed cable with connector
43550/7
Characteristics :
pages 43550/3 and 43550/4 Connections (continued)
References :
pages 43550/5 and 43550/6
Dimensions :
page 43550/11
Connection example for Lexium MHDA servodrives

Lexium MHDA
servodrive
Incremental encoder 12 Simulated

SSI absolute encoder 13 X5 encoder
feedback
axis 0
X3
9 black
blue 4 - In + Speed
1 6 5 5 - In - reference
brown
8 1 Com axis 0
TSX TAP MAS To other

TSX CAY 42 Lexium
servodrives
++ – – Power supply a 24 V
++ – –
10 Telefast 2
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
101 15 Drive Servodrive

ABE-7H16R20
112 2 OK auxiliary I/O
212 3 + 24 V axis 0
1
11 2
Power supply a 24 V
++ – – auxiliary I/O sensors
10 ++ – –
Telefast 2
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE-7H16R20 212 18 Common Auxiliary I/O

112 11 Input 1
4
3
1 Incremental or absolute encoder

5 TSX CCP S15 iii cable with connector (encoder feedback)
6 TSX TAP S15 05 connector
11 TSX CDP i01 preformed cable with connector
12 TSX CXP 235/635 cable with connector (simulated incremental encoder feedback)
13 TSX CXP 245/645 cable with connector (simulated SSI absolute encoder feedback)
43550/8
Characteristics :
pages 43550/3 and 43550/4 Connections (continued)
References :
pages 43550/5 and 43550/6
Dimensions :
page 43550/11
Connection example for Altivar ATV-58F speed drive (aysnchronous motors)
TSX CAY 42
++ – – Power supply a 24 V
++ – –
10 Telefast 2
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
(1)
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE-7H16R20 TSX TAP MAS

16
9
supply
Power
To other
ref.
+5V
101
112
212
A+
B+
A–
B–
0V
Z+
Z–
speed
1
2
drives
Drive fault
Enable
1
brown
black
blue
A1
A
A/
B
B/
0V
LI1
LI4
R1B
R1A
AI1A
AI1B
COM
ATV-58F speed drive (2) Axis 0
Incremental encoder Speed drive Speed

auxiliary I/O reference
1 Incremental encoder
16 VY1-X411CA15 cable with connector and adapter sub-base
(1) For auxiliary I/O connections (for example : emergency stop, homing, etc), see the connections on page 43550/7.
(2) The speed drive must be programmed as "Macro configuration General use". For other ATV-58F speed drive connections, please see our specialist catalog.
43550/9
Connections (continued)
Characteristics :
pages 43550/3 and 43550/4
References :
pages 43550/5 and 43550/6
Connection example for NUM MDLA modular speed drives
14
J2
15
J3
J4
NUM MDLA
8
TSX CAY 21
15
J3
NUM MDLA
TSX TAP MAS

15 TSX CXP 223 cable with connector
Connection example for distribution of speed references for speed drives
Drive
8
TSX CAY 21
Drive
TSX TAP MAS

43550/10
Dimensions
Characteristics :
pages 43550/3 and 43550/4
References :
pages 43550/5 and 43550/6
Dimensions
TSX TAP S15 05 connection interface for incremental encoder
Ø 5,5
43
70,4
27,4
31 38
55 47
Mounting in enclosure feedthrough (dust and damp proof)

- Ø 37 cut-out
- panel thickness 5 mm maximum
TSX TAP MAS speed reference splitter block for speed drives
=
65
80
=
2xØ 5,5
= 50 =
80
Mounting on DIN rail with LA9-DC9976 accessory
43550/11
SERCOS® TSX CSY 84 Premium motion control module
Characteristics :
page 43555/4 SERCOS® architecture, block diagrams
References :
page 43555/5
Connections :
page 43555/5
SERCOS® architecture
Fiber optic cables

SERCOS® network ring
Premium
Lexium MHDS
servodrives
Lexium BPH
motors
SERCOS® (SERiaI COmmunication System) is a communication standard which defines the digital link (exchange
protocol and medium) between a motion control module and intelligent servodrives. It is defined in the European standard
EN 61491.
Using the SERCOS® distributed architecture allows application I/O (position encoder, emergency stop etc.) to be
connected directly to the intelligent servodrives, reducing the cost of connection. The fiber optic digital link permits high
speed exchanges (2 or 4 Mbauds/s) while ensuring a high level of immunity in disturbed industrial environments.
The SERCOS® range in the Premium control system platform comprises :

i An axis control module TSX CSY 84 which can control up to 8 servodrives via a SERCOS® ring. The module calculates
the path and interpolation for several axes.
i Lexium servodrives 1.5 A to 20 A with digital link. These manage the position loop, the speed loop and the torque loop
and ensure the power conversion to control the motor. The encoder feedback information is sent to the servodrive
(current position, current speed).
i BPH brushless axis motors. Samarium cobalt magnets enable greatly increased power, excellent dynamic speed
response and reduced size.
The SERCOS® range offers all the accessories required (filter choke, braking resistor, etc) and a set of connectors.
Block diagrams
The block diagrams show the functions performed by the various components which comprise the multi-axis control
system.
PL7 Junior/Pro UniLink
TSX/PCX/PMX 57 SERCOS® Lexium MDHS

PLC TSX CSY 84 servodrive
module
Application Bus X Individual linear or Interpretation of

Program infinite axes commands Lexium BPH motor
Linear Position loop
interpolation of 2 Speed loop
to 8 axes Current loop
Follower axes (6 Power conversion
slaves) by gearing
or camming
Position
Speed
SERCOS® ring
(to servodrive network)
43555/2
Characteristics :
page 43555/4 Block diagram (continued), description
References :
page 43555/5
Connections :
page 43555/5
Block diagram (continued)
PL7 Junior/Pro software via the Premium platform terminal port can :
i Declare TSX CSY 84 SERCOS® module in the PLC configuration
i Configure the functions and define the parameters for the axes used
i Program the movements in the PLC application
i Adjust the parameters via the operating codes (parameters, TSX CSY 84 module and Lexium MHDS servodrives)
i Test and debug the application
UniLink software, via the Lexium MHDS servodrive PC port, can :

i Define the Lexium MHDS servodrive and Lexium motor
i Adjust the Lexium MHDS servodrive parameters and back them up to EEprom memory in the drive
Description
The SERCOS® TSX CSY 84 axis control module comprises :
3 1 An SMA type connector, marked Tx, for connecting the

servodrives using the SERCOS ® ring fiber optic
4 transmission cable
6 2 An SMA type connector, marked Rx, for connecting the

servodrives using the SERCOS® ring fiber optic reception
5 cable
7 3 Rigid cases, double format, in order to :

i Support the electronic card
1 i Attach and lock the module in its slot
2 4 Module diagnostic lamps :
i RUN lamp (green) : lit, module operating correctly
i SER lamp (yellow) : flashing, data transmission and
reception on the SERCOS® network
i ERR lamp (red) :
- lit, internal module fault,
- flashing, module starting, communication fault, in-
compatible configuration or application missing
i I/O lamp (red) : lit, module wiring fault
i INI lamp (yellow) : flashing, module reinitializing
5 Channel diagnostic lamps (green) : lit, axis operating

normally; off, configuration fault; flashing, serious error
on axis :
i 1 to 8 : display of 8 real axes
i 9 to 12 : display of 4 imaginary axes
i 13 to 16 : display of 4 remote axes
i 17 to 20 : display of 4 coordinated sets
i 21 to 24 : display of 4 follower sets
6 A pencil point button to initialize the module
7 Two mini DIN type 8-way connectors (COM1 and COM2)

for Schneider Electric use
43555/3
Characteristics
References :
page 43555/5
Connections :
page 43555/5
TSX CSY 84 module operating characteristics
Number of channels 32 configurable (0 to 31) channel 0 used for SERCOS® ring configuration
Type of axis
Real axes 8 (channels 1 to 8)
(connected to a servodrive)
Imaginary axes 4 (channels 9 to 12)
Set of axes 4 coordinated (channels 17 to 20). Each set allows linear interpolation of 2 to 8 axes
4 follower (channels 21 to 24). Each set can comprise a maximum of 7 axes : 1 Master/6 Slaves in
gearing or camming
Cam profile 7 (channels 25 to 31). Used to create the electronic cams with linear or cubic interpolation between
profile points
Remote axes 4 (channels 13 to 16). Follow the external position from an encoder connected to the auxiliary position
input of the servodrive
Main functions
Programming
Movements Homing, absolute, relative or continuous

Immediate movement, or queued, to a given position
Speed override possible
Special functions Following and synchronization of axes (phasing a Slave in relation to the Master)
Measurement of dimensions by resolver or external encoder
Rotary blade cut
Stops/restarts Fast stop, stop on configured deceleration profile

Temporary stop
Restart of stopped movement
Configuration/Adjustment
SERCOS® ring Bus cycle time, traffic on the bus, optical power on the fiber, SERCOS® loop diagnostics
Acceleration/deceleration Ramp values, ramp type (rectangular, triangular and trapezoid), choice of units, maximum acceleration
adjustment
Speed Speed units, default speed, maximum speed, speed override
Other settings In-band position, rollover, software position limits

Set of follower axes Following the master axis by gearing or camming (cam profile), threshold position of master triggers
following, Bias value when synchronizing an axis, monitoring of Master/Slave position, master offset for
follower axis
Set of coordinated axes Type of interpolation : linear

Came profile Value of an existing point of a cam profile, number of points (5000 max.), type of interpolation, table
addresses
State of a movement or axis Moving, accelerating, decelerating, homing, in position, faulty, etc
Diagnostics Drive fault, axis currently reading data, following error, overvoltage, undervoltage, overcurrent, power
supply failure
Electrical characteristics of the TSX CSY 84 module
SERCOS® network
Type Industrial medium conforming to standard EN 61491

Topology Ring
Medium Fiber optic cable
Baud rate M bauds/s 4
Cycle time ms 2 or 4 per configuration
Number of segments 9 max with TSX CSY 84 module
Segment length m 38 max with plastic fiber optic cable, 150 max with glass fiber optic cable
Bus X Distance m 100 max (1) between TSX CSY 84 axis control module and the Premium processor
Consumption mA 1800 at a 5 V
Power dissipated in the module W 9 (typical)

(1) Without the use of a TSX REY 200 Bus X remote module.
43555/4
References, connections
Characteristics :
page 43555/4
References
The TSX CSY 84 multiaxis control module has 32 application-specific channels which are only counted when they are
configured in the Premium application (using PL7 Junior/Pro software). The maximum number of application-specific
channels allowed depends on the type of processor :
Type of processor TSX P57 103M TSX P57 203M TSX P57 303M TSX P57 453M
TSX P57 153M TSX P57 253M TSX P57 353M
T PCX 57 203M T PCX P57 353M
Maximum number of
application-specific channels 8 24 32 64
Description Functions No. of axes Reference Weight
kg
Multiaxis control Control of 8 real axes TSX CSY 84 0.520

module SERCOS® digital 4 imaginary axes
servodrives
Description Connection Length Reference Weight
kg
TSX CSY 84 Plastic fiber optic cables Lexium 0.3 m 990 MCO 000 01 0.050
fitted with SMA type MHDS 10iiN00 0.9 m 990 MCO 000 03 0.180
connectors servodrives 1.5 m 990 MCO 000 05 0.260
(radius curvature : 25 mm min) 4.5 m 990 MCO 000 15 0.770
16.5 m 990 MCO 000 55 2.830
22.5 m 990 MCO 000 75 4.070
37.5 m 990 MCO 000 125 5.940
Sets of plastic fiber optic connections

Description Composition Reference Weight
kg
Set of fiber optic cables 12 SMA type connectors 990 MCO KIT 01 –
and SMA connectors 12 insulating sleeves
plastic fiber optic cable,
length 30 m
Fiber optic cable Tools for making up cables to 990 MCO KIT 00 –
installation tool required length from a kit
(990 MCO KIT 01)
Includes stripping tool, crimping pliers,
25 W soldering iron and Quick
Reference Guide
Connection
1
TX
RX
SERCOS® network ring

3
3 3 3 3
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
X13 X15 X13 X15
Servodrive 1
Servodrive 5
Servodrive 2
Servodrive 4
Servodrive 3
2 2 2 2 2
1 TSX CSY 84 : multiaxis control module for Premium

2 MHDS 10iiN00 : Lexium servodrives for Lexium BPH motor
3 990 MCO 000 ii : plastic fiber optic cables fitted with SMA type connectors
TX Fiber optic transmission
RX Fiber optic reception
43555/5
TSX CFY 11/21 motion control modules for stepper motors
Presentation, description, operation

Characteristics :
pages 43551/3 and 43551/4
References :
page 43551/5
Presentation
The TSX CFY 11/21 stepper motor axis control range is

Fip intended for machines which simultaneously require motion
control by stepper motor associated with sequential control
by programmable controller.
Translator The TSX CFY 11 module controls, via a translator, 1 axis
(channel 0). The TSX CFY 21 module controls 2 axes
Premium (channels 0 and 1). They accept translators with :
i RS 422 or TTL 5 V inputs (negative logic)
i RS 422 or a 5 V NPN open collector output
In a Premium PLC configuration, the number of TSX CFY

motion control modules should be added to the other
application-specific modules (communication, counting,
FTX 517 Motor axis control and weighing). See pages 43511/8 and 43513/
5.
Description
3 The front panel of TSX CFY 11/21 stepper control modules

comprises :
4 1 One 15-way SUB-D connector per channel for connecting :
i Translator inputs
1 i Translator outputs
i Translator input power supply
3 2 One 20-way HE10 connector for connecting :
i Auxiliary inputs : per axis, homing cam, emergency
4 stop, limit switches (+ and -), event, external stop
i Brake outputs (1 per axis)
1 i External power supplies for sensors and preactuators
2 3 Rigid casing which :
i Holds the electronic card
i Locates and locks the module in its slot
TSX CFY 11 4 Module diagnostic lamps :
- green RUN lamp : module operating
2 - red ERR lamp : internal fault, module failure
i Axis diagnostics :
TSX CFY 21 - 2 green CHi lamp : axis diagnostics available
CH2 CH0 RUN ERR 4

CH3 CH1 I/O
Operating characteristics are described on page 43551/4. Stepper control modules are set up using PL7 Junior/Pro
software (see page 43553/2).
Configuration
+ adjustment Configuration Pulse Translator enable output
%KW.%MW parameters generator A/B pulse outputs
Reactivation of loss of step output
Boost output
Translator fault input

Loss of step check input
SMOVE function Auxiliary Cam input (homing)

Processing I/O + and – limit switch input
%O, %QW processing Emergency stop input
Event input
%I, %IW External stop input
Brake output
43551/2
Characteristics
References :
page 43551/5
Type of module TSX CFY 11 TSX CFY 21
Modularity 1 axis 2 axes

Maximum pulse frequency kHz 187.316 187.316
Consumption a5V a 24 V a5V a 24 V
mA 510 50 650 100
Power dissipated
in the module Typical W 3.8 5.6
Inputs Translator inputs Auxiliary inputs
Logic Negative Positive

Nominal Voltage V 5 24
values Current mA 4.5 7
Limit Voltage V – 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, limit 1 hr per 24 hr period)
values At state 1 Voltage V <2 ≥ 11
Current mA – > 6 (for U = 11 V)
At state 0 Voltage V > 3.6 <5
Current mA – < 2 (for U = 5 V)
Input impedance for nominal U kΩ – 3.4
Input immunity µs Loss of step input 15 to 30 µs –
µs – Homing cam and event inputs < 250 µs
ms Translator fault input 3 to 16 ms Limit switch, emergency stop and external stop inputs
3 to 10 ms
Monitoring of
external Voltage for OK state V – > 18
power supply Voltage for fault state V – < 14
for sensors and Immunity OK v fault ms – >1
preactuators Immunity fault v OK ms – < 30
Type of input Resistive Current sink
IEC 1131 conformity – Type 2
Proximity sensor compatibility – 2-wire/3-wire
Outputs Translator outputs Brake outputs (1 per axis)
Type of output RS 422, TTL 5 V open collector NPN compatible Open collector, PNP
Output differential voltage V ± 2 (load resistance ≤ 100 Ω) –
Short-circuit current mA < 150 –
Permissible common
mode voltage V ≤7 –
Permissible differential voltage V ≤ 12 –
Voltage Nominal V – a 24
Limit V – 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, limit 1 hr per 24 hr period)
Current Nominal mA – 500

Leakage mA – < 0.3
Max mA – 625 (for U = 30 or 34 V)
Maximum voltage drop when ON V – a<1
Switching time µs – < 250
Compatibility with d.c. inputs – All positive logic inputs with
input resistance < 15 kΩ
IEC 1131-2 conformity – Yes
Protection against overloads – Via current limiter and thermal tripping
and short-circuits (reactivated via program or automatically)
Short-circuit check – One signalling bit per channel
on each channel
Protection against channel – Zener diode between outputs and a + 24 V
overvoltages
Protection against polarity inversions – By diode reverse-mounted on supply
43551/3
Characteristics (continued), connections

Characteristics :
page 43551/3
References :
page 43551/5
Control Pulse, frequency from 0 to 187 kHz
+ and - outputs or +/- outputs and direction
Paths Trapezoid speed profile with minimum movement frequency
Operating modes OFF Module inactive
DIR DRIVE Module operating as pulse generator
MAN Motion controlled by operator

- visual control of movement
- incremental movement
AUTO Movement sequence controlled by PLC program. Movements are described using a syntax similar to that of ISO
language. Movements may be expressed in absolute or relative terms (in relation to either the current position or a home
point). Operation is possible in “step-by-step” mode.
Checks Environment Translator, limit switches, emergency stop
Motion Check correct execution by software position limits, loss of step
Control Check consistency of commands
Parameters Check validity of parameters
Optional commands Boost, brake
Connections
TSX CFY 11/21 stepper control module connections
+ pulses 114
RI
Q0 Brake output Axis 1

– pulses (or direction) 1
214
Outputs
Boost Axis 0 112
RI
Q0 Brake output Axis 0

Translator enable 1 212
Auxiliary I/O a 24 V
Reactivation of step loss Axis 1 111
power supply I5 Limit switch –
+
check 1 211
++ – –
Axis 0 or 1 110
Translator check I2 Limit switch +
+
2 ++ – – 210
Loss of step check
109
4 3 Telefast 2 I4 External stop
+
209 Inputs Axis 1

TSX CFY 11/21 108
I1 Emergency stop
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
(1)
1
2
3
4
Translator 208
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
107
I3 Event
+
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
207
C
C
C
C
ABE-7H16R20 106
I0 Homing
+
206
Axes 0
–
305
and 1
I5 105 Limit switch –
304 +
205
–
I2 104 Limit switch +

303 +
204
–
I4 103 External stop

302 +
203 Inputs Axis 0

–
Phytron SP or MSD
power module I1 102 Emergency stop
301 +
202
–
I3 101 Event
300 +
201
–

I0 100 Homing
+
3 TSX CDP i01 preformed cable with connector 200

4 TSX CXP 611 cable with connector
(1) Type of translator

i With RS 422 interface :
- RS 422 compatible inputs
- RS 422 outputs
i With open collector, NPN interface :
- TTL/5 V source compatible inputs
- open collector, NPN outputs (5 V power supply from TSX CFY 11/21 module)
43551/4
References
Characteristics :
page 43551/3
Motion control modules for stepper motors

Description To control Connections No. of Reference Weight
SUB-D, 15-way HE 10, 20-way axes (1) kg
Motion Translator with Translator I/O Auxiliary I/O, 1 TSX CFY 11 0.440
control - RS 422 I/O, power supply
modules for - a 5 V TTL input, a 24 V
stepper a 5 V output with
motor open collector
2 TSX CFY 21 0.480
TSX CFY 11
Description TSX CFYi1 Type of connector on Unit Weight
connector TSX CFYi1 module reference kg
SUB-D Translator SUB-D, 15-way TSX CAP S15 0.050

connector (1 per axis)
(Order in multiples of 2)
Telefast 2 Auxiliary I/O HE 10, 20-way ABE-7H16R20 0.300 04

connection axes 0/1, power supply a 24 V (1 for 2 axes)
sub-base
TSX CFY 21
Additional 20 shunted terminals (Order in multiples of 5) ABE-7BV20 0.030
terminal for ABE-7H16R20 sub-base
block
Connecting cables
Description From TSXCFYi1 To Length Reference Weight
module kg
ABE-7H16R20
Cables HE 10 ABE-7H16R20 sub-base 0.5 m TSX CDP 053 0.085
(cross-section connector, (HE 10 connector,
0.324 mm2) 20-way 20-way)
1m TSX CDP 103 0.150
2m TSX CDP 203 0.280
3m TSX CDP 303 0.410
5m TSX CDP 503 0.670
TSX CDP i03

Cables HE 10 Auxiliary I/O 3m TSX CDP 301 0.400
(cross-section connector, axes 0/1, power supply a 24 V
0.324 mm2) 20-way (flying leads at I/O end)
5m TSX CDP 501 0.660
Connecting cable for Phytron power module for stepper motor

Description From To Length Reference Weight
kg
Cable for TSX CFYi1 SP or MSD 6m TSX CXP 611 –

Phytron (15-way power module
power module SUB-D (25-way SUB-D
(2) connector) connector )
TSX CDP i01

(1) Includes a bilingual Quick Reference Guide : English and French
(2) See addresses page.
43551/5
Premium automation Premium
TSX CAY/CFY module software setup
PL7 Junior/Pro setup software provides :

i SMOVE and XMOVE motion control functions for programming movements. These functions can be used in Ladder
language, Instruction list language or Structured Text language
i Specialized screens for configuring, adjusting and debugging axes
Programming movements
A movement on an independent axis is initiated by executing

an SMOVE control function in the application program.
Example : go to the absolute position 10 000 000 µm, at a
speed of 200 mm/min, without stopping.
A screen enables the assisted entry of parameters in the
SMOVE function in an operation block.
The XMOVE command enables movement to be initialized

on interpolated axes (TSX CAY 33 only).
Instruction codes
The characteristics of movements are described using a syntax similar to that for a numerical controller program block
written in ISO language.
TSX CAY and TSX CFY motion control modules use the following instructions :
Individual Interpol.
axes axes
(SMOVE) (XMOVE)
TSX CAY TSX CFY TSX CAY
Code and type of instruction 21/41 22/42/33 11/21 33
09 Move to the position and stop
01 Move to the position without stopping
10 Move until an event is detected and stop
11 Move until an event is detected without stopping
14 Homing
04 Stop command
05 Await an event
07 Memorize the current position when an event occurs
62 Forced homing
30/32 Simple machining
92 Initialization of memorized positions
21 Move without stopping, with homing on the fly
Instruction possible
These instruction codes can be represented as symbols by the user in G code (for example : 09 can be represented by
G09).
The instruction codes are preceded by another code indicating the type of target position :
i 90 : if the target position is absolute
i 91 : if the target position is relative to the current position
i 98 : if the target position is relative to a memorized position (index)
i 60 : if the target position is absolute and movement direction is fixed (TSX CAY 22/42/33 only)
i 68 : if the target position is relative to a memorized position and movement direction is fixed (TSX CAY 22/42/33 only)
Programming a path
A complete path can be programmed by means of a series of SMOVE or XMOVE elementary motion control functions.
Grafcet language is ideal for this type of programming. An elementary movement is associated with each step.
Speed
1 SMOVE %CH102.0 (1, 90, 01, X1, F1)
2
F2
2 SMOVE %CH102.0 (2, 90, 09, X2, F2)
1
F1 3 SMOVE %CH102.0 (3, 90, 09, 0, F1)
4
X1 X2 Position
5 Xi : coordinate of target position
F1
3 Fi : movement speed of moving part
43553/2
TSX CAY/CFY module software setup (continued)
When setting up application-specific functions, screens specific to axis control and stepper control functions can be
accessed via PL7 Junior/Pro software for configuration, adjustment, debugging and documentation of applications.
These services are performed by editors which can be directly accessed from the basic screen using icons in the tool bars.
Windows relating to the editors can be simultaneously displayed on one screen (example : it is possible to simultaneously
program using the program editor and define the symbols in the variables editor).
Declaring the axis control modules and stepper control

modules
Parameter entry screens for application-specific functions
can be accessed via the configuration screen by clicking on
the slot.
Example : modules TSX CAY 21 and TSX CFY 21 in which
the module has been defined.
Configuring the modules

The configuration editor provides assistance with entering
and modifying the values of the various axis configuration
parameters. These parameters enable the operation of the
axis control module (module TSX CAY 21 for example) to
be adapted to the machine which is to be controlled.
Axis configuration parameters are :
i Units of measurement
i Resolution
i Type of encoder
i Maximum and minimum limits
i Maximum speed
i Etc
This data relates to the machine and cannot be modified by
the program.
Adjusting the modules

These parameters are associated with operation of the
axes. They generally require the operations on and
movements of the moving part to be known. These param-
eters are adjusted in online mode (they are initialized
during configuration, in offline mode).
They concern :
i Encoder offset
i Resolution
i Servo control parameters
i Etc
Debugging the modules

In online mode, the configuration editor also provides the
user with a control panel screen, giving him a quick visual
display which he can use to control and observe the
behaviour of the axis.
The control panel provides different information and
commands according to the selected operating mode :
i Automatic mode (Auto)
i Manual mode (Manu)
i Direct mode (Dir_Cde)
i Off mode (Off)
43553/3
Motion control
Motion control offer
Presentation
Motion control offer The axis control offer is intended for machines which simultaneously require high
performance servo motion control, associated with PLC sequential control.
Position control system Premium and Quantum automation platforms offer among
their range of interfaces, axis control modules providing
a position control function.
These modules are :
i Analogue output modules :
- TSX CAY, multi-axis control (2 to 4 axes) for
Premium
- 140 MSB/MSC, single-axis control for Quantum
i SERCOS® digital link modules :
- TSX CSY, controls up to 8 drives for Premium
- 141 MMS, controls up to 22 drives for Quantum
Lexium MHDA/MHDS servodrives Lexium servodrives provide solid state switching, current
(or torque) regulation and speed control.
Two types of servodrive, each available in 5 current
ratings (1.5, 3, 6, 10, 20 A permanent rms), are offered :
i MHDA : servodrives with analogue setpoint
i MHDS : servodrives with SERCOS® digital link
Lexium BPH brushless axis motors Lexium BPH brushless axis motors are synchronous,
3-phase motors. Their design, with samarium cobalt
permanent magnet, ensures perfect rotation even at low
speed.
They are equipped with a built-in sensor which can be a
resolver or a SinCos absolute encoder.
Depending on the model, they have :
i Failsafe parking brake
i Shaft end (smooth or with a key)
i IP 65 or IP 67 dust and damp protection
Configuration and installation Unilink user software, in association with Lexium

servodrives, provides configuration and adjustment of
the parameters for these drives.
Motion control applications are designed and installed
using PL7 Junior/Pro (for Premium PLCs) or Concept (for
Quantum PLCs) software.
43545/2
Motion control
Motion control offer
Axis motor and servodrive compatibility
Lexium MHDA/MHDS
servodrives
MHDA/MHDS 1004N 1008N 1017N 1028N 1056N

Permanent rms current 1.5 A 3A 6A 10 A 20 A
Lexium BPH Type Nominal Maximum Maximum

torque on mechanical continuous
axis motors stopping speed power
BPH 0751 N 0.9 Nm 6000 rpm 0.542 kW
1.3 Nm 6000 rpm 0.542 kW
BPH 0752 N 1.3 Nm 6000 rpm 0.794 kW
2.3 Nm 6000 rpm 0.794 kW
BPH 0952 N 3.7 Nm 6000 rpm 1.42 kW
4.3 Nm 6000 rpm 1.42 kW
BPH 0953 N 6.0 Nm 6000 rpm 1.94 kW
6.0 Nm 6000 rpm 1.94 kW
BPH 1152 N 7.4 Nm 6000 rpm 2.36 kW
7.4 Nm 6000 rpm 2.36 kW
BPH 1153 N 6.8 Nm 6000 rpm 3.14 kW
10.5 Nm 6000 rpm 3.14 kW
BPH 1422 N 11.4 Nm 4000 rpm 3.05 kW
12.0 Nm 4000 rpm 3.05 kW
BPH 1423 N 14.5 Nm 4000 rpm 4.05 kW
17.0 Nm 4000 rpm 4.05 kW
BPH 1902 N 25.0 Nm 4000 rpm 6.15 kW
BPH 1903 K 36.0 Nm 4000 rpm 7.4 kW
BPH 1904 K 46.0 Nm 4000 rpm 9.1 kW
43545/3
ISP Plus integrated weighing system
Presentation
Characteristics :
page 43552/6
References :
page 43552/7
The ISP Plus weighing

range, when used with
2
the Premium PLC,
enables the automation
of machines combined
with weighers or
installations
1
1 Weighing module The TSX ISP Y100 standard format

weighing module is the central part
of the weighing system.
It has :
i A measurement input which will
take up to 8 sensors
i A sealable link for the display unit
i Two discrete reflex outputs for
weigher doser applications
The weighing module can be supplied

factory calibrated.
2 Weight indicator The TSX XBT H100 remote display

unit displays the measured weight
with no prior configuration. When
the link to the weighing module is
sealed, this display unit then
becomes the main display unit for
commercial transactions.
The TSX ISP Y100 module/display

unit assembly conforms to OIML
recommendations and is è approved
for class III weighers (6000 scale
divisions) and for class IIII weighers
(1000 scale divisions).
3 Load cells Designed for harsh environmental

conditions, strain gauge load cells
are the third part of the weighing
system.
These load cells can be supplied

pre-calibrated at the factory or by
using a press.
For load cells, accessories (enclo-

sures, cables, simulators, etc), and
weighing platform, please consult
our specialist catalogue.
43552/2
Application solutions
Characteristics :
page 43552/6
References :
page 43552/7
Solutions for Multiproduct i 99 recipes.

i Batching at 2 flow rates.
installing automatic batching i Assignment of silos/products.
weighing applications Batching 1 to 12 products i Tolerance checking.
from 32 stored in 16 silos : i Automatic correction of in-flight error.
SP7-SA10 i Programmable order of product batching.
i Various weighing modes, batching in percentages.
Please consult i Printing of results.
our specialist catalogue i Management of totals by product and by recipe.
Weigher doser i 99 recipes.

i Automatic correction of the dose values.
Dosing set quantities i Alternating adjustment and production cycles.
into a container or an i Automatic correction of in-flight error at end of
intermediate hopper : adjustment cycle.
SP7 Si50 i Optimization of the production rate at each cycle.
i Adaptable reset frequency.
i Calculation of the average value and typical
deviation, at the end of the adjustment cycle.
i Printing of results during adjustment cycles.
Weigher sorter i 99 recipes.

i Sorting in relation to a setpoint and 2 tolerance
Checking and sorting values.
objects by weight : i Insertion of the sorting setpoint by scaling or on the
SP7 Si60 basis of results.
i Calculation of the average value and typical
deviation of a batch.
i Calculation of the number per category.
i Classification according to the weight deviation
–– – 0 + ++ in relation to the setpoint.
i Continuous automatic tare except during sorting.
i Printing of results.
Discontinuous i 99 recipes.
i Receipt or dispatch operation.
totalizer i Filling at one or two flow rates.
Totalising successive i Ability to add further material.
weighing operations i Automatic correction of in-flight error.
when receiving or i Emptying of remainder.
dispatching materials in i Selection of the reset frequency.
bulk: i Printing of results.
SP7 Si40
i Adjustable PID controller.

Control of flow i Analogue outputs for flow rate control and setpoint.
rate on conveyor i Vibrator control output.
belt and i Totalling of weight of product which has travelled
along belt (one continuous totalizer and four partial
continuous totalizers).
totalizer i Output for mechanical totalizer.
i Semi-automatic tare.
Control of flow rate on i Digital calibration.
conveyor belt by weight i Speed read by proximity sensor.
or speed : i Printing of results.
SP7-SA85
43552/3
Description
Characteristics :
page 43552/6
References :
page 43552/7
The integration of TSX ISP Y100 weighing modules with the Premium PLC enables the user to go beyond simple weighing
applications. The PLC controls the whole environment of the weighers as well as all the machines or industrial processes
around the weighing system.
In a Premium PLC configuration, the number of TSX ISP Y100 weighing modules has to be added to the number of other
application-specific modules (TSX SCY communication, TSX CTY counting, TSX CAY axis control and TSX CFY motion
control). See pages 43511/6 and 43513/4.
Note : the weighing module counts as 2 application-specific channels.
Description
Weighing module
4 The front panel of the TSX ISP Y100 weighing module

consists of :
1 A 9-way female SUB-D connector for the RS 485 serial

1 link to the display unit.
2 A screw terminal block for connecting the 2 discrete

2 reflex outputs (outputs positioned on thresholds).
3 A 15-way female SUB-D connector for the measurement

3 input channel (50 measurements per second, from 1 to
8 load cells).
4 Device for optional sealing of the module.
The TSX ISP Y100 module and its SF2/SF3/SM1/SM2 load

cells can be supplied pre-calibrated (at the factory or by
using a press).
Display unit
The weighing operations are displayed on a TSX XBT H100 display unit (supplied with the TSX ISP Y110). The display
device is preconfigured.
Its front panel consists of :
1 A back-lit LCD display screen with 1 line of 20 characters

1 (height 9 mm).
2 An area for affixing the instrument's identification plate.

2
On the rear panel it has:
i A removable screw terminal block for a 24 V power
supply
i A 25-way female SUB-D connector for the link to the TSX
ISP Y100 weighing module (30 metres maximum)
Strain gauge load cells and connection accessories (please consult our specialist catalogue)
Measurements are detected using strain gauge load cells designed to operate in harsh environmental conditions (severe
temperatures, dust, damp, corrosive atmosphere). The strain gauge load cells with their associated cable connectors and
cables can be integrated, using mechanical kits, in all types of weighing receptacles : tray, hopper, silo, tank, overhead
crane, conveyor belt, etc.
Application solutions (please consult our specialist catalogue)
Special-purpose software for weighing applications simplifies the creation of the overall control system application
program, without the designer having to have any special knowledge of this type of application.
Application solutions can be supplied as follows :
i An application disk (weighing and MMI) with installation and operation manual.
i A kit comprising:
- the Premium PLC fitted with only those I/O modules required for the weighing application
- the display unit or terminal suitable for man-machine interface
- the Premium PCMCIA memory cartridge supporting the weighing application software
43552/4
Functions, installation
Characteristics :
page 43552/6
References :
page 43552/7
Functions
The weighing module used with its display unit is a true weight indicator. A large number of specific weighing functions
are integrated in this module :
i Continuous measurement of weight (in g, kg, t, lb, oz, etc) and calculation of flow rate (variation in weight)
i Filtering of measurements according to several methods (19 filtering options)
i Tare device and preset tare
i Automatic zero reset
i Measurement stability check
i Threshold check with extrapolation of cutoff point: setting local discrete outputs to the nearest millisecond
i Assisted calibration : the module calculates the zero and the gradient
i Saving of calibration parameters to the module (EEPROM) and in the Premium processor
i Forced calibration : rapid replacement of a faulty module and restart with the calibration parameters of the previous
module
i Locking of the configuration, sealing of the module and its links to the load cells and display unit
i Continuous formatting and transmission of measurements to the PLC
i Transmission of measurement validity data (validity, stability, net/gross, etc)
i Transmission of diagnostic data on the module and its connections
i Configuration, calibration and debugging via PL7 screens
i Most of the operating parameters can be modified and most of the functions can be executed via the PLC program
Installing the weighing module
The PL7 software is used for the complete installation of the weighing system (configuration, calibration and debugging).
Configuration, covering :
i Metrological data on the weigher

i Filtering of measurements
i Flow rate calculation mode
i Tare
i Data format
i Stability criteria and zero management mode
i Checking of thresholds for positioning the discrete outputs
Calibrating the weigher. The module itself calculates the

gain and the offset to be applied to the measurement
electronics.
Calibration is performed in two stages :

i Measurement of the zero load
i Measurement of a calibrated load
Forced calibration enables the system to be restarted

immediately in the event of a module fault. The new module
is automatically configured.
Debugging. The weighing application screen dynamically

displays :
i The current measurement
i The operating status of the module
It also enables fast modification of the adjustment parameters

(filter, flow rate, threshold values, etc).
Commands and parameters which can be modified via the
program, which is implicitly transmitted to the weighing
module, are used to operate the module in the language
appropriate to the weighing application.
These parameters and commands can be controlled from
an MMI type device and/or a supervision device connected
to the Premium PLC.
43552/5
Characteristics
References :
page 43552/7
Electrical characteristics of the TSX ISP Y100 weighing module
Measurement input
1 weigher per module 1 measurement input
Resolution 1 048 576 points (20 bits)
Measurement rate 50 measurements per second
Input impedance MΩ >1
Input load cells

No. which can be connected 8 x 350 Ω load cells maximum, mounted in parallel
Supply voltage V a 10
Type of power supply d.c.
Length of cable m 300 (no loss of precision with 4 load cells)
Discrete reflex outputs

Number 2 positive logic transistor outputs, for weigher doser applications
Response time 1 ms discrimination. The crossing point of the thresholds between 2 measurements is calculated by
interpolation to the nearest millisecond
Display output
Physical interface RS 485 not isolated
Data rate K bits/s 9.6
Distance from module m 30 (maximum)
Environment See page 43511/4
Metrology The weighing module and display unit together conform to OIML recommendations. It meets è approval
for class III weighers (up to 6000 scale divisions), and for class IIII weighers (up to 1000 scale divisions)
conforming to European circular 90-384 dated 20 June 1990.
è Certification SDM n° 97-06 dated 28th July 1997
Characteristics of the TSX XBT H100 display unit
Display
Type of screen Back-lit LCD
Number of lines 1 line used in weighing application
Number of characters 20 per line
Character size mm 9
Power supply
Nominal voltage V a 24 not isolated
Voltage limits V a 18…30
Consumption W 10
Environment
Conformity to standards IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14
Temperatures Operating : 0…50 °C, storage : - 20…+ 60 °C
Degree of protection Front panel : IP 65. Rear panel : IP 20, conforming to IEC 529 and NF C 20-010
Function
Signalling 1 indicator lamp
43552/6
References, dimensions
Characteristics :
page 43552/6
References
(1) kg
ISP Plus weighing Standard load format module (sealable) TSX ISP Y100 0.420
module - Load cell input 50 measurements/s
(1 weigher per module) (for 1 to 8 cells),
(2) - 2 reflex discrete outputs
(positioned on thresholds),
- RS 485 output (for display unit)
TSX ISP Y100

ISP Plus weighing - TSX ISP Y100 module, TSX ISP Y110 1.020
module and display - TSX XBT H100 display unit
unit assembly (back-lit LCD, preconfigured display),
(1 weigher per module) - Module/display unit connection cable
(2) (length 3 m)
TSX XBT H100
ISP Plus weighing - One PL7 Junior For : Please consult our specialist catalogue –
applications program Multiproduct batching,
- One XBT L1000 Weigher doser
program (for Weigher sorter,
operator interface) Discontinuous totaliser,
- One manual Continuous totaliser,
Flow rate controller
Factory Calibration in factory (0…15 tonnes) Please consult our specialist catalogue –
calibration or by using a press (20…50 tonnes)
To be ordered with the TSX ISP Y1i0
module and the load cells
Load cells, accessories – Please consult our specialist catalogue –

(connectors, cables,
simulators, etc)
weighing platform
(1) Includes a bilingual Quick Reference Guide as standard : English and French.
(2) The weighing module counts as 2 application-specific channels.
Dimensions
TSX XBT H100 display unit Flush mounting
fixed using 4 or 6 bolts (supplied)
pressure mounted (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)
92,6 ± 0,5
50
12,35 183,8 5,85

6,2
186,8 ± 0,5
89,6
102
7 202
6,2
43552/7
Process power supply units and modules
Description, specifications
References :
page 43560/3
Dimensions :
page 43560/3
TBX SUP 10 and TSX SUP 1ii1 power supply units and modules are designed to provide a 24 V power to control system
peripherals (sensors, preactuators, encoders, MMI terminals, regulators, indicator lamps, pushbuttons, pneumatic
cylinders, mini PLC extension rack, etc). These supplies are connected to a c 100...240 V, 50/60 - 400Hz a.c. supply
or a 125 V d.c. supply, see characteristics below.
The power supply provided ranges from 24 W (24 V/1 A) to 240 W (24 V/10 A). The TSX SUP 1ii1 power supply outputs
are safety extra low voltage (SELV) and can be wired in parallel with a device for optimising the power. TSX SUP 1011/
1021 models can operate in redundant mode thus ensuring greater availability of safety control systems. These power
supplies conform to PLC standards IEC 1131-2 for immunity and resistance to interference and EN 50081-2 for radiated
interference.
TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051
process power supply modules
1 These comprise :
2 1 A support plate for fixing the module
2 A display block comprising a 24 V (green) indicator lamp
3 which is on if the internal and output voltages are correct,
and an LSH power optimization mode (orange) indicator
lamp for TSX SUP 1011/1021 power supply modules
6 only
3 A cover for protecting the terminal block
4 A screw terminal block for connection :
- to the mains supply
- of the a 24 V output
4 5 A space for the insertion of the cable clamp
6 A 110/220 V voltage selector (TSX SUP 1021/1051
modules only)
7 A NOR/LSH switch located at the rear of the module for
controlling the power optimization device (TSX SUP
7 5 1011/1021 power supply modules only)
TSX SUP 1101 process power supply unit

The front panel comprises :
1 A display block comprising an ON (orange) indicator
lamp which is on if the module is powered up
2 A display block comprising a 24 V (green) indicator lamp
which is on if the a 24 V output voltage is present and
correct
3 A cover for protecting the terminal block
4 A screw terminal block for connection to the a.c. supply
5 A screw terminal block for connection to the a 24 V
output voltage
6 A space for the insertion of the cable clamp
7 Four holes for fixing the module
7 1 6 4 3 2 6 5 3
Characteristics
Type of power supply module TBX SUP 10 TSX SUP 1011 TSX SUP 1021 TSX SUP 1051 TSX SUP 1101
Nominal input voltage V c 100…240 or a 125 c 100…120/200...240
Input voltage limit V c 90…264 or c 85…264 or c 85…132/170...264
a 88…156 a 105…150
Accepted micro-break period (1) ms ≤ 10 for c, ≤ 1 for a ≤ 10
Mains supply frequency Hz 47…63 47…63/360...440
Nominal input current A 0.4 0.8 2 3.5
Maximum inrush current (2) at 240 V A 30 75 38 75
Maximum I2t value (2) at 240 V A2S 2 2.6 2 3.9 8.5
Power factor 0.6
Efficiency at full load % > 75 > 80
Useful power (3) W 24 26 (30) 53 (60) 120 240
Nominal output current at 60 °C A 1 1.1 2.2 5 10
Output voltage (0 to 60 °C) V 24 ± 5 % 24 ± 3 %
Protection against short-circuits Continuous/automatic Fallback to 0 and automatic reset on Current limit
resetting disappearance of fault
Protection against overvoltages V Peak limiting U > 36 Peak limiting U > 32
Prim./second. dielectric withstand 1500 V rms 3500 V rms 50/60 Hz-1 min (user safety SELV conforming to EN 60950 and IEC 1131-2)
50/60 Hz-1 min
Electromagnetic interference Class A in accordance with EN 55022 and conforming to FCC 15-A
Degree of protection IP 205 IP 205, terminal block IP 215
Cooling By natural convection
Parallel connection No Yes with power optimization (2 maximum)
Series connection No Yes (2 maximum)
(1) Nominal voltage for a repetition period of 1 Hz.
(2) 25 °C on initial power up. These values must be taken into account when starting in order to size the protective devices.
(3) For an ambient temperature of 60 °C. Useful power given in ( ) for a fan-cooled enclosure or a temperature range of 0 to 40 °C.
43560/2
Process power supply units and modules
References, dimensions, mounting
Characteristics:
page 43560/2
Description Output Rating Parallel Reference Weight

voltage connection
V A kg
Unit c 100…240 V, a 24 1 No TBX SUP 10 0.290

50/60 Hz and a 125 V
TBX SUP 10
Module c 100…240 V, a 24 1.1 Yes TSX SUP 1011 0.720

50/60 - 400 Hz and a 125 V SELV (1) (2)
Modules c 100…120 V a 24 2.2 Yes TSX SUP 1021 1.090

and c 200…240 V, SELV (1) (2)
50/60 - 400 Hz
TSX SUP 1011 TSX SUP 1021/1051
5 Yes TSX SUP 1051 1.120
(1) (2)
Unit c 100…120 V a 24 10 Yes TSX SUP 1101 2.100

and c 200…240 V, SELV (1)
50/60 - 400 Hz
(1) Product supplied as standard with a bilingual quick reference guide : English and French.
(2) Mounted in TSX RKY 6/8/12/6E/8E/12E racks (any slot except the slot for TSX PSYii0M power supply modules), on
TSX SUP 1101 AM1-DE200/DP200 rails or on AM1-PA mounting plate.
Dimensions, mounting
TBX SUP 10 power supply unit
113
6,5
54
87
32,5
74 100
Power supply modules
TSX SUP 1011 TSX SUP 1021/1051 Mounting support (supplied) Mounted on AM1-DE200 or AM1-DP200 rail
16 8,72 56 or on AM1-PA mounting plate
4
140 (1)
151,5
150
150
88,9
59,2
4,5
4,5
31,3
20 147,2 (1)
5,75
120,2 36,5 73
17,72 40 136,2 (2)
73,43
(1) 139.7 mm with AM1-DP200 rail
(1) Distance between centres (2) Mounted on AM1-PA mounting plate
compatible with Micro PLC
TSX SUP 1101 power supply unit (mounted on AM1-PA mounting plate)
AF1-EA6
31,3
151,5
88,9
31,3
16 8,75 207,3 8,75

135 224,8
43560/3
Premium Warm Standby redundancy
References :
Presentation
page 43566/6
Connections :
page 43566/7
Presentation
The Premium Warm Standby redundancy offer ensures continuity of operation for a control system based on a Premium
platform in the event of failure of :
i Central processing and communication functions
i All or part of the I/O system
It is based on the “Normal/Backup” redundancy principle with complete redundancy of the main processing and
communication functions, the use of simple I/O shared on a Fipio bus and/or redundancy of in-rack I/O.
It covers all availability requirements when the purpose of the PLC is to monitor an installation in continuous operation,
signal incidents to a control station, and transmit command instructions from the supervision manager to various locations
on an extensive site. It is aimed at processes which can tolerate a lack of control on the part of the PLC lasting 1 to 2 s
(average time for changeover from the “Normal” to the “Backup” unit).
Areas of application :
i In the commercial sector :
- centralised technical management of a public facility (tunnel, airport, etc)
- control/monitoring of a water treatment or distribution station
- electrical technical management
i In the industrial sector :
- food and beverage processing
- slow chemical processes
- level/temperature monitoring, etc
Operational safety and availability
The Warm Standby architecture ensures that the control system functions are available, irrespective of the failure of any
system component.
Operational safety Safety : capacity of an entity to present no danger to people, goods and
in control systems : the environment
capacity to provide a specific
service during the cycle
Availability :
capacity of an entity to Reliability : capacity of an entity to
be operational, at any perform a service within a given time
given moment or for a
given period of time
Ease of maintenance : capacity of an
entity to be maintained or returned to
operational state within a given time
Maintenance logistics: capacity of an

organisation to provide the necessary
maintenance resources
Safety
Safety PLCs
Standard PLCs Premium Warm Standby solution
Availability
43566/2
References :
Principle
page 43566/6
Connections :
page 43566/7
Principle
The Premium Warm Standby architecture combines physical redundancy of the PLC with “Normal/Backup” type
operation.
Only the “Normal” PLC processes the application and generates the outputs. The “Backup” PLC applies the outputs
generated by the “Normal” PLC, performs self-diagnostics and permanently diagnoses the “Normal” PLC.
In event of a malfunction on the “Normal” PLC, the “Backup” PLC takes control and then becomes the “Normal” PLC (the
faulty PLC, previously “Normal”, becomes the “Backup”).
Optimum availability of the application is ensured by :
i Automatic or manual “Normal/Backup” changeover
i Smooth changeover on the actuators
i Updating of the “Backup" PLC on each cycle
i Signalling of the faulty component
i Online repair
i Transparent supervision (SCADA)
Ethernet TCP/IP network
Modbus bus
1 2
3 4 5
6 7
TBX
Micro
Premium
Momentum
Fipio bus
Essential elements for redundancy

1 TSX PSY power supply
2 TSX P57 353M/453M processor
3 TSX ETY 110 Ethernet TCP/IP communication module
Optional elements for redundancy

4 TSX ETY 210 Ethernet TCP/IP communication module
5 TSX SCY 21601 communication module with TSX SCP 114 Modbus protocol PCMCIA card
6 TSX PSY power supply
7 TSX DiY discrete I/O modules, or TSX AiY analogue I/O modules
Shared elements on the Fipio bus
Elements which can be redundant are :

i The main rack
i The main rack power supply
i The processor
Possibly accompanied by :
i Discrete and analogue input modules
i Discrete and analogue output modules
i One or more extendable racks with their power supply
i One or more Ethernet TCP/IP network or Modbus bus communication modules
Elements of the Fipio bus shared between the “Normal” and “Backup” PLCs are :
i Discrete or analogue input modules (Momentum or TBX)
i Discrete or analogue output modules (Momentum or TBX)
i One or more Micro/Premium agent PLCs (these can support the entire range of I/O : discrete, analogue or application-
specific)
43566/3
References :
Functions
page 43566/6
Connections :
page 43566/7
Functions
“Normal” and “Backup” PLC functions
The “Normal” and “Backup” PLCs are physically and functionally identical, but their role is differentiated according to their
status : “Normal” or “Backup”.
The “Normal” Premium PLC :

i Executes the application
i Updates the outputs and inputs (in-rack and on the Fipio bus)
i Provides communication functions with peripheral devices
i Sends its database to the “Backup” PLC
i Recovers diagnostic information from the “Backup” PLC
i Generates its own diagnostic information as well as that of the Premium Warm Standby architecture
The “Backup” Premium PLC :

i Executes part of the application
i Reads the state of the in-rack inputs
i Updates its in-rack and Fipio outputs according to the state of those of the “Normal” PLC
i Provides communication functions with peripheral devices
i Recovers diagnostic information from the “Normal” PLC
i Generates its own diagnostic information as well as that of the Premium Warm Standby architecture
Management of shared I/O on Fipio bus
The Fipio bus manages I/O exchanges on Fipio devices. The “Normal” PLC is an arbitrator for the active Fipio bus while
the “Backup” PLC is an arbitrator for the passive Fipio network.
Due to the characteristics of the Fipio bus, only the “Normal” PLC reads the physical inputs on the Fipio bus and controls
the physical outputs on the Fipio bus. The “Backup” PLC does not access the Fipio bus.
During each cycle, the “Backup” PLC receives the values of the I/O on the Fipio bus from the “Normal” PLC via the inter-
PLC Ethway link (TSX ETY 110 module) and applies them to its own outputs. This updating of the memory enables
smooth “Normal/Backup” changeover by maintaining the state of the I/O during changeover.
Management of “Normal/Backup” states
Malfunction of one of the following elements automatically causes a “Normal/Backup” changeover :

i Main rack power supply
i PLC processor
i TSX ETY 210 communication module
i Fipio bus connected to the integrated processor port
For all other elements, “Normal/Backup” changeover can be customised (manual changeover).
Management of optional redundant I/O
For redundant inputs, the sensor information is transmitted simultaneously to the “Normal” and “Backup” PLCs via the
2 input modules placed in each PLC. Two Telefast 2 16-channel sub-bases, ABE-7ACC10 with redundant inputs and
ABE–7ACC11 with redundant outputs, can be used to perform this double wiring easily using preformed HE 10 connector
connection cables, (see page 43566/7, refs. 14, 15, 20 and 21).
The output values are only generated by the application processing of the “Normal” PLC. This sends its commands to the
corresponding output modules.
During each cycle, the “Backup” PLC receives the “Normal” PLC output values via the inter-PLC Ethway link
(TSX ETY 110 module) and applies them to its own outputs. This updating enables smooth “Normal/Backup”
changeover by maintaining the state of the outputs during changeover.
Management of supervision transparency (SCADA)
Transparent communication with level 2 (supervisor, third-party device, etc) during changeover of the PLC in “Normal”
mode to the PLC in “Backup” mode is provided by the TSX ETY 210 Ethernet TCP/IP modules, using a unique IP address.
Communication with a redundant architecture is therefore similar to that for a simple architecture.
This transparency is identical in Modbus with the use of the TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA card (Modbus protocol in RS 485)
installed in the TSX SCY 21601 communication module.
43566/4
References :
Functions (continued), software setup
page 43566/6
Connections :
page 43566/7
Functions
Ring topology for shared equipment on the Fipio bus
To improve the availability of shared equipment on the Fipio bus, it is possible to create a Fipio redundant ring using fibre
optics. The fibre optic ring can then be used to :
i Maintain normal operation in the event of a break at some point on the fibre optic medium
i Increase the immunity of the Fipio bus in environments with high levels of electromagnetic interference
Optical fibre
Premium Momentum Premium
1 OZD FIP G3 fibre optic transmitter (see page 43590/3)
Software setup
A Premium Warm Standby redundant architecture is set up using PL7 Junior/Pro software, in exactly the same way as
a standard non-redundant process is set up. It is, however, necessary to apply the rule that the application program of
both the “Normal” and “Backup” PLCs must be completely identical.
Redundancy entails certain special features which, if taken into account at the start of the development task, are very
simple to set up using the additional Premium Warm Standby application design software TLX CD/CD3 WSBY P40E.
This software can be perform the following functions :

i Taking account of Normal/Backup states during program execution
i Sharing the database between the 2 PLCs via DFB user function blocks and EF elementary function blocks.
i Management of redundant in-rack I/O
i Management of shared I/O on the Fipio bus
43566/5
References
Connections :
page 43566/7
References
Description Type Reference Weight
(1) kg
Software packages Equipment with 1 station TLX CD WSBY P40E –

for setting up a
Warm Standby redundant
architecture on Premium Equipment with 3 stations TLX CD3 WSBY P40E –
Description Functions Reference Weight

kg
Ethernet TCP/IP Identical to those of the TSX ETY 210 0.270

communication TSX ETY 110 module (see p. 43601/13)
module For the Warm Standby architecture,
for Premium this module also provides :
Warm Standby architecture - transparent addressing during
changeover
- diagnostics of the architecture
(self-tests, state of the Ethernet link
and of the TSX ETY 210 dual module)
- maintenance with access to the
“Backup” PLC
(1) Product supplied with setup manual in English.
Additional compatible elements
The Warm Standby architecture presented on page 43566/3 shows, among other things, the essential elements for
redundancy. Compatible standard modules can be added to this minimum configuration according to the requirements
of the process being automated.
Elements for redundancy (sold in lots of 2)
i Bus X remote system

- TSX REY 200 Bus X remote module, for increasing the length of Bus X to 2 x 350 m.
i Communication
- TSX ETY 210 Ethernet TCP/IP communication module, for communication with level 3
- TSX SCP 114 Modbus communication PCMCIA card, for Modbus Slave communication with transparent addressing
for third-party devices. This card should be inserted in the slot in the TSX SCY 21601 communication module.
i Discrete and analogue I/O

- TSX DEY iiK discrete input modules with HE 10 connectors with ABE-7ACC11 Telefast 2 redundant sub-bases
- TSX DSY iiK discrete output modules with HE 10 connectors with ABE-7ACC10 Telefast 2 redundant sub-bases
- TSX DMY iiK discrete mixed I/O modules with HE 10 connectors with ABE-7ACC11/10 Telefast 2 redundant sub-
bases
- TSX AEY/ASY analogue I/O modules (compatible under certain wiring conditions)
- TSX CTY/CCY counter, TSX CAY/CSY/CFY axis control and TSX ISP weighing modules. These modules cannot be
used as elements for redundancy, but can be used as elements shared via the Fipio agent Premium PLCs.
Shared elements on the Fipio bus
i TBX distributed I/O modules :

- TBX LEP 030 Fipio communication module for base units
- TBX DES/DSS/DMS discrete I/O base units
- TBX AES/ASS/AMS analogue I/O base units
- TSX EEF/ESF/EMF dust and damp proof discrete I/O base units
i Momentum I/O modules :

- 170 FTN 110 01 Fipio communication module
- 170 ADI/ADO/ADM discrete I/O base units
- 170 AAI/AAO/AMM analogue I/O base units
i Fipio agent PLCs :

- Premium PLC, can take all I/O and application-specific modules
- Micro PLC, can take all I/O and application-specific modules
i Other shared elements :

- OZF FIP G3 fibre optic transmitter, can be used to create a Fipio bus fibre optic ring
- TSX FP ACC 6 Fipio electrical repeater, increases the length of the bus by the creation of segments, each 1000 m
maximum
43566/6
Connections
References :
page 43566/6
Example of architecture with redundant I/O and shared I/O on Fipio bus
12 3 45 6 12 3 45 6
16
17 17
1 18 1
19
7 8 7 8
9 10 10 11
20 20
TBX 14
12 15
13
21
Momentum
1 TSX RKY iEX : Premium extendable rack

2 TSX PSY iiiiM : power supply module
3 TSX P57 353M/453M : Premium processor with integrated Fipio link
4 TSX ETY 110 : Ethernet TCP/IP network module
5 TSX ETY 210 : Ethway/Ethernet TCP/IP network module
6 TSX SCY 21601 : communication module for type III PCMCIA card
7 TSX DSY iiK : discrete output modules, for redundancy
8 TSX DEY iiK : discrete input modules, for redundancy
9 TSX LEP 030 : Fipio communication module for TBX base units with TSX BLP 01 connector
10 TBX DES 16ii : distributed discrete output TBX base units, shared
11 TBX DSS 16ii : distributed discrete output TBX base units, shared with TBX CBS 010 cache/cable
12 170 FNT 110 00 : Fipio communication module for Momentum base unit with TSX FPP ACC2 connector
13 170 ADI/AAI/ADM iii : discrete or analogue I/O Momentum base unit
14 ABE-7ACC11/10 : Telefast 2 sub-bases for redundant I/O
15 ABE-7 i16iii : Telefast 2 connection sub-bases
16 LA4-DT2U : time-delay relay designed to desynchronise starting of the “Normal” PLC and the “Backup” PLC during
simultaneous power-up
17 TSX SCP 114 : type III PCMCIA card for Modbus Slave communication
18 490 NTW 000ii : preformed connection cable with RJ 45 connector, for interconnecting TSX ETY 110 modules
(shielded twisted pair)
19 TSX FP CA i00 : Fipio bus trunk cable, shielded twisted pair
20 TSX CDP i53 : preformed connection cable with HE 10 connector (length = 0.5, 1, 2, 3, or 5 m)
21 ABF-H20H008 : preformed connection cable with HE 10 connector (length = 0.08 m)
43566/7
8 Communication
Contents
X-Way communication Selection guide for bus and network modules pages 0477Q/2 to 0477Q/5
X-Way communication architecture pages 43609/2 to 43301/11
Communication module i
TSX SCYi page 43591/3
Ethernet TCP/IP modules i

TSX ETHi page 43601/13
Transparent Factory Ethernet wiring system : ii

499 Ni page 48190/7
10baseT and 100baseTX
Ethernet wiring system : 10base5 TSX ETH i page 43616/3
Fipway network TSX FPP 20 page 43592/3
Modbus Plus network TSX MBP 100 page 43599/5
Fipio bus manager i

TSX P57i page 43589/5
Fipio bus Agent function i

TSX FPP10i page 43593/3
Wiring system : Fipio bus and Fipway network i

TSX FPi pages 43597/6 and 43597/7
Fipio bus and Fipway network on fibre optic cables OZD FIP page 43590/3
Modem module i
TSX MDMi page 43598/3
Uni-Telway bus TSX SCP pages 43594/6 and 43594/7
Modbus/Jbus bus TSX SCP pages 43595/4 and 43595/5
Asynchronous serial links TSX SCP page 43596/3
Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards i

TSX SCi pages 43606/2 and 43606/3
and TER/AUX ports
Jnet network i
TSX JNPi page 43603/3
InterBus-S bus TSX IBY 100 page 43602/5

TSX IBX 100
Profibus DP bus TSX PBY 100 page 43607/3
CANopen bus TSX CPP 100 page 43615/3
S0213/3
Network modules
Selection guide
Applications Ethernet TCP/IP heterogeneous industrial local area network

Network type
Network type Ethernet TCP/IP Ethernet TCP/IP with integrated Web server
Structure
Physical interface 10base5 (AUI), 10baseT (RJ45) 10baseT (RJ45)
Method of access CSMA - CD CSMA - CD
Data rate 10 Mbps 10/100 Mbps
Medium Triaxial cable Double twisted pair

Double twisted pair Fibre optic (via Transparent Factory
Fibre optic (via Transparent Factory Hubs, Switches or Transceiver)
Hubs, Switches or Transceiver)
Configuration
Max. no. 64
of devices
Max. length 500 to 2800 m (depending on medium used)
No. of links/stations 1 to 4 (depending on processor or coprocessor used :

1 with TSX P57 153M/2i3M and T PCX 57 2i3M, 3 with TSX P57 3i3M and T PCX 57 353M, 4 with TSX P57 453M
Services
Message handling Ethway : Uni-TE, COM, application-to-application
TCP/IP : X-Way/Uni-TE message handling or Modbus message handling
Integrated Integrated Web server : Integrated Web server : Integrated Web server :
Web server diagnostic, diagnostic diagnostic
Web user page (1.4 Mb) Web user page (7.5 Mb)
Other TCP Open function I/O Scanning I/O exchanges (64 devices)
Type of processor All types of Premium processor
Type of module Standard format
Type of intelligent TSX ETY 110 TSX ETY 110 WS TSX ETY 410 TSX ETY 5101
module
Page 43601/13
0477Q/2
Industrial local area network conforming to the Fip Industrial local area network conforming to the Jnet proprietary industrial local area network
standard Modbus Plus standard
Fipway Modbus Plus Jnet
Fip standard Modbus Plus standard Isolated RS 485 20 mA CL
Bus managed by bus arbitrator Rotating token Rotating token
1 Mbps 1 Mbps 19.2 Kbps
Shielded twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted shielded pair

Fibre optic Fibre optic
32 per segment 32 per segment 32 (16 if SMC PLC in the network)

128 on all segments 64 on all segments
1000 m per electrical segment 450 m per segment 1300 m 200 m depends on the
5000 m max. 1800 m with 3 repeaters network topology
1 max. 3 max.
- Uni-TE Modbus message handling : Shared table

- COM/shared table - read/write variables 128 words in total
- Application-to-application - global database (64 words if SMC PLC in the network)
- Telegram - Peer Cop service
– – –
Type III PCMCIA card on processor Type III PCMCIA card on

TSX SCY 21601 module
TSX FPP 20 TSX MBP 100 TSX JNP 112 TSX JNP 114
43592/3 43599/5 43603/3
0477Q/3
Bus modules
Selection guide
Applications Open industrial fieldbus conforming to the Fip standard Multi-component industrial bus
Bus type
Bus type Fipio (Agent) Fipio (bus manager) Uni-Telway Uni-Telway,

(1) character mode
Structure
Physical interface Fip standard Non isolated RS 485 Isolated RS 485
Method of access Bus managed by bus arbitrator Master/Slave
Data rate 1 Mbps 1.2…19.2 Kbps
Medium Twisted pair Double shielded twisted pair

Fibre optic
Configuration
Max. no. 32 per segment 5 28
of devices 128 on all segments (limited to 64 with
TSX P57 1i3M processor)
Max. length 1000 m to 15 000 m (according to medium used) 10 m 1000 m
No. of links/station 1 max. 1 max. According to consumption
Services - Uni-TE Uni-Telway :

- Periodic data exchanges (Agent function) - Uni-TE message handling, 128 bytes (Client/Server)
- Application-to-application - Application-to-application, 128 bytes
- Transparency of remote I/O exchanges - Transparency for any device in an X-Way
architecture via a master
Type of processor All types of Premium TSX P57 i53M All types of Premium processor
processor T PCX 57 353M
Type of module Type III PCMCIA card Integrated link Integrated Standard format
on processor on processor Uni-Telway link module
Type of intelligent 1 Integrated link 1

module
TSX FPP 10 Integrated link TSX SCY 21601
AUX terminal port
Page 43593/3 43589/5 43594/6 43591/3
(1) InterBus-S bus, see page 43602/5, Profibus-DP bus, see page 43607/3, CAN open bus, see page 43615/3.
0477Q/4
Modem link Open industrial fieldbus
conforming to the AS-i
standard
character mode, Modbus/Jbus Uni-Telway/ASCII AS-i
RS 232 D Isolated RS 485 20 mA CL RTC link AS-i standard
Master/Slave Master/Slave Master/Slave
0.3…19.2 Kbps V 32 - 9.6 Kbps 167 Kbps
Double shielded twisted pair Telephone line 2-wire AS-i cable
Point-to-point 28 16 Point-to-point 31 sensor/actuator

or via Modem devices
15 m 1000 m 1300 m Unlimited 100 m

200 m with repeater
table 1 max. 8 max.
Uni-Telway : Transparent exchanges

- Uni-TE message handling, 240 bytes (Client/Server) with sensor/actuator
- Application-to-application 240 bytes devices
- Transparency for any device in an X-Way architecture via a master
Modbus/Jbus : –
- Master/Slave RTU or ASCII
- 13 Modbus functions
Type III PCMCIA card Type III PCMCIA card Standard format module
Slot on processor and/or on TSX SCY 21601 module on processor
TSX SCP 111 TSX SCP 114 TSX SCP 112 TSX MDM 10 TSX SAY 100
43594/6 and 43595/4 43598/3 43611/3
0477Q/5
Communication architecture
Ethernet
Level 3
Monitor Pro
Ethernet TCP/IP, Ethway
Level 2 Ethernet TCP/IP

(Uni-TE, Modbus)
A5000/A7000
TSX 7
Premium
Premium
Fipio
Level 1 Magelis/CCX 17
Fipway / Modbus Plus

Premium
Momentum
Micro Micro Bus AS-i Micro AS-i Bus
Nano
XAL control
station
Nano
ATV
Intelligent
sensors
Nano
Third party
products
Nano
FT 2100
43609/2
Digital HP etc
PC compatible *
Ethernet TCP/IP (Modbus)

Quantum + Web server
Quantum
Premium + Web server
Ethernet
Premium
Magelis Modbus Plus
TXBT F
Momentum
Bridge
ATV-58 Micro Premium
Modbus Plus
Premium Bus X
T XBT-F
Magelis
Premium Sensors Quantum
AS-i Bus
Premium
Motor starter Bus

AS-iAS-i
Bus
XAL control Intelligent XBL keypad

station sensors
Motor starter
* “Thin Client” PC compatible : PC having only Windows and an Internet browser, see page 43601/6.
43609/3
X-Way communication
X-Way and the OSI model
The “International Standards Organisation” (ISO) has put forward a reference model for communication structures,
divided into seven essential functions. Entitled OSI (Open Systems Interconnect), it enables open systems to be
interconnected, thus ensuring that products will operate together. The communication architecture of the Micro/ Premium
PLCs, like that of TSX 17 or TSX model 40 PLCs, conforms to the OSI model.
Telegram
7 Application Common words Uni-TE
Modbus
Application-to-application communication
Uni-TE
6 Presentation
5 Session
4 Transport TCP
3 Network X-Way addressing system IP
2 Data link Uni-Telway WorldFip ISO 8802-3 ISO 8802-3

Ethernet Ethernet
1 Physical RS 485 WorldFip ISO 8802-3 ISO 8802-3

19.2 Kbps 1 Mbps 10 Mbps 10 Mbps
Uni-Telway Fipio/Fipway Ethway Ethernet TCP/IP
(1)
Physical layer Enables the physical transmission of data signals between 2 systems via a medium.
i Uni-Telway is an isolated bus conforming to the RS 485 standard, with a standard data rate
of 19.2 Kbps
i Fipway conforms to the WorldFip standard, and is a 1 Mbps baseband bus
i Fipio conforms to the WorldFip standard, and is a 1 Mbps baseband bus
i Ethway/Ethernet TCP/IP conforms to the 8802-3 standard, and is a 10 Mbps baseband bus (1)
Data link layer Undertakes data transfer organized between two adjacent systems with error detection and
correction.
i Uni-Telway : a fixed master manages access to the multidrop bus
i Fipway conforms to the WorldFip standard, with access via bus arbitrator
i Fipio conforms to the WorldFip standard, with access via bus arbitrator
i Ethway conforms to the ISO 8802-2/8802-3 standards for the CSMA/CD bus (Carrier Sense
Multiple Access with Detection Collision), better known as Ethernet
Network layer Undertakes the routing of data and the selection of a path between 2 devices. The addressing
mechanism enables the transfer of data between products and ensures automatic and totally
transparent routing of messages.
Application layer Concerns application programs, data exchange and cooperation conventions.
i Uni-TE message handling system : standard on all Schneider equipment, this service
enables read and write access to variables, program transfers, management of device
operating modes, link and device diagnostics and transmission of unsolicited data
i COM distributed database : set of words shared between several devices and updated
cyclically. This service is used to exchange data between TSX 17, Micro, Premium and TSX
model 40 PLCs
i Shared Table service (2) : set of words shared between several Micro and Premium PLCs
and updated cyclically
i Exchange of periodic data : data updated cyclically between the bus manager PLC (TSX
model 40, April 5000/7000 or Premium) and the Agent device. This service is available on
the Fipio bus (see page 43593/2)
i Application-to-application communication : suitable for data table exchanges
i Telegram : priority application-to-application communication for short, high-priority data
exchanges
(1) Not available on Micro.

(2) Available on Fipway network. The COM distributed database service and the Shared Table service are mutually
exclusive.
43301/2
X-Way communication
Application services
Uni-TE services
The Uni-TE protocol is the industrial message handling system supported by the X-Way communication architecture. It
operates on the question/answer or request/confirmation principle.
A device which supports the Uni-TE protocol can be a :

i Client : this device initiates communication. It asks a question (reads), transmits data (writes) or sends an instruction
(Run, Stop, etc)
i Server : this device executes the service requested by the client and sends a confirmation after execution
The services provided depend on the type of device (PLC, numerical controller, programming terminal, supervision
station, etc). Depending on its function, each device can be Client and/or Server.
FT 2100
Terminal
transparency
CCX 77
Fipway/Ethernet TCP/IP
Premium Premium TSX 7
A Client device can access the system functions of a PLC (Server), even if there is no application program, to read/write
language objects (bits, words, etc) upload/download programs, stop or start, etc.
A Client PLC can access other devices on the architecture via its application program. It can read/write objects on another
PLC or numerical controller, select programs on a numerical controller, etc.
Uni-TE requests are sent using :
i Communication function library for Micro/Premium PLCs
i TXT text function blocks or OFB function blocks for TSX model 40 and TSX 17-20 PLCs
The Uni-TE request is transmitted at the end of the master task, and is received by the Client PLC at the start of the master
task.
The Uni-TE service is particularly suitable tor supervision, diagnostic and control functions.
Uni-TE service Ethway, Ethernet TCP/IP Fipway Fipio Uni-Telway
Request size 256 bytes 128 bytes 128 bytes 240 bytes (2)
or 1 Kbyte (1)
Note :
The Uni-TE service can be used between stations connected on different Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Fipio or Uni-Telway
segments of the same multinetwork architecture (please consult our specialist catalogue).
Terminal transparency
FT 2100 programming terminals and PC compatible supervisors are Uni-TE clients. A terminal connected to any network
station, or connected directly to the Fipway/Ethernet TCP/IP network, can communicate with any other station on the
network (all the exchanges are transparent to the user) as though the terminal were physically connected to the PLC with
which it establishes communication.
Terminal transparency can be used between stations connected on different Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway or Fipio segments
of the same multinetwork architecture.
(1) 256 bytes for synchronous requests and 1 Kbyte for requests processed in the background. Ethway, Ethernet TCP/IP
not available on Micro PLC.
(2) Size limited to 128 bytes on Micro/Premium terminal port and TSX model 40 PLCs, and to 32 bytes on TSX 17-20 and
TSX 47-20/25.
43301/3
X-way communication
Application services (continued)
COM service : Distributed database
The COM service, available on the Fipway/Ethway (1) network, consists of a set of dedicated words known as common
words (%NW on Micro/Premium PLCs and COM i, j, k on TSX 17-20 and TSX model 40 PLCs).
Depending on its software configuration, each network station may or may not access the database (in read only or
read/write mode).
All PLC stations exchanging common words (maximum 32 stations) are allocated, in a dedicated 128-word database, a
write zone which is set at 4 words per Micro/Premium station (2) for the Fipway/Ethway network.
Fipway/Ethway
TSX 17-20 (1)

Micro (1)
Premium
TSX 7
%NW distributed database : 128 words

The COM words in a PLC are updated automatically during each scan of the general sequential program (master task)
without the intervention of the application program : at the start of the scan for reading and at the end of the scan for writing.
The user program consists simply of assigning or reading these common words (%NW). As the COM service has a zone
of dedicated and preconfigured words, there is absolutely no risk of conflict of data between or within PLCs.
Shared Table service
This service exchanges a table of %MW internal words divided into as many zones as there are Micro/Premium PLCs
which comprise the Fipway network. The exchange principle is based on the broadcasting, by each PLC, of a word
memory zone (broadcast zone) to the other PLCs on the network.
Each network station is allocated an exchange table comprising %MW internal words.
The maximum characteristics of the exchange table are :
i 128 %MW internal words for 32 PLCs sharing the Shared Table service on the network
i Broadcast zone assigned to each PLC : variable from 1 to 32 %MW internal words (the size of the broadcast zone
assigned to PLC n should be the same length in all the PLCs on the network sharing this service)
Fipway/Ethway
TSX 37-21/22 Micro (1) Micro (1) TSX 37-21/22

Premium Premium
%MW Shared Table : 128 words maximum
The exchange table in each PLC is updated automatically and independently of the program scan cycle. The user program
consists of simply assigning or reading %MW words in the broadcast zone. The user must take care, when configuring
and assigning broadcast zones, not to create memory conflicts between or within PLCs.
COM service and Shared Table service
These services are mutually exclusive and are recommended for the periodic broadcasting of status variables without
loading the application program. For transmission of events, application-to-application communication with confirmation
is more suitable.
Note :
The COM service or Shared Table service remains local to a Fipway network. Each network has its own distributed
database. The Shared Table service is only available on Micro and Premium PLCs.
(1) Ethway not available on Micro and TSX 17-20.
(2) 0 or 4 common words for TSX model 40 stations with address 0 to 31 or for TSX 17-20 stations with address 0 to 15.
43301/4
X-way communication
Application services (continued)
This consists of sending word tables between 2 devices via the user application program.
For the following types of PLC :
i Micro/Premium, transmission and/or reception is via the DATA_EXCH text type data exchange function
i TSX 17 and TSX model 40, transmission and/or reception is via a TXT text block or a Uni-TE OFB function block
Micro
Premium Word table
EXCH_DATA EXCH_DATA
Transmission Reception
Exchange of % MW data tables
The application-to-application communication service is particularly suitable for :

i Sending alarm messages from a PLC to a supervision station
i Exchanging data tables between two PLCs controlled by the application programs of the transmission and destination
device
i Sending broadcast messages to all stations and devices
Service Ethway, Ethernet TCP/IP (1) Fipway Fipio Uni-Telway
Size of application/ 256 bytes 128 bytes 128 bytes 240 bytes (2)
application messages
Note :
This service can be used between stations connected on different Ethway, Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Fipio or Uni-Telway
networks on the same multinetwork architecture.
Telegram
The telegram service available on Fipway is a special case of application-to-application messages. It enables short
messages to be sent and received on a priority basis. The maximum size of messages transmitted by telegram is 16
characters.
A telegram from a Micro/Premium PLC is sent immediately by the SEND_TLG transmission function (without waiting for
the end of the scan). A telegram is received by a Micro/Premium PLC using the RECEIVE_TLG reception function in :
i The event-triggered task (processed as soon as the message arrives in the network card)
i The fast task or master task (when scanning the RECEIVE TLG function)
A PLC can only process one telegram at a time.
The telegram service is suitable for short, high-priority messages.
Service Ethway, Ethernet TCP/IP (1) Fipway Fipio Uni-Telway
Telegram – 16 bytes – –
Note :
The telegram service remains local to a network. It can be inhibited.
(1) Ethway, Ethernet TCP/IP not available on Micro PLCs.

(2) Size limited to 128 bytes on Micro/Premium terminal port, TSX model 40 PLCs and to 32 bytes on TSX 17-20 and
TSX 47-20/25.
43301/5
X-Way communication
Multinetwork uses
The X-Way addressing mechanism (network layer), enables several Ethway, Ethernet TCP/IP and/or Fipway networks
or segments to be interconnected.
The X-Way communication architecture is designed to cover multinetwork applications capable of dealing with problems
of concentration, redundancy and inter-network communication.
Concentration
This architecture can be selected when no inter-network exchange is possible. It is particularly suitable for feedback of
supervision data to a higher level. The PLC in this case acts as a data concentrator.
This architecture allows the possibility of working on an assembly line without affecting production of the other lines.
The concentrator station collects and exchanges data with each network separately, but does not automatically route one
network to another.
Premium
CCX 77
Network 2
Network 1
Premium TSX 7 Premium PMX 7
This is a multi-module architecture where several segments are present but no communication between these different
segments is offered by the communication system.
In this case, the concentrator station belongs to the category of multi-module station and undertakes all single-network
services on the various network segments. The routing function between the various network connections is not available.
Network access redundancy
All stations are connected to 2 different Ethway, Fipway or Ethernet TCP/IP networks : Network 1 and Network 2 via 2
network communication modules. Each station will therefore have 2 addresses, one on each network. PLC application
programs will share, for example, traffic on both networks : Network 1 and Network 2.
Each PLC will monitor correct operation of both networks. If one of the networks should fail, all traffic could be transferred
to the valid network.
The traffic on both networks should be managed by the user program.
This structure increases safety and availability, as a malfunctioning network does not affect the operation of the control
system.
Network 1
Network 2
Premium Premium
TSX 7 PMX 7
43301/6
X-Way communication
Multinetwork uses
Inter-network communication
Ethernet TCP/IP Network 1
Uni-Telway
Premium Premium
Network 2 Fipway Fipway
CCX 17
Network 3
Fipway Network 4
Premium
Premium
Network 5
Fipway
Micro
TSX P57 TSX SCY 21601 TSX ETY iii

Processor Communication module Ethway, Ethernet TCP/IP module
These architectures comprise several network segments which are interconnected by “bridge PLC” stations. Transparent
communication is then offered between all devices present in this type of architecture.
These “bridge PLC” stations provide the same services as multi-module stations and ensure transparency of communi-
cation between the different network connections.
These architectures are particularly useful for applications which comprise a large number of devices. By linking functional
organization to the amount of traffic, they enable both an increase in the surface area of the installation and an
improvement in communication performance.
Ideally, architectures should have a hierarchical tree structure with a maximum of three network levels : a backbone
segment (factory floor level) assigned to zone segments to which machine level segments could eventually be connected.
For reasons of efficiency, inter-segment traffic should not exceed 10 to 20 % of the internal traffic of the segment.
Communication between X-Way networks is carried out by dedicated “bridge PLCs” which can support three or four
network connections (1) depending on the model of PLC processor :
i TSX 57-30 : 3 network connections (Ethway, Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Modbus Plus)
i TSX 57-40 : 4 network connections (Ethway, Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Modbus Plus)
“Bridge PLC” modules are configured to receive all information necessary for routing. When routing occurs directly from
module to module, no programming constraint is imposed, except when the communication module is integrated in the
processor (possible in Fipway). In the latter case, the “bridge PLC” routing capacity will be inversely proportional to its
scan time. It is therefore advisable to minimise the sequential processing to be performed by the PLC.
(1) The Modbus Plus module counts as one network connection but is not recognised as an X-Way module. It is therefore
not capable of routing messages transparently to or from a Fipway, Ethway or Ethernet TCP/IP network.
43301/7
X-Way communication
Performance
Selecting the communication architecture
When selecting an architecture, it is advisable to take performance into account at the earliest possible stage.
For this, the designer must :
i Have a clear idea of his needs :

- quantity and type of devices to be interconnected
- volume and type of exchanges
- expected response times
- environment
i Compare his needs with the characteristics of the offers available and be aware that the precise performance level
between any 2 points on an architecture is dependent on the weakest link in the chain, which can be :
- a function of the hardware
- but also a function of the applications (size, architecture, OS, machine power, etc) which are often poorly defined
at this stage of the project
i Select the most suitable architecture
The objective of the following pages is to answer the second point by explaining the performance of the different
components which constitute an X-Way architecture, concentrating on the following 2 aspects :
i Processing capacity in terms of volume (see pages 43301/9 and 43301/10)
i Application response time (see page 43301/11)
Introduction
As in any communication system, the performance of an X-Way architecture is linked to numerous parameters which
depend on the :
i Hardware used :
- network passband
- module resources
- processor resources (PLC, PC or other CPUs)
i Application services used :

- Uni-TE service, industrial message handling
- application-to-application communication
- COM service, distributed database (common words)
- telegram service
- inter-network routing on multinetwork architectures
The difficulty in determining the correct size of an architecture is due to the fact that the majority of these parameters are
linked.
Notes
i For purposes of simplification, the values shown in the tables which follow have been reduced. If these are adhered
to, correct operation of the architecture is ensured. If the performance levels obtained are not sufficient, please consult
our Regional Sales Office for a more detailed study.
i The performance levels indicated depend relatively little on the size of messages. Limiting factors have much more to
do with the number of messages. It is therefore necessary to group as much useful information as possible within the
same message using the most suitable Uni-TE request.
This is particularly the case for Ethernet (Ethway or Uni-TE profile on TCP/IP) where the Uni-TE request processing
capacity has been increased to 1 Kbyte and where these requests are processed in the background task, hence
independently of the “conventional” processing of requests which remain synchronous with the PLC cycle.
43301/8
X-Way communication
Performance
Processing capacity in terms of volume of exchanges
The methodology presented below in 4 steps can be used to determine the message processing capacity as a function
of the physical support.
Step 1 : calculation of exchanges necessary tor the application
Using the tables below, calculate the exchanges necessary for the application, ie for each station on the architecture and
for each service used, the number of messages to be transmitted and received per second.
Uni-TE service (CIient/Server message handling) (1)

Messages transmitted per Station A Station B Station N Total number of
second from messages received
per station
Messages per Station A R1
second Station B R2
destined for Station N Ri
Total number of messages Network load
transmitted per station E1 E2 Ei Cru = Σ [R1…Ri, E1…Ei]
Messages transmitted per Station A Station B Station N Total number of
second from messages received
per station
Messages per Station A R3
second Station B R4
destined for Station N Rj
Total number of messages Network load
transmitted per station E4 E5 Ej Cra = Σ [R3…Rj, E4…Ej]
Multinetwork architecture
In a multinetwork architecture, it is necessary to take into account messages transmitted or those destined for stations
on other networks on the architecture (for the Uni-TE service and application-to-application communication). Use the type
of table below for each service and for each network which make up the architecture.
Messages transmitted per Network 1 Total number of

second from Station A Station B Station N messages received
per station
Messages per Network 1
second Station A R11
destined for Station B R12
Station N R1i
Network 2
Station A R13
Station B R14
Station N R1k
Total number of messages
transmitted per station E11 E12 E1i Network load 1 (2)
Messages transmitted per Network 2 Total number of

second from Station A Station B Station N messages received
per station
Messages per Network 1
second Station A R21
destined for Station B R22
Station N R2i
Network 2
Station A R23
Station B R24
Station N R2k
Total number of messages
transmitted per station E21 E22 E2k Network load 2 (3)
Total number of messages to be compared with stages 2, 3 and 4
Number of messages transmitted between stations
Not applicable
(1) An identical table must be drawn up for the 1 Kb Uni-TE message handling available on Ethernet TCP/IP.
(2) Network load 1 : Σ [R11…R1i, R21…R2i, E11…E1i].
(3) Network load 2 : Σ [R13…R1k, R23…R2k, E21…E2k].
43301/9
X-Way communication
Performance (continued)
Step 2 : station processor processing capacity
Using the table below, compare the total number of messages received via the Uni-TE service for each station (value R1,
R2 or Ri) with the station processor processing capacity. If the result of this initial calculation is positive, go to step 3.
Messages being received Messages being transmitted
4 mes/cyc with TSX 57-10

Uni-TE service 8 mes/cyc with TSX 57-20
≤ 256 bytes (1) 12 mes/cyc with TSX 57-30
16 mes/cyc with TSX 57-40
≤ 1 Kbyte 30 mes/s
Application-to-application
Does not constitute a limiting factor
(1) On some PLC cycles a temporary overload, due for example to an adjustment terminal is permissible.
mes/cyc : number of messages being received per cycle from the PLC master task (typical cycle from 50 to 100 ms).
mes/s : number of messages transmitted and received per second.
Step 3 : bus or network module processing capacity
For each station, compare the total number of messages received (Σ [values Ri, Rj]) and the total number of messages
transmitted (Σ [values Ti, Tj] for station N for example) with the bus or network module processing capacity shown below.
If the result of this second calculation is positive, go to step 4.
Uni-TE service and Ethernet Fipway Fipio Fipio Uni-Telway

application-to-application TCP/IP address manager address Modbus
ETY ETY
110/ 410/
210 5101
< 32 ≥ 32 address 0 # 63 = 63 Serial link
PLC module 60 400 (2) 2T/2R 1T/1R 2T/2R 2T/2 R 2 T/2 R 1T/1R
(3) (3) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
PC compatible module 10 to 20 10 to 20 10 (3) 5 to 10 (3)

(3) (3)
Bridge PLC
For bridge PLCs there are two different cases :
i Routing performed via Fipway/CPU : 2 messages/cycle being transmitted and 2 messages/cycle being received.
i For all other cases routing is performed directly from module to module : 30 messages/cycle capacity.

Not applicable
(2) 350 messages per second if using I/O Scanning function
(3) messages/second : number of messages transmitted and received per second
(4) messages/cycle : number of messages transmitted and number of messages received per cycle from the PLC master
task (typical cycle from 50 to 100 ms).
Step 4 : network load
Compare the network load for each of the networks which make up the architecture (Σ [values Cru, CRa]) with the values
in the table below. Where this is not possible, it is necessary to modify the architecture (or even the application) and to
repeat the exercise until it conforms with the limits defined in the tables for steps 2 to 4.
Uni-TE service and Ethernet Fipway Fipio Uni-Telway

application-to-application TCP/IP Modbus
Serial link
Total messages 200 to 400 (3) 30 (3) 15 (3)

messages/second : number of messages transmitted and received per second.
COM service and Telegram service
The system resources (PLC processors, modules and networks) are sufficient to perform the following exchanges
i Common words and updating (transmission and reception) at each PLC scan, provided that the total capacity of the
network module is not exceeded :
- Fipway not limited
i Telegram, transmission of one telegram and/or reception of one telegram per PLC scan and per module (function
available only on Fipway card on processor)
43301/10
X-Way communication
Performance (continued)
Application response time
PLC-module processor exchanges are, with the exception

Event Report of telegrams (TLG), synchronous with the PLC cycle time,
TT in the same way as l/O exchanges. When an event appears
(input state 1 for example), a message can only be trans-
CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1 mitted after this input has been taken into consideration
Station 1
(start of the following cycle) and the PLC program has been
executed, ie approximately 1.5 cycles after the event has
NAT NAT
appeared.
CT2 CT2 Station 2 TT = Transaction time

CT1 = Device 1 cycle time
Action NAT = Network access time
CT2 = Device 2 cycle time
Network access time (NAT) shown in the table below as ms, totals the module transit time and the delay before the
message can be transmitted across the network.
Ethernet TCP/IP Fipway Fipio Fipio Uni-Telway

manager agent
ETY 110 ETY
410/5101
Uni-TE service 25 ms < 10 ms 40 to 80 ms 5 ms 20 ms 300 ms

application
to application
Telegrams 10 ms
COM common 25 ms 40 ms
words
Service not available
Transaction time TT includes the delay between the transmission of a message from a client station 1, its reception by
a server station 2, processing the request, sending back the response and its acceptance by station 1 (update of an output
for example).
As the block diagram above shows, the duration of the transaction will be between :
i TTmin = 2 x CT1 + 2 x NAT minimum
i TTmax = 4 x CT1 + CT2 + 2 x NAT maximum
Average duration is :
i TT = 3 x CT1 + 0.5 x CT2 + 2 x NAT
Note on 1 Kbyte message handling : average transaction time is identical.

Instead of processing the 1 Kbyte request cycle at the beginning of the cycle, processing is carried out at the end.
In both cases, this depends similarly on the PLC server cycle time.
Multinetwork architecture
Where one or more “bridge PLCs” are spanned, it is necessary to add the transit time of the bridge(s), plus the access
time to each of the networks.
If a bridge uses a Fipway card on a processor, the transit time is normally 1.5 x BCT, where BCT is defined as the PLC
bridge cycle time.
For all other cases, routing is carried out directly from module to module. The bridge transit time is approximately 10 ms.
43301/11
Communication module
Presentation, characteristics
References :
page 43591/3
Presentation
The TSX SCY 21601 communication module increases the communication possibilities of Premium PLCs. The module
has :
i An integrated channel, isolated RS 485 asynchronous serial link, half duplex with Uni-Telway, Modbus/Jbus and
Character mode protocols.
i A PCMCIA host channel; supporting the following protocols :
- Uni-Telway bus, Modbus/Jbus, character mode on RS 232 D link, current loop or RS 485
- Jnet network
- Fipway network
Fipway/Modbus Plus
Uni-Telway
Premium
CCX 17
Printer
Selecting PCMCIA communication cards

Protocol Multiprotocol : Uni-Telway Modbus/Jbus, Character mode
Physical layer RS 232 D (9 signals) RS 485/RS 422 20 mA CL
PCMCIA card TSX SCP 111 TSX SCP 114 TSX SCP 112
Protocol Fipway Jnet Jnet

Physical layer – 20 mA CL RS 485
PCMCIA card TSX FPP 20 TSX JNP 112 TSX JNP 114
When configuring Premium PLCs, the number of TSX SCY 21601 communication module channels must be added to the
number of application-specific channels (TSX CTY counter, TSX CAY/CSY/CFY axis control and TSX ISP weighing
modules). See pages 43511/5, 43513/5 .
The TSX SCY 21601 communication module counts as 2 application-specific channels.
Characteristics of the module integrated channel
Structure Protocol Uni-Telway Modbus/Jbus Character mode (ASCII)
Type Heterogenous industrial bus Asynchronous serial link
Physical interface Isolated RS 485
Access mode Master/Slave Half duplex, Full duplex with RS 422
Transmission Binary speed 1.2 to 19.2 K bits/s
Medium Double twisted shielded pair Twisted shielded pair
Configuration Number 28 devices maximum 1 device (point-to-point) to

of devices 98 link addresses maximum 32 devices maximum
Length of bus 1000 m excluding tap link
Tap links 20 m maximum 15 m maximum
Services See page 43594/2 See page 43595/3 See page 43596/2
43591/2
Description, references
Characteristics :
page 43591/2
Description
The front panel of the TSX SCY 21601 communication

module has :
3
1 A 25-way SUB-D connector for connecting the isolated
RS 485 integrated channel
1
2 A slot for a PCMCIA type III communication card, which
can take :
- a TSX SCP 111/112/114 multiprotocol card
- a TSX JNP 112/114 Jnet card
2 - a TSX FPP 20 Fipway card
3 A display panel consisting of 3 LEDs :

- RUN lamp : module operating
- ERR lamp : module fault
- CH0 lamp : integrated channel transmitting or
receiving data (lamp refers to the PCMCIA card channel
opposite indicated by the COM lamp)
References
Description Integrated link Slot Reference Weight
Protocol Physical PCMCIA type III (1)
layer kg
Communication Uni-Telway RS 485 2-wire - TSX SCP 11i TSX SCY 21601 0.360
module Modbus/Jbus isolated 20 mA CL and RS 485/232D
(2) Char. mode. (half duplex) serial link
(3) - TSX JNP 114/112 20 mA CL
and RS 485 Jnet network
- TSX FPP 20 Fipway network
Connecting cables for integrated channel

Description Device to Physical Protocol Length Reference Weight
be connected link kg
TSX SCY 21601
Cables for TSX SCA 50 RS 485 Uni-Telway 3m TSX SCY CU 6030 0.180
integrated passive (2-wire,
link junction box isolated)
1 2
Modbus/Jbus 3m TSX SCY CM 6030 0.180
TSX SCA 62 RS 485 Uni-Telway 3m TSX SCY CU 6530 0.200

passive (2-wire,
subscriber isolated)
socket
2 channels
3
Terminal RS 485 Character 3m TSX SCY CM 6030 0.180

RS 485 (2-wire, mode
2 isolated)
End of connection cable fitted with :

1 25-way SUB-D male connector
2 Flying leads
3 15-way SUB-D male connector
(1) Product supplied with a multilingual instruction booklet : English and French.
(2) The maximum number of TSX SCY 21601 modules depends on the total number of application-specific channels
allowed by the processor (see pages 43511/8 and 43513/5). Number of application-specific channels of the
TSX SCY 21601 module : 2.
(3) Full duplex operation with RS 422.
43591/3
Presentation
Characteristics :
pages 43601/11 and 43601/12
References :
page 43601/13
Premium platforms connect to the Ethernet TCP/IP network via 4 modules :

i TSX ETY 110, which includes 2 communication profiles; Ethway and TCP/IP on Ethernet 10 Mbps
i TSX ETY 110 WS, which includes the same 2 profiles plus the integrated Web server function
i TSX ETY 410, which includes the TCP/IP profile with the I/O Scanning function on Ethernet 10/100 Mbps and reduced
Web server
i TSX ETY 5101, which includes the same profile as the TSX ETY 410 module plus the integrated Web server function
Ethway and TCP/IP profiles
Notes on the OSI architecture
OSI model Ethway profile Ethernet TCP/IP profile
7 Application Uni-TE Uni-TE/X-Way

COM Modbus
6 Presentation
5 Session
4 Transfer TCP
3 Network X-Way addressing IP
2 Link LLC IEEE 802.2 Ethernet II or LLC IEEE 802.2

MAC IEEE 802.3 MAC IEEE 802.3
1 Physical CSMA-CD CSMA-CD

IEEE 802.3 IEEE 802.3
Nowadays, applications for distributed control systems can use a single communication network which meets not only
the demands for realtime performance on the factory floor but also the need for open access to control/monitoring software
based on products using standard communication protocols or applications using Internet technology.
Ethernet responds to these different needs in terms of data rate, capacity for open access on TCP/IP and flexibility in terms
of topology.
All these criteria are reinforced by the capacity of the Schneider offer to provide high-level services which enable the user
to reduce his development and operating costs.
These services are :
i Ethway, which incorporates all the mechanisms of the X-Way communication architecture (X-Way addressing system,
Uni-TE message handling, COM distributed database), but on a proprietary protocol
i Standard TCP/IP protocol for communication with :

- the entire X-Way architecture using X-Way/Uni-TE message handling
- Quantum devices using Modbus message handling
- M1 processors on Momentum I/O base units using Modbus message handling
- I/O type peripheral devices, by simple configuration, I/O Scanning I/O exchange function
- a PC terminal supporting an Internet browser
- third-party products using any protocol on TCP/IP courtesy of the TCP Open function
i The SNMP V1 network agent function. All Ethernet modules integrate the standard MIB II (Management Information
Base RFC 1213) and are compatible with the main commercially available network administration software programs.
Communication services common to all X-Way networks, Uni-TE message handling, application to application communication
or common words, which are available on Ethway or TCP/IP, are detailed on pages 43301/2 to 43301/7 of this section.
The following pages describe only those services specific to Ethernet TCP/IP :
i The I/O Scanning I/O exchange function, see page 43601/5
i The integrated WEB server function, see page 43601/6
i Open access to third-party protocols with the TCP Open function, see page 43601/8
43601/2
Functions
Characteristics :
pages 43601/11 and 43601/12
References :
page 43601/13
Module selection
Module types TSX ETY 110 TSX ETY 110 WS TSX ETY 410 TSX ETY 5101
Ethernet connection
AUI port for direct Ethernet

10base5 connection
RJ45 SFTP port for

10baseT connection
RJ45 SFTP port for

100baseTX connection
Inter-PLC communication
Ethway for communication with

TSX Series 7 or Series 1000 PLCs
TCP/IP with Modbus

or Uni-TE protocol
Network management
SNMP agent
I/O exchanges
I/O Scanning function
Internet access
Integrated Web server

Diagnostic
Web user page
Performance
Data rate
Processing capacity
Integrated Web application size

Functions offered by the module
43601/3
Functions
Characteristics :
pages 43601/11 and 43601/12
References :
page 43601/13
Presentation
Level 3 Factory/Site
Network
manager
PC + Internet PC + Internet 5
4 Browser Ethway Browser
10 Mbps Ethernet 10/100 Mbps
Level 2
4
a a b
2
Premium Premium
3
6
Momentum
TSX Series 7
Quantum 1
APRIL 5000
Level 1
ATV-58
T XBT-F
Workshop/building Device Magelis
1 I/O Scanning service

2 TCP/IP Uni-TE message handling
3 TCP/IP Modbus message handling
4 Integrated Web server access
5 SNMP
6 Ethway service
a TSX ETY 110 WS Ethernet module

b TSX ETY 410 Ethernet module
c TSX ETY 5101 Ethernet module
Note : The TSX ETY 110/110 WS, TSX ETY 410/5101 Ethernet modules for Premium PLCs ensure transparent routing
of X-Way and Uni-TE messages from a TCP/IP network to an X-Way network and vice-versa.
43601/4
Characteristics :
pages 43601/11 and 43601/12
References :
page 43601/13
I/O Scanning service (available on TSX ETY 410/5101 modules)
Schematic diagram
%MW word table

Read Write
Premium
Ethernet TCP/IP
Input words
Device
output words Momentum
Premium ATV-58
TXBT-F
TSX ETY 410/5101 modules can be used to exchange distributed I/O on the Ethernet network after a simple configuration
operation, with no need for special programming.
The I/O are scanned transparently by means of read/write requests according to the Modbus Master/Slave protocol on
the TCP/IP profile. This principle of scanning via a standard protocol enables communication with any device which
supports a Modbus server on TCP/IP.
This service can be used to define :

i An %MW word zone reserved for reading inputs
i An %MW word zone reserved for writing outputs
i Refresh periods independent of the PLC scan
During operation, the module :
i Manages the TCP/IP connections with each of the distributed devices
i Scans the devices and copies the I/O into the configured %MW word zone
i Feeds back status words so that correct operation of the service can be monitored from the PLC application
i Applies the preconfigured fallback values in the event of a communication problem
Within the framework of the Schneider Alliances partnership program (see pages 43601/9), Schneider Electric has
developed an offer of hardware and software products which enable the I/O Scanning protocol to be implemented on any
type of product which can be connected to the Ethernet network (please consult your Regional Sales Office).
I/O Scanning service configuration
The I/O Scanning function configuration screen in PL7 can be used to fill in the IP addresses of the peripheral devices,
their scan period (fast, normal or slow), the fallback positions in the event of a fault, the addresses of the %MW words
used to interface with the devices whose I/O are exchanged, as well as a comment.
I/O Scanning diagnostics
The PL7 debug screen associated with TSX ETY 410/5101

modules can be used to display the state of each distributed
device in real time.
A graphic representation of the Ethernet network enables
instantaneous diagnostics of the configured, scanned or
faulty I/O devices.
43601/5
Characteristics :
pages 43601/11 and 43601/12
References :
page 43601/13
Integrated Web server
Factory level
or Intranet site
Intersite Intranet
PC compatible
+ Internet Router
Ethernet browser
TCP/IP
Workshop/machine
level
Premium + Web server

Quantum + Web server
TSX ETY 110 WS/410/5101 Ethernet modules also include the integrated Web server function. This server is a PLC real-
time data server. All the data from the Premium processor supporting one of these modules is presented in the form of
Web standard pages in HTML format and can therefore be accessed by any Internet browser on the market which is
capable of executing integrated Java code.
None of the functions provided by the Web server require any configuration or programming of either the Premium PLC
or the PC compatible supporting the Internet browser. Moreover, this module can be used in an existing configuration
without any modification of the resident program.
PLC system diagnostics function (available on TSX ETY 110 WS/410/5101 modules)
The PLC system diagnostics function is a predefined secure

function (accessed by password) which displays in real
time, from an Internet browser:
i The Premium platform configuration
i Detailed diagnostics of each module belonging to that

configuration, whether the modules are local or remote
i The state of the I/O
Access function for PLC variables and data (available on TSX ETY 110 WS/410/5101 modules)
The variables access function is a predefined secure function

(accessed by password) which accesses all the PLC data
in read or write mode.
The variables to be displayed can be entered and displayed

either with symbolic addresses (S_Pump 234) or identifier
(%MW99). These variables can only be accessed in write
mode if they have been “authorised” using the Web Utility
configuration (supplied with the module). To write a value
in a variable, a second password must be entered and
confirmed.
Animation tables, containing certain application variables

to be monitored or modified, can be created by the user and
saved in the module supporting the Web server function.
43601/6
Characteristics :
pages 43601/11 and 43601/12
References :
page 43601/13
Alarm display function (available on TSX ETY 110 WS/5101 modules)
The alarm display function is a predefined secure function

(password-protected). Available with Premium PLCs, it
can be used to process alarms (display, acknowledgment
and clear) managed at PLC level using monitoring function
blocks known as Diagnostic DFBs. These alarms are
processed in exactly the same way as those for the “viewer”
screens included in PL7 Pro and Monitor Pro software,
CCX 17 operator panels or Magelis XBT-F/T XBT-F terminals
(see page 43106/3).
Graphic object editor function (available on TSX ETY 110 WS/5101 modules)
The graphic object editor function can be used to create

graphic views which include animated graphic objects
relating to PLC variables. These customisable views can
be used in user Web pages (see “Displaying predefined
Web pages” below). These views are created by means of
simple copy/paste operations, and the object parameters
are defined according to the user's requirements (colour,
PLC variables, name, etc). Views created in this way can
be saved transparently to TSX ETY 110 WS/5101 Ethernet
modules.
Displaying predefined Web pages (available on TSX ETY 110 WS/5101 modules)
TSX ETY 110 WS/5101 Ethernet modules with integrated

Web server have an accessible Flash EPROM (1) memory
zone, which is like a hard disk and receives (hosts) Web
pages defined by the user.
These Web pages can be created with any standard tool

which creates and edits in HTML format (FrontPage,
Word 97, PowerPoint, etc). Web pages created in this way
can, amongst others :
i Display all PLC variables in real time

i Execute hyper links to external servers (documentation,
suppliers, etc)
This function is particularly suitable for creating graphics

and images intended for :
i Display, monitoring, diagnostics

i Drawing up reports on real-time production
i Maintenance assistance
i User manuals
i etc
Integrated Web server configuration tool (available on TSX ETY 110 WS/5101 modules)
The FactoryCast software, supplied on a CD-ROM with the

TSX ETY 110 WS/5101 modules, is the tool which
configures and administers the integrated Web server in
this module. It is common to the Premium and Quantum
automation platforms and is compatible with Windows 95/
98 and Windows NT.
It provides the following functions :
i Definition of User names and associated passwords

i Definition of access to PLC variables which have
modification authorisation
i Save/restore a complete Web site
i Transfer Web pages created locally by the user on his
PC compatible workstation to the TSX ETY 110 WS/511
module and vice versa
(1) Memory immune to power breaks and PLC resets.
43601/7
Characteristics :
pages 43601/11 and 43601/12
References :
page 43601/13
TCP Open open access (available on TSX ETY 110 WS modules)
Schematic diagram
OSI model Ethernet TCP/IP profile Ethway profile
7 Application Uni-TE
Modbus Com
6 Presentation Socket
access
5 Session
X-Way datagram
4 Transfer TCP
3 Network IP X-Way addressing
2 Link ISO 8802.2 - ISO 8802.3
ISO 8802.3 (Ethernet)

1 Physical 10base5 10 Mbps 10baseT
The Premium platform Ethernet modules support a number of communication protocols based on the TCP/IP standard.
Among these, the Modbus protocol has public specifications and its simplicity recommends it for the needs of
communication with third-party devices (see Schneider Alliances partnership programme).
However, for certain applications, it may prove necessary to use other protocols. This is the case when, for example, users
wish to integrate Premium platforms into existing architectures which use a particular communication protocol, possibly
a proprietary one.
To meet these needs for open access, 2 interface levels are included in the Schneider offer :
i A library of basic functions, which can be used in C language, enables direct access to the socket interface on TCP.
The user can thus create his own communication functions using SDKC development software and take advantage
of the ease of use which this program offers in terms of development and debugging. Once generated, these function
blocks are used in the application like any standard PL7 programming software function block.
i A library of basic function blocks known as EFs, which can be used directly in the application programs with PL7
language. These are the same as functions developed in C language seen earlier, but are designed for use by non-
computer specialists. These EF function blocks are not modifiable.
Functions
Operating in TCP connection client/server mode, the basic functions on the Berkeley socket interface enable :
i Management of 16 connections on the Open profile out of a maximum of 32
i Creation of sockets and their attachment to any TCP port
i Passage of these sockets to "listen for a connection request from a remote client" mode
i Opening of a connection
i Transmission and reception of data on these connections (240 bytes max.)
i Closing this connection
43601/8
Characteristics :
pages 43601/11 and 43601/12
References :
page 43601/13
TCP Open open access (available on TSX ETY 110 WS modules)
Description
The TCP Open offer consists of a CD-ROM containing the TCP/IP function libraries. Open access on TCP is only possible
via the TSX ETY 110 WS Ethernet module (1). With open access on TCP, all the basic functions of TSX ETY 110 WS
modules can be used.
The TCP/IP TLX CD TCPA 33 E function library comprises :
i The SDK C program enhancement library provides access to the module TCP/IP socket functions
i The user's manual in English (no printed version)
i EF elementary communication function blocks (Socket/Bind/Listen/Accept/Shutdown/Close/Send/Receive/Select/

Set_Socket_Option/Connect) for installation using PL7 software (version ≥ V3.3)
i Higher level EF function blocks, provided by way of example, which can perform more advanced functions such as the
complete sequence for establishing or closing a connection, or sending or receiving data. The source files for all these
EF blocks are also supplied.
i An example of a PL7 application communicating with a TELNET application on a PC
If dedicated function blocks need to be created, the SDKC program for C language function development, version
≥ V3.3 should be installed on the development station (see page 43101/3).
Setup precautions
The development of C language functions requires compliance with certain setup precautions :
i To set up these services, the user should be familiar with the TCP/IP profile.
i In addition, since the SDK C program enables access to all the PLC internal resources, all the necessary precautions
should be taken when developing EF communication blocks to avoid endangering the PL7 application, especially on
the commonly fragile operating modes such as cold/warm restarts, response to a fault, etc.
i The user should also take care to maintain the requests from the different communication profiles at a level compatible
with the performance required by the application.
i Finally, it is the responsibility of the client application software (PL7 or C program) to manage the operating modes for
communication which may be specific to the application, for example the behaviour if a remote device fails to respond
or in the event of a break in connection.
For these different reasons, we recommend that you consult your Regional Sales Office to ensure that your TCP
protocol open access project is feasible.
(1) Open access on TCP requires TSX ETY 110 WS modules version ≥ PV 03 and SV 2.9. In addition, it should be
integrated in a configuration with a TSX P57 ii3 processor (or TSX P57 ii2 version ≥ V3.3).
43601/9
Description of Ethernet TSX ETY modules

Characteristics :
pages 43601/11 and 43601/12
References :
page 43601/13
Description of TSX ETY 110/110 WS modules
The TSX ETY 110/110 WS modules are single format modules which are installed in a rack slot of a Premium PLC station.
The front panel on the TSX ETY 110/110 WS module

comprises :
1
1 A display block indicating the state of the module
2
2 A standard connector for 10baseT interface (RJ45)
3 3 A standard connector for 10base5 interface (AUI)
4 Four thumbwheels for defining the station number and

4 network number
The maximum number of modules permitted (1 to 4) per configuration depends on the type of processor, see page
43601/13.
Connection of TSX ETY 110/110 WS modules
TSX ETY 110/110 WS modules can be connected in two ways :

i By a 10base5 interface (AUI), see page 43616/3 or accessories and connection cables
i By a 10baseT interface (RJ45), see page 48190/7 for accessories and connection cables
Description of TSX ETY 410/5101 modules
TSX ETY 410/5101 modules are single format modules which are installed in a rack slot of a Premium PLC station.
The front panel on the TSX ETY 410/5101 module

comprises :
1
1 A display block indicating the state of the module
2 A standard connector for 10baseT interface (RJ45)

2
The maximum number of modules permitted (1 to 4) per configuration depends on the type of processor, see page
43601/13.
Connection of TSX ETY 410/5101 modules
TSX ETY 410/5101 modules can be connected by a 10base T interface (RJ45), see page 48190/7 for accessories and
connection cables.
43601/10
Characteristics
References :
page 43601/13
Characteristics of TSX ETY 110/110 WS modules
Structure Type Heterogeneous industrial local area network conforming to IEEE 802.3 standard
Topology Bus with active tap links (for 10base5 medium)

Star network (for 10baseT medium)
Method of access Direct access with collision detection according to IEEE 802.3 (CSMA-CD) standard
Transmission Mode Manchester base band (10base5 or 10baseT)
Data rate 10 Mbps
Medium Triaxial cable 50 Ω for 10base5

Double twisted pair impedance 100 Ω ± 15 Ω for 10baseT
Configuration Number of stations 64 max. per network

(10base5)
Length of network 500 m maximum for electrical link between 2 end stations on one segment
1500 m max. total length for electrical link (3 segments connected by 2 repeaters)
2800 m max. total length for mixed electrical/fibre optic link (3 electrical segments
and 1 x 1000 m fibre optic segment connected by 1 repeater and 2 electrical/fibre optic
half-repeaters)
Tap links 4 shielded twisted pairs 50 m maximum, AUI interface (Attachment Unit Interface)
Multinetwork Possibility of interconnecting 127 X-Way networks
Configuration Number of stations Point-to-point connection (via RJ45 standard connector) enabling the formation of
(10baseT) a star network (the stations are connected to concentrators or switches)
64 stations maximum per network
Length 100 m max. between concentrator and terminal device
Module services and functions
TCP/IP services Uni-TE - client/server mode

- client/server requests of 256 bytes (synchronous mode)
- client/server requests of 1 K byte (asynchronous mode)
Modbus - client/server mode

- synchronous requests of 256 bytes
Ethway services Uni-TE - client/server mode

Common words Shared database of 256 words
Application-to-application Priority exchange of point-to-point messages of 256 bytes maximum
Common services - X-Way inter-network routing

- X-Way/Uni-TE routing
- module diagnostics
TCP Open function Services - library of C functions which can be used with SDKC development software
(1) - PL7 EF function blocks for access to the TCP layer
- example of use
Integrated Web server function Services - alarm display (with Premium PLC only)
(1) (2) - graphic objects editor
- system diagnostics
- access to PLC variables
- Web pages defined by the user (1.4 Mb available)
- Java development kit
(1) Services available on TSX ETY 110 WS modules.
(2) An Internet browser (Internet Explorer version 4, Netscape version 4.05 or other) is required on the PC station, capable
of executing Java code.
43601/11
References :
page 43601/13
Characteristics of TSX ETY 410/5101 modules
Structure Type Heterogeneous industrial local area network conforming to IEEE 802.3 standard
Topology Star network
Method of access Direct access with collision detection according to IEEE 802.3 (CSMA-CD) standard
Transmission Mode Manchester base band
Data rate 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition
Medium Double twisted pair impedance 100 Ω ± 15 Ω for 10baseT
Configuration Number of stations Point-to-point connection (via RJ45 standard connector) enabling the formation of
(10baseT) a star network (the stations are connected to Transparent Factory hubs or switches)
64 stations maximum per network
Length 100 m max. between concentrator and terminal device
Module services and functions
TCP/IP services Uni-TE - client/server mode

Modbus - client/server mode

- synchronous requests of 256 bytes
I/O Scanning services Number of stations 64
User interface 2 K %MW as inputs / 2 K %MW as outputs in the “scanner” PLC

120 words maximum per “scanned” device
Common services - X-Way inter-network routing

- X-Way/Uni-TE routing
- module diagnostics
Integrated Web server function Services - alarm display (with Premium PLC only) (2)
(1) - graphic objects editor (2)
- system diagnostics
- access to PLC variables
- Web pages defined by the user (7.5 Mb available) (2)
- Java development kit
(1) An Internet browser (Internet Explorer version 4, Netscape version 4.05 or other) is required on the PC station, capable
of executing Java code.
(2) Services available on TSX ETY 5101 modules.
43601/12
References
Characteristics :
pages 43601/11 and 43601/12
Ethernet TCP/IP network modules

Description No. of modules Communication Integrated Web server Reference Weight
per PLC profile Diagnostic Web user page kg
Network 1 for 57-10/20 Ethway – – TSX ETY 110 0.370

modules for 3 for 57-30 Uni-TE on TCP/IP
Premium 4 for 57-40 Modbus on TCP/IP
PLCs
Yes 1.4 Mb TSX ETY 110 WS 0.370

available (1)
TSX ETY 110/110 WS
Uni-TE on TCP/IP Yes – TSX ETY 410 0.340

Modbus on TCP/IP
I/O Scanning
Yes 7.5 Mb TSX ETY 5101 0.340

available (1)
TSX ETY 410/5101
Description Use Supplied with Reference Weight

kg
Network Extension Drivers for TSX ETH PC 101M 0.720

module for slot DOS 6, OS/2 2.2,
ISA bus Short format Windows 95
PC compatible and Windows NT
TSX ETH PC 101M
PC drivers Ethway protocol Drivers for TLX CD DRV M –

and Uni-TE Windows 98/2000
on TCP/IP (also includes the
OS/2 2.2, Windows 95
and Windows NT drivers)
Accessories and connection cables

Description Reference Weight
(2) kg
For 10baseT interface (RJ45) See page 48190/7 –
For 10base5 interface (AUI) See page 43616/3 –
(1) Supplied with a CD-ROM including the FactoryCast configuration software for the integrated Web server function and
documentation in English.
43601/13
Ethernet TCP/IP network,
connection by 10baseT/100baseTX interface
References :
page 48190/7 Presentation
Characteristics :
pages 48190/3 to 48190/6
Presentation
As part of its Transparent Factory family of products, Schneider Electric offers a range of industrially hardened network
hubs, switches, transceivers, bridges, and cables. These Ethernet-standard communication components enable you to
integrate Ethernet solutions from the device level to the control network, and beyond to the corporate intranet. Each
product in the Ethernet cabling system is designed with compliance to Ethernet standards, and with third-party
compatibility in mind.
i Transparent Factory Hubs connect segments to supply shared communication among PLCs. TF Hubs are low-cost
solutions which enable communications with devices, such as Momentum I/O, to Ethernet networks.
i Transparent Factory Switches segment the application in different zones, groups, or cells/machines. The proper
placement of switches can increase network performance by relieving network congestion. TF switches implement
SNMP protocol, allowing standard network management tools to monitor and diagnose the network, and thus are a key
architectural component for real-time and deterministic network communication.
i Transparent Factory Transceivers provide connections to fiber optic networks in order to secure transmissions in
areas of high electromagnetic interference. The use of multiple transceivers enables long distances between islands.
i Transparent Factory Bridges enable Modbus to Ethernet and Modbus Plus to Ethernet communications, with multiple
ports allowing flexibility among network components.
i Transparent Factory Cables connect each device (such as PLC, I/O, PC, etc.) to the attached hub, switch,
transceiver, patch panel, or to cascade hubs and switches. TF cables are available in fiber optic and twisted pair
options, with a wide variety of connectors and cable lengths.
200 Mbps full duplex redundant fibre optic ring
Switch Switch Switch

Hub
Transceiver
Optical fibre
Hub Premium
Transceiver Quantum
Fibre optic loop

Hub Hub
Hub
Quantum Magelis Altivar Momentum I/O
All the TF components of the Ethernet wiring system are designed to operate in severe environments. TF switches and
TF hubs include mechanisms designed to ensure high levels of resilience. With their open-ended redundant functions,
from a single ring structure to a double ring structure, it is easy to create a fault-tolerant Ethernet network which meets
the specific demands of your industrial environment.
48190/2
Characteristics
References :
page 48190/7
Characteristics of TF hubs
Mechanical characteristics
Models 499 NEH 004 10 499 NEH 041 00 499 NOH 005 10
Operating temperature °C 0 to 60
Relative humidity 10…90% (without condensation)
Dimensions L x H x D mm 40 x 125 x 80 80 x 140 x 80
Degree of protection IP 30
Approvals and conformity UL, CE, CUL 1950, FCC part B, CSA 22-2.142, CSA 22-2.213M class 1 Div. 2
(certification pending)
Models 499 NEH 004 10 499 NEH 041 00 499 NOH 005 10
Types Ethernet 10 Mbps Ethernet 100 Mbps Ethernet 10 Mbps
Interfaces 4 10baseT ports with 4 100baseTX ports with - 3 10baseT ports with
RJ45 shielded connectors RJ45 shielded connectors RJ45 shielded connectors
- 2 10baseFL ports with
BFOC connectors
Medium Twisted pair cables Twisted pair cables or

redundant fibre optic ring
Connectors 1 x 5-way
Operating voltage cV 18…32, safety low voltage 9.6…57.6, safety low voltage 18…32, safety low voltage
Redundancy Power supply Power supply and fibre optic ring
Consumption at c 24 V mA 80 typical 200 typical 160 typical

130 max. 270 max. 350 max.
Line length m 100 max. with twisted pairs Fibre optic, 3100 max.(max 10,000)
Twisted pairs, 100 max.(max 330)
Number of TF hubs
in cascade 4 max. 11 max.
in a ring – 11 max.
Alarm relay Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (volt-free contact 1 A max.
at c 24 V)
Indicator lights Power supply, data exchange, collision and line status via communication port
48190/3
References :
page 48190/7
Characteristics of TF switches
Models 499 NES 071 00 499 NOS 071 00
Dimensions L x H x D mm 105 x 130 x 105
Models 499 NES 071 00 499 NOS 071 00
Types Ethernet 10 Mbps and Ethernet 100 Mbps
Interfaces - 5 10baseT/100baseTX ports with shielded - 5 10baseT/100baseTX ports with shielded

RJ45 connectors RJ45 connectors
- 2 100baseTX ports with RJ45 connectors - 2 100baseFX ports with SC connectors
Medium Twisted pair cables Twisted pair cables or redundant fibre optic
ring
Operating voltage cV 18…32, safety low voltage
Redundancy - Power supply

- Ring structure and/or twisted pair
- Switching time < 0.3 s
- Redundancy manager
Consumption at c 24 V mA 800 max.
Line length m 100 max. with twisted pairs Fibre optic, 3100 max.
Twisted pairs, 100 max.
Number of TF switches
in cascade 50 max.
in a ring 4 max. at 10 Mbps

50 max. at 100 Mbps
Alarm relay Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (volt-free contact 1 A max.
at c 24 V)
48190/4
References :
page 48190/7
Characteristics of TF transceivers
Models 499 NTR 000 10 499 NTR 001 00
Dimensions L x H x D mm 40 x 140 x 80
Models 499 NTR 000 10 499 NTR 001 00
Types Ethernet 10 Mbps Ethernet 100 Mbps
Interfaces - 1 10baseT port with RJ45 shielded connector - 1 100baseTX port with RJ45 shielded
- 1 10baseFL port with BFOC connector connectors
- 1 100baseFX port with SC connectors
Medium Twisted pair cables or fibre optic cable
Operating voltage cV 18…32, safety low voltage 9.6…57.6, safety low voltage
Redundancy Power supply
Consumption at c 24 V mA 80 typical 160 typical

100 max. 190 max.
Line length m Twisted pair 100 max.

Fibre optic 62.5/125 µm, 3100 max.
Max. link attenuation dB 11 with fibre optic cable 50/125 µm

14 with fibre optic cable 62.5/125 µm
48190/5
References :
page 48190/7
Characteristics of TF bridges
Types of bridge 174 CEV 200 30 174 CEV 300 10
Network interconnection Modbus Plus/Ethernet Modbus/Ethernet
Operating voltage V c 110…120 automatic detection Nominal a 12…24

Limit a 9…30
Ethernet ports - 1 Ethernet 10baseT (RJ45 type), 10base2 1 RJ45 port for 10baseT cable
(BNC type), 10base5 (AUI type)
- 1 Modbus Plus double/single pair cable
Mounting Vertical panel or horizontal plane On DIN rail
Dimensions L x H x D mm 122 x 229 x 248 35 x 95 x 60
Characteristics of electrical cables
Types of cable 499 NTW 000 ii 499 NTC 000 ii
Type Shielded twisted pair cables Crossed shielded twisted pair cables
Length m 2, 5, 12, 40 or 80 5, 15, 40 or 80
Preformed connectors Type RJ45 (at each end)
Approvals and conformity UL, CSA 22-1 and NFPA 70 approval indicated by the letter U at the end of the reference (for example :
490 NTW 000 40U) ;
Category 5 of the EIA/TIA-568 international wiring standard, class D of IEC 11801/EN50173 ;
Fireproof (LSZH), product flame-retarded according to NFC32 070 #1 (C2) and IEC 322/1
Characteristics of fibre optic cables
Types of cable 490 NOC 000 05 490 NOT 000 05 490 NOR 000 05
Type Standard glass fibre optic
Length m 5
Preformed connectors MT/RJ-SC duplex MT/RJ-ST MT/RJ-MT/RJ
Susceptibility to radiation No radiation along the cable length
48190/6
References
Characteristics :
pages 48190/3 to 48190/6
Description Type of Ethernet network Available ports Reference Weight

kg
TF hubs 10 Mbps 4 10baseT ports 499 NEH 004 10 0.520
3 10baseT ports 499 NOH 005 10 0.900

2 10baseFL ports
100 Mbps 4 100baseTX ports 499 NEH 041 00 0.520

499 NEH 004 10
TF switches 10/100 Mbps 5 10baseT/100baseTX ports 499 NES 071 00 1.450
2 100baseTX ports
5 100baseTX ports 499 NOS 071 00 1.450

2 100baseFX ports
TF transceivers 10 Mbps 1 10baseT port 499 NTR 000 10 0.520

1 10baseFL port
100 Mbps 1 100baseTX port 499 NTR 001 00 0.520

1 100baseFX port
499 NOH 005 10
Description Type of Ethernet ports Reference Weight
interconnection available kg
TF bridges Modbus Plus/Ethernet 1 10baseT (RJ 45 type) 174 CEV 200 30 4.260
(Modbus single/ or 10base2 (BNC type)
double pair) or 10base5 (AUI type) port
Modbus/Ethernet 1 10baseT port (RJ 45 type) 174 CEV 300 10 0.500
Connection cables
Description Preformed at Length Reference Weight
499 NEH 041 00 each end kg
Shielded RJ45 type connector 2m 490 NTW 000 02 –

twisted pair
cables 5m 490 NTW 000 05 –
12 m 490 NTW 000 12 –
40 m 490 NTW 000 40 –
80 m 490 NTW 000 80 –
Crossed RJ45 connector 5m 490 NTC 000 05 –

499 NES 071 00 shielded
twisted pair 15 m 490 NTC 000 15 –
cables
40 m 490 NTC 000 40 –
80 m 490 NTC 000 80 –
Fibre optic MT/RJ-SC duplex 5m 490 NOC 000 05 –

cables connector
MT/RJ-ST 5m 490 NOT 000 05 –

connector
MT/RJ-MT/RJ 5m 490 NOR 000 05 –

connector
174 CEV 300 10
Description Use Ethernet ports available Reference Weight
kg
Mini transceiver For connecting 1 10base5 port (AUI type) TSX ETH NTR1 –
a 10base5 1 10baseT port (RJ45 type)
interface device (1)
to a 10baseT
Ethernet network segment
(twisted pair)
(1) For example, a TSX Series 7 PLC equipped with a TSX ETH 107 Ethernet module.
48190/7
Ethernet TCP/IP network, connection by 10base5 interface (AUI)
Wiring system
References :
page 43616/3
Wiring system
TSX ETY 110/110 WS modules can take an AUI connector which enables direct connection to an Ethernet 10base5
segment with the accessories and cables described below.
Connection by 10base5 interface (AUI)
7 5 1 5 6 5 5 4 5
TSX ETY 110/110WS
7 5 1 5 4 5 5 5
TSX ETY 410/5101
8
3
TSX ETY 110/110WS
1 TSX ETH CA ii0 trunk cable, triaxial cable (50 Ω coaxial with shielding) 1 male N type connector to be fitted to each end
TSX ETH CD 025 trunk cable, triaxial cable equipped with N type connectors, length 2.5 m. Corresponds to minimum
length between 2 TSX ETH ACC 2 transceivers
2 TSX ETY CB 0ii drop cable, 4 shielded twisted pair cable, AUI interface (a straight connector and an elbow connector)
3 TSX ETY CC 0ii drop cable, 4 shielded twisted pair cable, AUI interface (two straight connectors)
4 TSX ETH ACC 2 transceiver, AUI interface. Enables a device to be connected to the Ethway network (obligatory when
connecting two modules in point-to-point)
5 TSX ETH ACC 3 male N type connector for trunk cable
6 TSX ETH ACC 4 female/female adaptor for extension of trunk cable
7 TSX ETH ACC 5 (50 Ω) line terminator (includes an isolated terminator and a non isolated terminator which must be
connected to the installation grounding network. One assembly per segment is required)
Mixed 10base5 (AUI) / 10baseT (RJ45) connection
8 Hubs with 8 RJ45 ports /1 AUI port. TSX ETH 410/5101 Ethernet modules have only one RJ45 connector. They can,
however, be connected to an Ethernet 10base5 network (twisted pair) by using the hub accessory TSX ETH NEH 8
which has eight 10baseT ports (RJ45) and one 10base5 port (AUI) connected to a transceiver 2 TSX ETH ACC 2.
43616/2
Ethernet TCP/IP network, connection by 10base5 interface (AUI)
References
AUI interface accessories for connecting to the Ethernet network

Description Use Order in Unit Weight
multiples of reference kg
Ethernet Access point to 1 TSX ETH ACC 2 0.765

transceiver any network
TSX ETH ACC 2 Hub Can be used to 1 TSX ETH NEH 8 –

connect 8
twisted pair (RJ45)
Ethernet stations
on a 10base5 (AUI) network
Connector for Must be fitted to 10 TSX ETH ACC 3 0.050

trunk cable both ends of cable
segment on
trunk cables
Female/female Extension of 10 TSX ETH ACC 4 0.050

adaptor 2 cable segments
on trunk cable
Line terminator Impedance 1 TSX ETH ACC 5 0.070

kit adaptor
Ethernet network connecting cables

Description Connectors Length Reference Weight
kg
Trunk cables 2 type N 2.5 m TSX ETH CD 025 0.840

(radius curvature
min. 500 mm)
To be equipped with 23.4 m TSX ETH CA 020 1.650

2 TSX ETH ACC 3
male N type
connectors
117 m TSX ETH CA 100 5.600
210.6 m TSX ETH CA 200 8.300
Drop cables 15-way, SUB-D 5m TSX ETY CB 005 0.510

(radius curvature 1 straight, 1 elbow
min. 65 mm) (module side)
10 m TSX ETY CB 010 0.980
20 m TSX ETY CB 020 1.820
15-way, SUB-D 5m TSX ETH CC 005 0.510

2 straight
(for FTX 517
or PC compatible 10 m TSX ETH CC 010 0.980
connection)
20 m TSX ETH CC 020 1.820
Description Use Reference Weight

(1) kg
Ethernet 10base5 Fitting TSX ETH ACC 3 TSX ETH ACC 10M 4.800
installation kit on trunk cable
(1) The letter M at the end of a reference indicates that the product is supplied with documentation in English and in French.
43616/3
Fipway network
Presentation, performance
References :
page 43592/3
Presentation
The Fipway network is an open local area network for communication between the various Micro, Premium and
TSX Series 7 PLCs using the X-Way services. Communication conforms to the FIP standard with access via a bus
arbitrator.
Micro (TSX 37-21/22) and Premium PLCs can be connected to a Fipway network using a Fipway PCMCIA card which
is inserted in each processor or into the TSX SCY 21601 (Premium) communication module. Supported X-Way services
(see pages 43301/3 to 43301/5) are:
i Uni-TE services
i Distributed database (COM) or Shared Table
i Telegram (service only available when the PCMCIA card is inserted in the processor)
i Application-to-application communication
FT 2100
Ethernet TCP/IP
Fipway Premium
TSX 17-20
Bus X Micro
TSX 7
Premium
For characteristics, Fipway network wiring system and connection accessories, see pages 43597/2 to 43597/5.
Performance
The operating principle of a Fipway network gives ensured, constant network cycle times whatever the traffic and number
of stations (2 to 64). This enables the Fipway network to be updated (addition or removal of stations) without changing
the performance.
Maximum transmission time

i Telegram (TLG) : priority application messages are transmitted in less than 10 ms (one telegram per station).
i Common words (COM) : the database of common words is updated every 40 ms.
i Shared Table : the exchange table is updated every 40 ms.
i Uni-TE message handling system : Uni-TE or standard application-to-application messages are normally transmitted
in less than 80 ms (40 ms for stations with addresses below 32). Where there is a large amount of traffic, some
messages can wait for several cycles before being transmitted. The network characteristics enable a maximum of 210
messages of 128 bytes per second to be transmitted.
The performance can be improved by inhibiting the Telegram service in the network.
With such network characteristics, the response time at

application level depends almost exclusively on the
Event Report
processing capacity of the devices which are connected.
For example, the remote loading of a 50 K word program
Device 1 CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1 takes less than two minutes on a network with normal load.
CT1 = Cycle time of device 1

Fipway network NCT NCT NCT = Cycle time of Fipway network
CT2 = Cycle time of device 2
Device 2 CT2 CT2
The response time must be evaluated by the designer of
each application in relation to the devices connected.
Action The processing time of a device can vary from one to two
cycle times as a function of asynchronous operation.
43592/2
Fipway network
Devices which can be connected, references
Micro/Premium PLCs
Micro/Premium PLCs have a slot on the processor for a type III PCMCIA communication card. This can be fitted with the
TSX FPP 20 fipway network connection card, which is also inserted into the TSX SCY 21601 communication module slot.
The TSX FPP 20 card comprises :

1 Protective cover
2 Removable cover with fixing screws for access to the
20-way miniature connector
3 3 Two indicator lamps :
- ERR lamp : card fault, link fault
- COM lamp : data transmission or reception
4 Connector to be ordered separately :
4 TSX FP CG 010/030, 1 or 3 m cable for connection to the
TSX FP ACC 3/ACC 4 T-junction box (on 9-way SUB-D
2 connector).
1
TSX 7 PLCs FT 2100 terminals, PC compatibles Magelis dialogue terminals
Connection via Fipio/Fipway Equipped with : Connection via the TSX FPP 20
integrated link or via the - TSX FPP 20 for FT 2100 (PCMCIA PCMCIA card.
TSX FPM 100 module of TSX/PMX card)
model 40 PLCs. - TSX FPC 10M for PC compatible
Connection via the TSX FPG 10 (ISA bus),
module of TSX 17-20 micro-PLCs. they access all devices in the
X-Way architecture. The various
X-Way drivers are available on
CD-ROM TLX CD DRV M.
References
Description Number per Use Composition Reference Weight
Premium
PLC (1) kg
Fipway card 1 with 57-10 Type III slot on 1 type III TSX FPP 20 0.110
1 with 57-20 - Micro/Premium PCMCIA
3 with 57-30 processor card
4 with 57-40 - TPCX 57-10/30
coprocessor
- TSX SCY 21601 module
TSX FPP 20
Communication See page For Premium PLC – TSX SCY 21601 0.360
module 43592/3 - 1 isolated 2-wire RS 485
integrated channel
(Half-duplex)
- 1 slot for type III
PCMCIA card
Set of X-Way Includes all X-Way drivers : 1 CD-ROM TLX CD DRV M –

drivers - Uni-Telway/Fipway/Fipio/Ethway under
for Windows 3.1/95/98/NT/2000
PC compatible - XIP/ISAway under DOS and
Windows 3.1/95/98/NT/2000
TSX SCY 21601 - Uni-Telway for TSX SCP 114 card
under Windows 95/98/NT/2000
- Terminal port under OS/2
Connection cables and accessories (2)

Description Use Length Reference Weight
From To kg
Cables for TSX FPP 20 TSX FP ACC 4 1m TSX FP CG 010 0.210

PCMCIA card T-junction (9-way
(miniature SUB-D connector) 3m TSX FP CG 030 0,410
connector)
TSX FP CG 010/030 (1) Product supplied with bilingual Quick Reference Guide : English and French.
(2) For other Fipway network accessories and connection cables, see pages 43597/6 and 43597/7.
43592/3
Modbus Plus network
Characteristics :
page 43599/3 Presentation
Connections :
page 43599/4
References :
page 43599/5
Presentation
The Modbus Plus network is a high-performance industrial local network which can respond to Client/Server type
extended architectures, combining a high data rate (1 Mbps), simple and economical transmission support and several
message handling services.
Premium
3
Ethernet TCP/IP or Fipway
Premium
1
2 Quantum
3 XBT-F
Momentum
Modbus Plus
Modbus Plus
bridge
Modbus Plus
Premium Micro
Gateway
2
1
Quantum Modbus
4
Modbus device
The main data exchange functions between all devices connected to the network are :
i The message exchange function according to the Modbus protocol
i The “global database” function (Shared Table service, periodic, controlled by the application : a station with the token
can send 32 words to a maximum of 63 other stations connected on the network)
1 The Premium (or Micro) client communicates with the Quantum server on the Modbus Plus network.
2 The Quantum client communicates with the Premium server on the Modbus Plus network via MSTR function blocks.
3 A Premium (or Micro) client connected to the Ethernet TCP/IP or Fipway network can communicate in read/write mode
with a Modbus Plus station (the Premium PLC therefore acts as a gateway).
4 A Premium (or Micro) client connected to the Modbus Plus network can access a remote station via the Modbus Plus/
Modbus gateway.
43599/2
Modbus Plus network
Description, characteristics
Connections :
page 43599/4
References :
page 43599/5
Description
Premium/Micro PLCs are connected to the Modbus Plus network using a TSX MBP 100 type III PCMCIA card. This card
is installed in the slot reserved for processors or coprocessors :
1 A host slot on processors or coprocessors
2 A protective cover with fixing screw (access to miniature

20-way connector)
3 A removable cover
4 Two indicator lamps :

- ERR : card or link fault
1 - COM : activity on the line
Connectors to be ordered separately :

4 TSX MBP CE 0ii tap-off cables
2 3
Characteristics
Structure
Type Industrial bus
Physical interface RS 485
Method of access Token bus
Transmission
Mode Synchronous HDLC
Data rate 1 Mbps
Medium Twisted pair, fibre optic
Configuration
Number of devices 64 maximum on 1800 m twisted pair, 32 per segment
Number of addresses 64 devices maximum per segment
Length of bus 450 m maximum per segment, 1800 m maximum with 3 repeaters
Number of segments Cascaded : 5 maximum using Modbus Plus BP85 bridges
Services
Global - 4096 byte common database
database - cyclical exchange of 32 broadcast words
“Peer to peer” dialogue Read/write services (amount of requests : 100 registers per transaction)
Peer Cop Cyclical exchange service (on Premium only) : 500 words per station (broadcast or point-to-point)
43599/3
Modbus Plus network
Connections
Characteristics :
page 43599/3
References :
page 43599/5
Wiring system
11 5 3 5 6 5
4
8 9
7 7 7
12
10
1 2
1 TSX MBP 100 : Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, for type III processor slot on Micro or Premium platforms.
2 170 PNT 110 20 : communication module for Momentum I/O base unit.
3 i : trunk cable, shielded twisted pair with shielding drain (flying leads). In lengths of 30, 150, 300, 450
490 NAA 271 0i
or 1500 m.
4 170 MCI 020/021 i i : drop cable equipped at each end with an RJ 45 connector (interface baseT). In lengths of 0.25,
0.75, 3 or 10 m.
5 990 NAD 230 00 : IP 20 local site tap, provides a tap link from the trunk cable for connecting 1 device (connection
of conductors requires wiring tool 043 509 383).
6 990 NAD 230 10 : IP 65 zamac local site tap, provides a tap link from the trunk cable for connecting 1 device (screw
terminal connection). It also has an RJ 45 connector for connecting a programming and maintenance terminal.
7 170 XTS 020 00 : IP 20 tee, provides a tap link from the Modbus Plus cable (cable with connectors at each end of
an RJ 45 connector). It has a 9-way SUB-D connector for connecting the device.
8 TSX MBP CE 030/060 : drop cable for Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, equipped on the PCMCIA side with a 20-way
miniature connector and with flying leads on the 990 NAD 230 00/010 local site tap side. In lengths of 3 or 6 m.
9 990 NAD 211 10/30 : drop cable equipped on the device side with a 9-way SUB-D connector and with flying leads
on the 990 NAD 230 00/010 local site tap side. In lengths of 2, 4 or 6 m.
10 TSX MBP CE 002 : drop cable for Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, equipped on the PCMCIA side with a 20-way miniature
connector and on the network side with a 9-way SUB-D connector. Can be used as an extension for cable 990 NAD
211 10/30. In lengths of 0.2 m.
11 AS MBKT 185 : set of 2 line terminators (impedance adaptor) for IP 20 local site tap 990 NAD 230 00, to be placed
at each end of the segment. 990 NAD 230 11 : set of 2 line terminators (impedance adaptor) for IP 65 local site tap
990 NAD 230 10, to be placed at each end of the segment.
12 170 XTS 021 00 : set of 2 line terminators (impedance adaptor) for tee 170 XTS 020 00, to be placed at each end
of the segment.
43599/4
Modbus Plus network
References
Characteristics :
page 43599/3
Connections :
page 43599/4
References
Description Number per Use Ref. Compo- Reference Weight
PLC no. sition (1) kg
Modbus Plus 1 with Micro Type III slot on 1 1 type III TSX MBP 100 0.110
PCMCIA card TSX 37-21/22 - TSX 37-21/22 PLC PCMCIA
1 with - TSX 57-10/20/30/40 card
Premium processor
TSX/PCX - T PCX 57-20/30
TSX MBP 100 coprocessor
Description Connection Ref. Reference Weight
no. (1) kg
Communication module for Modbus Plus network 2 170 PNT 110 20 0.110
Momentum I/O base units on Momentum I/O
base units
Connection accessories (2)

Description Use Ref. Reference Weight
170 PNT 110 20
no. kg
Modbus Plus IP 20 tap for tap link 5 990 NAD 230 00 0.230
local site connection (tee)
taps
IP 65 tap for tap link 6 990 NAD 230 10 0.650
connection (tee), supports
1 RJ 45 connector on front panel
IP 20 tee with 2 RJ 45 connectors 7 170 XTS 020 00 0.260

for Modbus Plus cable
and 1 9-way SUB-D connector
for tap link devices
Line 2 impedance adaptors for local site 11 AS MBKT 185 –

terminators tap (IP 20) 990 NAD 230 00
(sold in lots of 2)
2 impedance adaptors for local site 11 990 NAD 230 11 –
tap (IP 65) 990 NAD 230 10
2 impedance adaptors for tee 12 170 XTS 021 00 –

(IP 20) 170 XTS 020 00
Fixing kit for For fixing on DIN rail for – 990 NAD 230 12 –
IP 65 local tap 990 NAD 230 10
site tap
Wiring For fitting trunk cables and – 043 509 383 –

tool drop cables in local site tap
Connecting cables (2)

Description Use Ref. Length Reference Weight
From To kg
Modbus Plus Local site tap Local site tap 3 30 m 490 NAA 271 01 –
trunk 990 NAD 230 00/10 150 m 490 NAA 271 02 –
cables 300 m 490 NAA 271 03 –
450 m 490 NAA 271 04 –
1500 m 490 NAA 271 06 –
Drop IP 20 IP 20 tee 4 0.25 m 170 MCI 020 10 –

cables tee 170 XTS 020 00 1m 170 MCI 020 36 –
170 XTS 020 00 3m 170 MCI 021 20 –
10 m 170 MCI 020 80 –
TSX MBP 100 Drop cable 10 0.2 m TSX MBP CE 002 –

PCMCIA card with male 9-way
(miniature SUB-D connector
connector)
Local site tap 8 3m TSX MBP CE 030 0.340
TSX MBP CE 030/060 990 NAD 230 00/10 6m TSX MBP CE 060 0.530
Communication Junction box 9 2.4 m 990 NAD 211 10 0.530

module for 990 NAD 230 00/10
Momentum 6m 990 NAD 211 30 0.530
I/O sub-bases
(1) Product supplied with bilingual Quick Reference Guide : English and French.
(2) For other Modbus Plus network connecting cables and accessories, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
43599/5
Fipio bus manager function
Presentation, connectable devices
References :
page 43589/5
Presentation
Premium
Magelis/
FT 2100 CCX17 Third-party
products
Momentum
TBX
Fipio
AS-i
Micro Premium gateway
Agent ATV
Dust and damp proof AS-i
TBX
The Fipio fieldbus is a standard means of communication between different control system components. It enables
127 devices to be connected at the connection point integrated in the processor. This fieldbus conforms to the WorldFip
standard based on producer/consumer mechanisms. It is designed for remote location of l/O up to 15 km away and
enables a third-party Schneider Alliances device to be installed.
The bus arbitrator (manager) can be a Premium PLC (TSX, PMX or PCX) or TSX/PMX model 40 or April 5000.
For characteristics, Fipio bus wiring system and connection accessories, see pages 43597/2 to 43590/3.
Connectable devices
Schneider Electric devices which can be connected on the Fipio bus include :
i Micro/Premium Agent function PLCs (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 10 card version 1.8 minimum)
i CCX 17 operator panel (version ≥ 2.4 ) (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 10 card version 1.8 minimum)
i Magelis XBT-F graphic screen terminal (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 10 card version 1.8 minimum) and Magelis TXBT-F
graphic station via PCMCIA TSX FPP 20 card
i Momentum distributed discrete, analogue or application-specific l/O (with 170 FNT 110 01 communication module V1.0
minimum)
i TBX distributed discrete (1) or analogue l/O (IP 20) with TBX LEP 030 communication module version ≥ 1.2
i TBX distributed discrete dust and damp proof l/O (IP 65) (2)
i ATV-16/58/66 variable speed drives
i TBX SAP 10 Fipio/AS-i gateway (2)
i FT 2100 terminal (via TSX FPP 20 card)
Schneider Alliances partner products (see below).
Schneider Alliances : Fipio bus openness
Schneider Alliances is an industrial and commercial

programme of cooperation between Schneider Electric
and its partners, offering automation products (hardware
and software), system integration and other services to
complement the Schneider Electric offer.
The programme was established to improve the connection of devices from other control system suppliers on the Fipio
bus. Connection of a wide variety of different brands of sensors and actuators offers the end user a choice of global,
high-performance and low-cost control system solutions.
Schneider Electric has integrated specific WorldFip mechanisms into its PLCs and software in order to make them
accessible to any automation system engineer without any particular expertise in this area. Schneider Electric products
and partner products connected on Fipio then automatically reap the following benefits : simplified description of
architectures and configuration of equipment, and also simple control system development and programming, operation
and maintenance.
Within the Schneider Alliances programme, Schneider Electric has developed a range of products and services destined
to facilitate the connection and integration of products and partner equipment on Fipio. Please consult our specialist
catalogue and the Schneider Alliances documentation (see pages 43614/2 to 43614/11).
(1) WorldFip mode is only supported by TBX discrete I/O modules version ≥ 1.4. (TBX LEP 020).
(2) WorldFip mode is only supported by modules version ≥ 2.0.
43589/2
Description, software setup
References :
page 43589/5
Description
TSX P57 i53 M (1) processors and the T PCX P57 353
coprocessor have on the front panel :
1 A 9-way SUB-D connector for connection to the bus via

the TSX FP ACC 2/12 connector.
(1) The TSX P57 153M processor is a single format module.
Software setup
Configuration
1 PL7 Junior/Pro software offer configuration screens which

enable the declaration and immediate and intuitive
configuration of the remote devices connected on the Fipio
bus.
2
1 Each circle represents one connection point.
2 Clicking on a circle accesses the catalogue of devices

which can be connected.
3 Once confirmed, the Fipio bus configuration will appear.
Processors fitted with the integrated Fipio link can manage

3 128 connection points on the bus (addresses 0 to 127).
See page 43589/4 for the table detailing limitations according
to processor and type of device.
Diagnostics
1 The diagnostic functions of the Fipio bus, integrated in the

PL7 Junior/Pro software, very quickly identify a fault on :
i The bus medium
i Remote devices
1 A graphic representation of the architecture displays the

2 defective devices in red.
2 More detailed diagnostics can be accessed by double-

clicking.
3 In addition, special screens display an overview of all the

3
faults appearing on the bus or on any device. On request,
these faults can be recorded for later analysis.
43589/3
Maximum configuration
References :
page 43589/5
Maximum configuration
The Fipio bus enables a maximum of 128 devices to be connected. This limit can, in certain cases, be restricted depending
on the type of bus manager processor and on the devices which are connected on the bus.
The maximum number of devices which can be connected depends on :
i The maximum size of memory space available for Fipio data which is 95744 bytes for TSX P57 153/253/353 processors
and the T PCX 57 353 coprocessor and 214528 bytes for the TSX P 57-453 processors.
i The total number of bytes consumed by each device (see table below).
Product family References Base Extension Maximum number of connection

size size points
(bytes) (bytes)
TSX P57
153M 253/353M 453M
Max. number (1) 63 127 127

of Fipio devices
ATV-16/58/66 All 1952 48 48 62
CCX 17 All 1952 4 4 4
Momentum 170 ADIiii/ADOiii 832 62 98 98

ADM 350 10/11 832 62 98 98
ADM 390 30/690 51/370 10 832 62 98 98
ARM 370 30/390 10 62 98 98
AMM 090 00/AAI 030 00, 1808 52 52 98
AAO 120 00/921 00
ANR 120 90 62 98 98
AAI 520 40 52 52 98
AAI 140 00 2304 40 40 92
TBX (2) (3) AES 200/ASS 400/AMS 620 (4) 1332 272 62 70 126
(for 2 or 4 channels)
AMS 620 (4) 1332 528 59 59 126

(for 8 channels)
50 50 114
(for 10 or 12 channels)
CEP 1622/CSP 1622/CSP 1625 1152 31 31 31
DES iii/DMS iii/DSS iii (5) 1152 144 62 81 126
SAP 10 1808 52 52 117
IP 67 TSX EEF 08D2/EEF 16D2 832 62 98 98

I/O
ESF 08T22/EMF 16DT2 1808 52 52 98
Micro/Premium TSX FPP 10 1424 62 62 62

Agent
FipConnect profile FRD C2 832 62 113 126

FSD C8 896 62 105 126
FSD C8P 1808 52 52 117
FSD M8 1040 62 90 126
FSD M8P 1952 48 48 109
FED C32 1280 62 73 126
FED C32P 2304 40 40 92
FED M32 1424 62 66 126
FED M32P 2448 38 38 87
Not applicable
(1) Address 63 is reserved for the programming and diagnostic terminal.

(2) Sharing the same device for several PL7 tasks is not allowed.
(3) Do not mix discrete and analogue base units on the same Fipio connection point.
(4) The number of analogue channels for TBX base units of the same type (AES, ASS or AMS) is limited to 1008.
(5) The number of channels for TBX base units of the same type (DES, DMS or DSS) is limited to 2048.
43589/4
Application services, references
When using the bus manager function, the application services supported by the Premium PLCs are :
i Remote l/O
Remote l/O modules are addressed by the PL7 application program as “In rack” l/O, with which they can of course
coexist. This service enables the exchange of l/O status variables and output command variables. These exchanges
are carried out in a cyclical and deterministic manner and without intervention from the application program.
The manager also manages remote devices (configuration) in an aperiodic manner, without intervention from the
application program.
i Uni-TE service
X-Way industrial message handling service suitable for MMI, diagnostics and control functions (requests of 128 bytes
maximum).
i Application-to-application service
This service consists of sending tables between 2 devices under the control of their respective application programs
(requests of 128 bytes maximum).
i Terminal transparency
Terminals connected on a higher level X-way network or on the manager PLC terminal port communicate with the
devices on the bus. This is also the case when the terminal is connected at the priority address 63.
Processors and coprocessor

Type and Memory capacity I/O Control Bus/network Reference Weight
max. no. Integrated PCMCIA capacity channel module (1)
of racks (2) in processor extension (3) capacity capacity kg
TSX 57-10 32 64 512 discr. 0 1 integ. Fipio TSX P57 153M 0.520
4 racks Kwords Kwords 24 analog. 1 network
maximum 8 app-spec. 2 AS-i bus
channels 0 third-party bus
TSX 57-20 64 160 1024 discr. 10 1 integ. Fipio TSX P57 253M 0.380
TSX P57 153M TSX 57-30 80 384 1024 discr. 15 1 integ. Fipio TSX P57 353M 0.380
TSX 57-40 96/176 512 2048 discr. 20 1 integ. Fipio TSX P57 453M 0.520
(4) maximum 64 app-spec. 8 AS-i bus
PCX 57-30 80/96 160 1024 discr. 15 1 integ. Fipio T PCX 57 353M 0.320
(4) maximum 32 app-spec. 8 AS-i bus
TSX P57 253/353/453M Accessories and connecting cables (5)

Description Use Material Reference Weight
From To kg
Female Processors and – Polycarbonate TSX FP ACC 12 0.040

connectors coprocessors with black (IP 20)
(9-way Fipio integrated link
SUB-D)
Zamac TSX FP ACC 2 0.080
(1) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide (processors and discrete I/O) : English, French, German,
T PCX 57 353M Spanish and Italian.
(2) Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks (4, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 12 EX rack (12 slots) is the
same as using 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots.
(3) Cumulative maximum values : the I/O on Fipio are not counted.
(4) The second value corresponds to the capacity of the integrated RAM when the application program is supported by
the extension memory.
TSX FP ACC 12 (5) For other accessories and Fipio bus connecting cables, see pages 43597/6 and 43590/3.
43589/5
Fipio bus Agent function
Presentation, application services, software setup
References :
page 43593/3
Presentation
April 5000
TSX Series 7
Premium
Momentum Micro CCX 17
Fipio bus
Premium
Intelligent XAL control

sensors station
As-i bus
Motor
starter
T
Micro (TSX 37-21/22) or Premium PLCs, fitted with a TSX FPP 10 PCMCIA card on their integrated communication
channel, are agents on the Fipio bus. The bus manager is a TSX P 57 153/253/353/453, T PCX 57 203/353, TSX Series 7
model 40 or April 5000 PLC.
The Fipio bus enables I/O to be remotely located close to the devices to be controlled (Momentum, Altivar, etc). The Agent
function enables offline processing, by locating a Micro PLC close to the machine.
In addition to the standard Fipio services (see pages 43301/3 to 43301/5), Micro (TSX 37-21/22) and Premium PLCs allow
exchanges of input and output variables with the bus manager PLC. These exchanges are performed cyclically,
automatically and without the involvement of the application program at the same rate as the task for which the agent PLC
has been configured.
For characteristics, Fipio bus wiring system and connection accessories, see pages 43597/2 to 43597/7.
The application services supported by Micro (TSX 37-21/22) and Premium Agent function PLCs are :
i Uni-TE service, X-Way industrial message handling service suitable for operator dialogue, diagnostics and control
functions (requests of up to 128 bytes)
i Application-to-application communication service, which consists of the transmission of tables between 2 devices
controlled by their respective application programs (messages of up to 128 bytes)
i New periodic data exchange service for exchanging a 64 word table between the bus manager PLC and the Premium
Agent PLC
Software setup
Each Micro/Premium PLC Fipio Agent uses 64 %MW

consecutive internal words to exchange periodic data. The
first 32 words are reserved for sending data to the manager,
and the remaining 32 are reserved for receiving data from
the manager.
PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro application-specific screens allow

the configuration of the Fipio Agent PCMCIA card. This
consists of :
i Indicating the connection point number (1 to 127)
i Indicating the address at the beginning of the 64 %MW
word table reserved for sending data to and receiving
data from the manager
43593/2
Fipio bus Agent function
Description, references
Description
Micro (TSX 37-21/22)/Premium PLCs have a slot in the processor for a type III PCMCIA communication card. This can
be fitted with a TSX FPP 10 Fipio bus connection card.
The TSX FPP 10 card comprises :
1 A protective cover
3 2 A removable cover with fixing screws giving access to
the 20-way miniature connector

- ERR lamp: card fault, link fault
- COM lamp: transmission or reception of data
Connector to be ordered separately :
4 TSX FP CG 010/030, 1 or 3 m cable for connecting the

TSX FP ACC 4 tap junction (on 9-way SUB-D
1 2 4 connector)
References
Fipio bus connection component

kg
Fipio Agent 1 type III PCMCIA card TSX FPP 10 0.110

TSX FPP 10 function card (1) Version V1.8
Description Connection Reference Weight

(1) kg
Communication Fipio Bus 170 FNT 110 01 0.110

module for on Momentum I/O
Momentum I/O base units
base units
170 FNT 110 01
Fipio bus connection accessories (2)
kg
Insulated bus Trunk cable tap link, supports TSX FP ACC 3 0.090
cable connector 2 x 9-way female SUB-D connectors
(in black polycarbonate, (for TSX FP CG 010/030 PCMCIA card
IP 20) cable), for connection of TBX dust
and damp proof module a 24 V supply
TSX FP ACC 3
Dust and damp proof Trunk cable tap link TSX FP ACC 4 0.660
bus cable connector
Fipio bus connection cables (2)

From To kg
TSX FP ACC 4
Cables for TSX FPP 10 TSX FP ACC 4 1 m TSX FP CG 010 0.210
PCMCIA card card cable connector
(miniature (9-way SUB-D
connector) connector)
3m TSX FP CG 030 0.410
TSX FP CG 010/030
(1)The TSX FPP 10 card is only supported by Micro TSX 37-21/22/Premium processors. Product supplied with bilingual
Quick Reference Guide: English and French.
(2) For other Fipio bus accessories and connection cables, see pages 43597/6 and 43597/7.
43593/3
Fipio bus and Fipway network
Characteristics
References :
pages 43597/6 and 43597/7
Dimensions :
page 43597/7
Characteristics
The Fipio industrial fieldbus and Fipway local inter-PLC network are standard means of communication between various
control system components. They conform to the WorldFip standard.
Type of bus/network Fipio bus Fipway network
Structure Type Open industrial fieldbus conforming to WorldFip standard
Topology Devices linked by daisy-chaining or tap link connections
Maximum length 15 000 m 5000 m
Access method Producer/consumer principle Producer/consumer principle

Management by fixed arbitrator Management by automatically elected arbitrator
Transmission Mode Physical layer in baseband on shielded twisted pair, conforming to NF C 46-604 standard
Data rate 1 Mbps
Medium 150 Ω shielded twisted pair. 62.5/125 or 50/125 fibre optic cable using electrical/fibre optic repeaters
Configuration No. of devices

Per segment 32 connection points per segment 32 stations per segment
Maximum 128 on all segments 64 stations
Segments
Number Unlimited
Length 1000 m maximum for an electrical segment

3000 m for a fibre optic segment
Services COM (1) – Distributed database : 128 words maximum 0 or 4 %NWi

words for Micro and Premium stations with addresses
0 to 31
Shared Table – Shared table of internal words : 128 words maximum 1 to

(1) 32 %MWi words per Micro and Premium station with
addresses 0 to 31 (2)
I/O Periodic and deterministic exchanges of variables with –

exchanges discrete I/O of configured devices
Uni-TE Point-to-point requests with confirmation report : 128 bytes maximum, can be used by all devices connected
to the same X-Way architecture (access by the Client device to the Server device system functions)
Application-to- Point-to-point messages : 128 bytes maximum between 2 devices, can be used by all Micro/Premium/TSX Series 7 PLC
application devices.
Telegram – Point-to-point priority messages : 16 bytes maximum

between 2 Premium (3) or TSX Series 7 stations with
addresses 0 to 15
Security Control characters in each frame and acknowledgement of point-to-point messages conforming to standard
NF C 46-603
Surveillance Bus diagnostics accessible via FT 2100/FTX 517 Network diagnostics accessible via FT 2100/FTX 517
terminal equipped with PL7 or SYSDIAG software terminal equipped with NETDIAG software
(please consult our specialist catalogue)
(1) The COM and Shared Table service are mutually exclusive.
(2) Service reserved for Micro and Premium PLCs.
(3) Service only available when Fipway PCMCIA card is installed in the processor.
43597/2
Connectable devices
Characteristics :
page 43597/2
Connections :
pages 43597/4 and 43597/5
Connectable devices
Boxes Connectors
Devices to be connected on Fipio TSX FP TSX FP TSX FP TSX EF TSX FP TSX FP TBX TSX –
ACC 4 ACC 14 ACC 3 ACC 99 ACC 2 ACC 12 BLP 01 LES 65
Premium Fipio Agent DC
TL
Premium bus manager DC
TL
Micro Fipio Agent DC
TL
ATV-16 DC
TL
CCX 17 DC
TL
FT 2100 DC
PC compatible TL
PC compatible DC
TL
XBT-F, TXBT-F DC
Magelis terminals TL
Momentum DC
TL
TBX (IP 20) DC
TL
IP 67 I/O DC
TL
TBX SAP 10 AS-i gateway DC
TL
Boxes Connectors
Devices to be connected on Fipway TSX FP TSX FP TSX FP TSX EF TSX FP TSX FP TBX TSX –
ACC 4 ACC 14 ACC 3 ACC 99 ACC 2 ACC 12 BLP 01 LES 65
Premium DC
TL
Micro DC
TL
TSX Series 7 model 40 DC
(integrated link) TL
TSX Series 7 model 40 DC
(PCMCIA) TL
TSX 17-20 DC
TL
FT 2100 DC
PC compatible TL
PC compatible DC
TL
XBT-F, TXBT-F DC
Magelis terminals TL
DC : daisy chaining
TL : tap link
Recommended
Possible
43597/3
Characteristics :
page 43597/2 Connections
References :
pages 43597/6 and 43597/7
Dimensions :
page 43597/7
Fipio bus and Fipway network wiring system
Micro Agent TSX 17-20 TSX 17-20

Premium Agent
Magelis,
FT 2100, PC Premium Premium
TBX SAP 10 TBX SAP 10
bus manager bus manager
TBX (IP 20) TBX (IP 20)
Momentum Momentum
ATV, CCX 17, FipConnect FipConnect third- FipConnect third-
third-party products party products party products
4 4 9 10 9 10
or or
5 5
3 3
Daisy chaining
7 8 Daisy chaining 6 8 6
a 24 V 1
Daisy
chaining 14 1 or 2
12 1 1 13 13 1 3 a 24 V 14
Fibre optic link 14 12
4
a 24 V 14
11 11
1 or 2
TSX Series 7 model 40 TSX Series 7 TSX Series 7 TSX EFF 08D2
with PCMCIA model 40 model 40 TSX ESF 08T22
Integrated link Integrated link TSX EEF 16D2
IP67 I/O
(see page
42315/8)
Connection to Fipway network and Fipio bus
Connection to Fipio bus
Suitable for Fipway network, not applicable on Fipio bus
43597/4
Characteristics :
page 43597/2 Connections (continued)
References :
pages 43597/6 and 43597/7
Dimensions :
page 43597/7
Cables
1 TSX FP CA i00 : trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 150 Ω (8 mm diameter) for normal environments and use inside
buildings.
2 TSX FP CR i00 : trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 150 Ω (8 mm diameter) for harsh environments and use outside
buildings.
3 TSX FP CC i00 : tap link cable, shielded twisted pair 150 Ω ( 8 mm diameter) for normal environments and use inside
buildings.
4 TSX FP CG 0i0 : tap link connecting cable for PCMCIA TSX FPP 10/20 communication card for Micro/Premium/TSX
Series 7 PLCs, FT 2100 terminals and PC compatibles. Connection to the bus is via a 9-way SUB-D connector on the
TSX FP ACC 3/ACC 4 junction box.
5 TSX FP CE 030 : tap link connecting cable for TSX FPC 10 or FCP FPC 10 PC communication card (ISA bus) for
FTX 517, CCX 77/87 terminals and PC compatibles. Connection to the bus is via a 9-way SUB-D connector on the
TSX FP ACC 3/ACC 4 junction box.
Connection boxes
6 TSX FP ACC 14 : Polycarbonate IP 20 junction box : provides tap link from the trunk cable to connect 1 device via
TSX FP CC i00 tap link cable or several devices in a daisy chain.
7 TSX FP ACC 3 : IP 20 box for connecting 2 PC or PCMCIA cards (TSX FPP 10, TSX FPC 10, TSX FPP 20/200,
FCP FPP 10) on a 9-way SUB-D connector.
8 TSX FP ACC 4 : IP 65 junction box. It also has a 9-way female SUB-D connector for any device which is connected
to the bus via a PCMCIA card (in this case, the box is IP 20).
Connectors
9 TSX FP ACC 2 and TSX FP ACC 12 : 9-way female SUB-D connector for Fipway/Fipio connection (TSX FP ACC 2
connector for TSX 17-20 micro-PLC for example). Used for daisy chain or tap link connection (90° output high or low,
45° output high or low).
10 TBX BLP 01 : connector for TBX I/O modules (IP 20).
11 TSX LES 65 : connecting cable for TSX/PMX model 40 PLCs. Used for address coding.
12 TSX FP ACC 6 : electrical repeater : used to increase the number of stations (max 64) and the length of the network
by creating an additional segment of up to 1000 m (a maximum of 4 repeaters in cascade giving a network length of
5000 m).
TSX EF Ci ii : dust and damp proof connectors for IP67 I/O modules, see page 42315/9.
Other elements
13 TSX FP ACC 8M : fibre optic/electrical repeater : used to connect electrical segments via a fibre optic link (particularly
suitable for zones with a high level of interference) or to connect a fibre optic device.
14 TSX FP ACC 7 : Line terminator, to be installed at both ends of a segment.
TSX FP ACC 9 : network wiring test tool. This is used for testing the continuity of segments, the connections of the various
devices and the installation of line terminators.
TSX FP JF 020 : fibre optic jumper (length 2 m). For fibre optic connection of the TSX FP ACC 8M repeater to a patch
panel. The maximum length of the fibre optic cable (62.5/125) between 2 repeaters is 3000 m.
TSX EF ACC 7 : line terminator, to be installed at both ends of a segment requiring IP67 protection, see page 42315/9.
43597/5
References
Characteristics :
page 43597/2
Dimensions :
page 43597/7
Fipway network/Fipio bus connection accessories (1)

kg
TSX FP ACC 12 Female connector for Connection by daisy chaining TSX FP ACC 2 0.080
TSX FPG 10i module or tap link
(TSX 17 micro-PLCs) Zamac material
Female isolating connector Connection by daisy chaining TSX FP ACC 12 0.040

for devices with or tap link
9-way SUB-D Black polycarbonate material IP 20
connectors
Insulated bus connection Trunk cable tap link (for connecting TSX FP ACC 14 0.120
box the a 24 V power supply of
TSX FP ACC 14 (black polycarbonate, IP 20) TBX dust and damp proof modules)
Trunk cable tap link supports TSX FP ACC 3 0.090

2 x 9-way SUB-D female connectors
(for PCMCIA card cable
TSX FP CG 010/030)
For connecting a 24 V power supply
of TBX dust and damp proof modules
Dust and damp proof Trunk cable tap link, supports TSX FP ACC 4 0.660
bus connection box 1 x 9-way female SUB-D
(zamac material, IP 65) connector (for PCMCIA card cable
TSX FP CG 010/030)
TSX FP ACC 3
Trunk cable tap link via TSX EF ACC 99 0.715

2 M23 connectors
Remote a 24 V power distribution
via 7/8" connector
PC compatible terminal connection via
9-way female SUB-D connector
Line terminators 2 impedance adaptors TSX FP ACC 7 0.020

(Sold in lots of 2)
Electrical repeater Increases the length of the network or TSX FP ACC 6 0.520
TSX FP ACC 4 (IP 65) bus by allowing the connection of
2 segments of up to 1000 m each
Electrical/fibre optic repeater Used to connect (via patch panel) TSX FP ACC 8M 0.620
(IP 65) an electrical segment
(1000 m max.) and a fibre optic
segment (3000 m max.)
TSX EF ACC 99
FIP wiring test tool Used to test each TSX FP ACC 9 0.080
cable segment of the network
(1) The characteristics and performances of the Fipio bus or Fipway network are dependent on the above TSX FP
accessories being used.
43597/6
References (continued), dimensions
Characteristics :
page 43597/2
Fipway network/Fipio bus connecting cables (1)

Description Type Conditions of use Length Reference Weight
kg
Trunk 8 mm, 1 shielded In normal environment (2) 100 m TSX FP CA 100 5.680
cables twisted and inside building
pair 150 Ω 200 m TSX FP CA 200 10.920
500 m TSX FP CA 500 30.000
In harsh environment (3) 100 m TSX FP CR 100 7.680

outside building or
in garland (3) 200 m TSX FP CR 200 14.920
500 m TSX FP CR 500 40.000
9.5 mm, 1 I/O IP67 100 m TSX FP CP 100 7.680

shielded twisted
pair 150 Ω and 500 m TSX FP CP 500 30.000
1 x 1.5 mm2 pair
for remote supply
4
Tap link 8 mm, 2 shielded In normal environment (2) 100 m TSX FP CC 100 5.680
cables twisted and inside building
pairs 150 Ω 200 m TSX FP CC 200 10.920
500 m TSX FP CC 500 30.000
Fibre optic Double fibre For electrical/ 2m TSX FP JF 020 0.550

jumper optic 62.5/125 fibre optic repeater
(1) The characteristics and performances of the Fipio bus/Fipway network are dependent on the above TSX FP
accessories being used.
(2) Normal environment :
- without special environmental restrictions
- operating temperature between + 5 °C and + 60 °C
- fixed installations
(3) Harsh environment :
- resistance to hydrocarbons, industrial oils, detergents, solder chips
- up to 100% humidity
- saline environment
- extreme variations in temperature
- operating temperature between - 10 °C and + 70 °C
- mobile installations
Use in garland : radius of curvature = 10 x cable diameter (either 80 or 95 mm).
For other special restrictions, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Dimensions
TSX FP ACC 4 TSX FP ACC 6 TSX FP ACC 8M TSX FP ACC 14
80 20 175 27 220 116

= 50 = = 160 = = 205 = 104
2xØ5,5 2xØ5,6
20
2xØ4
20
=
=
=
68
65
80
50
79
50
83
RUN DEF ø ¡
RUN DEF ø ¡
=
=
20
25
20
25
20 2xØ5,5
=
43597/7
Fipio and Fipway on fibre optic cables
Presentation
Characteristics :
page 43590/3
References :
page 43590/3
When a high level of withstand to electromagnetic interference is required, two solutions are available for using fibre optic
cables on Fipio bus and Fipway network :
i Using TSX FP ACC 8M fibre optic/electrical repeaters
i Using OZD FIP G3 fibre optic transceivers
Depending on requirements, it is preferable to use :

i The OZD FIP G3 fibre optic transceiver if all devices on the network must be protected from electromagnetic
interference (1 fibre optic transceiver for 16 stations maximum).
i The TSX FP ACC 8 repeater (fibre optic link on one side, electrical on the other) where an installation zone without
devices is subject to high levels of interference or to extend the network (for example between 2 buildings).
See pages 43597/4 to 43597/7.
i The OZD FIG G3 fibre optic transceiver to guarantee availability of the installation by using the redundant ring type
topology. Operation remains normal even in the event of disconnection at a point on the fibre optic medium.
Wiring system
TSX Series 7
Premium CCX 17
3 3
4 4
2 2
1 1
6 6 Fibre optic
1 1 1
6 6 6
2 4 2 4
2
6 6 5 6
3 3
Third-party
products
Momentum
Premium + TSX FPP 10
FT 2100 + TSX FPP
1 OZD FIF G3 : Hirschmann fibre optic transceiver.
2 TSX FP CAi00 : shielded twisted pair trunk cable 150 Ω (diameter 8 mm) for standard environment and inside buildings.
3 TSX FP CG 0i0 : tap-off connecting cable for TSX FPP 10/20 PCMCIA module card for Micro/Premium PLCs, FT 2100
terminal and PC compatible.
4 TSX FP ACC 3/4 : T-junction box. It also has two 9-way female SUB-D connectors for connecting any device which
connects to the bus by a PCMCIA card.
5 TSX FP ACC 12 : 9-way female SUB-D connector for Fipway/Fipio connection (TSX FP ACC 2 for TSX 17-20 for
example) daisy chaining or tap link connection.
6 TSX FP ACC 7 : line terminator to be placed at each segment end.
TSX LES 65 : terminal block for TSX Series 7 PLC, which performs the address coding.
43590/2
Fipio and Fipway on fibre optic cables
Presentation (continued), characteristics, references
Performance
Fipio bus operating mode and performance on fibre optics

After configuration in Fipio mode, the processor scans the various application devices according to the software
configuration :
i Image variables of the input values and of the output command values of a configured device are scanned as quickly
as possible on the bus, whilst respecting the relationship existing between periods of different tasks which use these
devices.
i Appearance or disappearance of a configured device is detected on the bus within a maximum time of 200 ms.
i Exchanges occur at the rate defined by the programmer from 10 to 20 Uni-TE messages per second.
The network cycle time is double that of the electrical bus when OZD FIP G3 transceivers are used.
Fipway bus operating mode and performance on fibre optics
The operating principle is identical to that on an electrical network, in that the number of stations is limited to 32 and the
transmission time is as follows :
i For the Common words and Shared Table services, updating of the entire database is carried out every 40 ms
maximum.
i For Uni-TE message handling, the network characteristics enable transmission of 230 messages maximum of 128
bytes per second.
Characteristics (with OZD FIP G3 fibre optic transceivers)
Type of bus/network Fipio bus Fipway network
Structure Type Open industrial support conforming to Fip standard

Topology (1) In redundant ring or in a line with simple redundant link
Access method Producer/consumer principle Producer/consumer principle
Management by a fixed arbitrator Management by an automatically elected arbitrator
Transmission Mode Multimode (860 nanometres)

Data rate 1 Mbps
Medium (2) (1) Fibre optic 50/125 - 17 dBm or 62.5/125 - 15 dBm
Inter-repeater 2500 m for 50/125 and 2800 m for 62.5/125
distance
Configuration No. of connection 20 fibre optic transceivers (OZD FIP G3 type) maximum
points (1)
No. of devices 2 Fipio devices can be connected to the same fibre 16 stations can be connected to the same fibre optic
optic transceiver transceiver but the maximum number of stations is 32
No. of segments (1) The loop (or fibre optic line) is similar to a non cascadable segment
Length (1) Maximum circumference of the ring (or length of the line) : 20 km
Tap links (1) From OZD FIP G3 fibre optic transceiver, the maximum length of the electrical tap link is 100 m
Services Same as page 43597/2 apart from the Telegram service which is not available with OZD FIP G3 fibre optic transceiver.
(1) Characteristics specific to use of fibre optics.
(2) Devices connected on electrical tap links are compatible with the WorldFip physical layer.
References
Description No. of trans- Connectable devices Reference Weight
ceivers per Fipio Fipway
bus or network bus network kg
Fipio/Fipway 20 maximum - Micro/Premium Micro OZD FIP G3 0.500

fibre optic - TBX distr. I/O Premium
transceiver with TBX LEP 30 (with
(1) - Momentum distr. I/O TSX FPP 20
- CCX 17 panels PCMCIA
(version 2.4) card)
- FT 2100/FTX 517,
PC compatible
Micro/Premium PLC connection components (2)

Description Use Composition Reference Weight
OZD FIP G3
kg
Fipway card TSX 37-21/22 PLC, 1 type III TSX FPP 200 0.110
TSX/PMX 57 processor, PCMCIA
PCX 57 coprocessor card
Fipio agent TSX 37-21/22 PLC, 1 type III TSX FPP 10 0.110
function TSX/PMX 57 processor, PCMCIA
card PCX 57 coprocessor card
TSX FPP 20/10 (1) For TSX FP ACC 8M fibre optic electrical repeater, see page 43597/6.
(2) For accessories and connecting cables, see pages 43597/5 to 43597/7.
43590/3
Modem module
Characteristics :
page 43598/3
References :
page 43598/3
Presentation
Micro/Premium PLCs offer a Modem connection via the TSX MDM 10 module, which enables them to be integrated into
architectures suitable for telemaintenance, telediagnostics, teleadjustment, telealarm or telemonitoring applications via
the switched telephone network (STN).
The level of integration allows the user to completely overcome Modem programming constraints. A single PL7 function
block can establish or break the telephone connection. A control mechanism by password protects the application against
hacking.
The user can, on request, connect from a distance to another PLC or a central station via the Uni-Telway protocol, or even
briefly use the ASCII protocol to call a supervisor on a “pager” for example.
When using the Uni-Telway protocol, the characteristics of network transparency via the communication architecture are
maintained.
For applications for which the TSX MDM 10 modem module is not suitable, Schneider Electric has performance-tested
external modems which can be connected to the PLC terminal port, to the integrated port on the TSX SCY 21601 card
or to PCMCIA cards for asynchronous serial links. Suppliers of these products are listed in the directories of partner
products, see pages 43614/3 to 43614/11. The list of approved modems can be obtained from your Regional Sales Office,
or from the Internet site www.schneideralliances.com.
Modem
Switched
telephone network
STN
Premium Micro
Micro
Magelis terminals
Premium
Description
The modem module is a type III PCMCIA card. This card is installed in the host slot on the processor (Premium or Micro
model TSX 37-21/22).
1 A host slot on the processor for the Modem module
2 PCMCIA Modem card with connector for

TSX MDM ADTi cable

TSX MDM ADTi telephone connection cable (depending
on country of use)
1 1 2
The Modem module can also be used in PC compatibles which have a type III PCMCIA slot.
43598/2
Modem module
Characteristics, setup, references
Presentation :
page 43598/2
Environmental characteristics
Temperature During operation 0…+ 50 °C (0…+ 60 °C with TSX FAN fan modules)
Resistance to radiated Conforms to EMC directive 89/336/EEC applied to residential, commercial

electromagnetic fields and light industrial sites (3V/m)
Country approvals Conforms to the DTTC telecommunications European directive 98/13/EC

Modem approved for Germany, Belgium, Spain, France, Italy (1)
Module characteristics
Structure Type Telephone line

Physical interface STN link
Protocol Uni-Telway/ASCII
Transmission Mode Half or full duplex

Data rate V32-9600 bps
Configuration Number of devices 2 (point-to-point connection)
Services Uni-Telway Requests in point-to-point with report (question/answer type), 240 bytes maximum
from any connected device
Unsolicited data in point-to-point without report 240 bytes maximum from any
connected device
ASCII Transmission/reception of a character string 200 bytes maximum
Software setup
The Modem module is configured using PL7 software specific screens.

These screens enable :
i Protocol selection and definition of its characteristics
i Declaration of the Modem configuration
i Passwords to be entered
Call/hang up procedures are carried out using a specific PL7 function block. Once the link has been established,
communication uses standard communication function blocks. PL7 language objects can be used to monitor the state of
the Modem module from the PL7 application. The Modem function occupies approximately 12.5 Kwords in the application
program memory zone.
Debug screens enable :

i Testing of the Modem offline
i Communication diagnostics
References
Description Characteristics Protocol Reference Weight
kg
Type III - data transmission mode ASCII TSX MDM 10 0.105

PCMCIA card V32 (9.6 K bps max) Uni-Telway
for Premium - STN point-to-point connection
processor, - called/caller mode
TSX 37-21/22
TSX MDM 10 PLC
From To socket for kg
Connection TSX MDM 10 Belgium TSX MDM ADT B 0.120

kit PCMCIA card
(length 3 m) France TSX MDM ADT F 0.120
Germany TSX MDM ADT G 0.120
Italy TSX MDM ADT T 0.120
Spain TSX MDM ADT S 0.120
Other TSX MDM ADT W –

(1) For other countries, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
43598/3
Uni-Telway bus
Presentation, characteristics
References :
pages 43594/6 and 43594/7
Presentation
The Uni-Telway bus is a standard means of communication

between control system components (PLCs, MMI terminals,
supervisors, variable speed drives, numerical controllers,
weighing equipment, etc).
It is suitable for architectures designed to pilot control and

Premium monitoring devices via a PLC, or architectures used for
MMI (supervision, etc).
The Uni-Telway bus requires a master station which

manages the allocation of bus access rights to the various
connected stations (known as slave stations).
CCX 17
Uni-Telway
TSX 47
Micro
Characteristics
Structure Type Heterogeneous industrial bus
Physical interface Programming port Integrated link PCMCIA card PCMCIA card PCMCIA card
RS 485 non isolated to TSX SCY 21601 RS 485 isolated/ 20 mA CL RS 232 D non isolated
(TER/AUX) module RS 422
RS 485 isolated
Link Multidrop Point-to-point
Method of access Master/Slave principle
Transmission Mode Asynchronous transmission in baseband
Data rate 1.2…19.2 Kbps 0.3…19.2 Kbps
Medium Shielded double twisted pair
Configuration Number 5 devices max. 28 devices maximum 16 devices max. 2 devices

of devices 8 datalink
addresses max. 96 datalink addresses maximum (1 device can occupy several datalink addresses)
Length of bus 10 m max., 1000 m 1000 m max. excluding tap links 15 m (unlimited via
with TSX P ACC 01 modem)
Tap links – 15 m 20 m 15 m –
Services Uni-TE Point-to-point requests with confirmation (question/response), of up to 240 bytes (1) initiated by any connected device
Unsolicited point-to-point data, without confirmation, of up to 240 bytes (1) initiated by any connected device
Broadcast messages of up to 240 bytes (1) initiated by the master device
Other functions Transparent communication, via the master, with any device in an X-Way architecture
Diagnostics, debugging, adjustment and programming of PLCs
Security Check character on each frame, acknowledgement and, if required, repetition of messages ensure security of
transmission
Monitoring Bus status table, transmission error counters and device status can be accessed by program in each device
Status of bus and connected devices accessed from the master PLC using PL7 or SYSDIAG software on an
FT 2100/FTX 517 terminal or PC compatible.
(1) Limited to 128 bytes with Micro/Premium PLC programming port. For other limitations, please consult our specialist
catalogue.
43594/2
Uni-Telway bus
Characteristics :
page 43594/2
References :
pages 43594/6 and 43594/7
Performances
BCT The Uni-Telway bus cycle time depends on :

(ms) i The number of devices polled (datalink addresses)
400
i The data rate
i The turnaround time of each device
1 i The number, length and type of messages
300
2
BCT = Bus Cycle Time, is the interval between two polls to
200
the same device.
100
1 = 9.6 Kbps
1 4 8 12 16 20 24 27 2 = 19.2 Kbps
The above curve gives the Uni-Telway cycle time as a function of the number of slaves operating at 9.6 Kbps or
19.2 Kbps, with a typical turnaround time of 5 ms per device (excluding messages).
The following table shows the time to be added (in ms) to obtain the true BCT value as a function of the traffic (N = Number
of usable characters) :
Time (ms)
Exchanges 9.6 Kbps 19.2 Kbps
Master to slave 24 + 1.2 N (1) 17 + 0.6 N (1)
Slave to master 19 + 1.2 N (1) 12 + 0.6 N (1)
Slave to slave 44 + 2.3 N (1) 29 + 1.15 N (1)

(1) N = Number of usable characters corresponding to the messages to be exchanged.
In a distributed control system architecture the application-to-application response time depends not only on the
communication system, but also on :
i The processing times of the message source and destination devices
i The degree of asynchronism between the bus and processor cycle times
This response time must be evaluated by the designer of

Event Report each application according to the devices which are
connected.
Device 1 CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1 The processing time of a device may vary from one to two
cycle times depending on the degrees of asynchronism.
Uni-Telway bus BCT BCT
Device 2 CT2 CT2
Action
BCT = Uni-Telway bus cycle time
CT1 = Device 1 bus cycle time
CT2 = Device 2 bus cycle time
43594/3
Uni-Telway bus
Devices which can be connected

Characteristics :
page 43594/2
References :
pages 43594/6 and 43594/7
Devices which can be connected
Micro/Premium PLCs
Micro/Premium PLCs provide various ways of connecting to the Uni-Telway bus.
1 Via the integrated port on the processor or coprocessor

The AUX (1) port (8-way mini-DIN) has one non-isolated
RS 485 serial link channel (maximum distance 10 m).
2 Via the integrated port on the TSX SCY 21601 module

1 This module has one isolated RS 485 serial link
channel. Half-duplex multiprotocol, including Uni-Telway.
3 3 Via multiprotocol PCMCIA card

A slot on the processor of TSX 37-21/22/Premium PLCs
or on the coprocessor and on the TSX SCY 21601
module accepts the following multiprotocol cards :
i TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA card

Isolated RS 485/RS 422 link. This type of card
corresponds to the Uni-Telway standard

Non isolated RS 232 D link. This type of card can be
1 2
used for direct point-to-point links or via Modem

20 mA current loop link. This type of card is used for
a multidrop link (2 to 16 devices) and requires a
a 24 V external power supply
3 3
(1) TER port for TSX 37-05/08/10 PLC
Other devices (please consult our specialist catalogue)

TSX model 40 PLCs Nano PLCs TSX 17-20 micro-PLCs FT 2100/PC compatible
terminals
Connection via processor Connection via the Connection via the Connection via the
Uni-Telway integrated port terminal port. TSX SCG 1161 module terminal integrated ports.
or via TSX SCM 21i6 of TSX 17-20 micro-PLCs These give access to all
communication module. fitted with the devices in the X-Way
TSX P17 20 FC2/FD2 PL7-2 architecture.
micro-software cartridge. X-Way drivers, see page
43594/6.
Other devices which can be connected

See page or
Description Device reference catalogue
Operator panel CCX 17-20, CCX 17-30 Page 43583/6

MMI terminals XBT-H/P/E/HM/PM, XBT-F/FC, T XBT-F Page 0372Q/2
Identification system XGS-C5 Specialist catalogue
Variable speed drives ATV-16, ATV-66, ATV-58 for asynchronous motors Specialist catalogue
RTV-74, RTV-84 for d.c. motors Specialist catalogue
MASAP servodrive MSP-62 Specialist catalogue
Industrial terminals FT 2100 terminal Page 43586/4
Data processing equipment Bull : DPX2/100 computers under SPIX –

Digital : PDP11 computers under RSX, Micro VAX under VMS –
Hewlett-Packard : HP9000 computer running under HP-UX –
IBM : PC micro-computer under DOS and OS/2 –
43594/4
Uni-Telway bus
Connections
Characteristics :
page 43594/2
References :
pages 43594/6 and 43594/7
Uni-Telway bus wiring system
13
12
5 2 1 2 9 2
TER AUX
Device 3 Adaptor
10 11 7
3
4 Micro (TER terminal port)

8 Premium +
TSXSCP 114
(PCMCIA card)
TSX/PMX model 40
Premium + TSX SCY 21601 6
1 TSX CSA iii : bus cable, double shielded twisted pair. The shielding must be connected to the earth of each device.
2 TSX SCA 50 : passive T-junction box, matches the impedance when it is installed at the end of the line.
3 TSX SCA 62 : passive 2-channel Uni-Telway subscriber socket, is used for coding the address of two connected
devices, and matching the impedance when it is installed at the end of the line.
4 TSX SCA 60 : passive terminal block, used for intermediate devices which have the appropriate connections
(ATV-45, Masap drives). It is used for coding the address of the connected device.
5 TSX SCA 61 : passive terminal block, used for end devices which have the appropriate connections (ATV-45, Masap
drives). It is used for coding the address of the connected device.
6 TSX LES 64/74 : cable connectors for extensions to the Uni-Telway bus, used to connect PLC processors which have
an integral Uni-Telway port as standard (model 40 PLCs). They are used for coding the address of the connected
device.
7 TSX SCP 114 : PCMCIA card for connecting Micro (1)/Premium PLCs to the Uni-Telway bus.
8 TSX SCY CU 6530 : Uni-Telway connecting cable between the TSX SCY 21601 module and the TSX SCA 62
subscriber socket.
9 TSX P ACC 01 : connection box, used for connecting a Micro/Premium PLC to the Uni-Telway bus via the PLC
terminal port. The connecting cable (length 1 m) is integrated in the connection box. It isolates the signals (for
distances > 10 m) and is used to match the end of line impedance. It is also used to set the operation of the terminal
port (Uni-Telway Master/Slave or character mode).
10 XBT-Z908 : Uni-Telway connecting cable between the CCX 17 operator panel and the TSX SCA 62 subscriber
socket (see page 43583/7).
11 TSX SCP CU 4030 : Uni-Telway connecting cable between the TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA card (on TSX P57 ●0M
processor or TSX SCY 21601 module) and the TSX SCA 50 junction box.
12 TSX PCU 1030/1031 : Uni-Telway connecting cable between the FT 2100/PC compatible and the TER or AUX ports
of Micro/Premium PLCs or the TSX P ACC 01 connection box.
13 TSX CSC 015 : connecting cable between the TSX 17 micro-PLC (via a TSX 17 ACC 5 adaptor or a TSX SCG 1161
module) and TSX SCA 62 subscriber socket.
TSX DG UTW E : this manual describes the operating principles and the architectures of the Uni-Telway bus. It is
required for setting up and installing the Uni-Telway bus.
TSX DR NET E : this manual describes the X-Way architectures, services and address mechanisms. It includes
the coding of Uni-TE requests as well as precautions for connecting earths for the networks. It
also includes the principles of asynchronous serial transmission.
(1) With TSX 37-21/22 PLCs.
43594/5
Uni-Telway bus
References
Characteristics :
page 43594/2
Elements for connection to Uni-Telway bus

Description Protocol Physical layer PLC Reference Weight
(1) kg
Integrated link Uni-Telway RS 485 non isolated TSX/PCX See page 0451Q/2 –
on processor Character mode Premium
Modbus/Jbus
Slave (2)
Micro Please consult our specialist catalogue –
Communication Modbus/Jbus - 1 isolated RS 485 TSX/PCX TSX SCY 21601 0.360

module Uni-Telway integrated 2-wire Premium
TSX SCY 21601 Character mode channel (ch. 0),
- 1 type III PCMCIA
card slot
(channel 1)
Type III PCMCIA Modbus/Jbus RS 232 D (9 signals) TSX SCP 111 0.105
cards for Uni-Telway 0.3…19.2 Kbps
PMX/PCX Character mode
Premium processor,
TSX 37-21/22 PLC RS 485 (RS 422 compatible) TSX SCP 114 0.105
or TSX SCY 21601 0.3…19.2 Kbps
TSX SCP 11i module
20 mA CL TSX SCP 112 0.105

0.3…19.2 Kbps
Set of Includes all the X-Way drivers : 1 CD-ROM TLX CD DRV M –

X-Way drivers - Uni-Telway/Fipway/Fipio/Ethway for
for Windows 3.1/95/98/NT/2000
PC compatible - XIP/ISAway for DOS and
TSX P ACC 01 Windows 3.1/95/98/NT/2000
- Uni-Telway for TSX SCP 114 card
in Windows 95/98/NT/2000
- Terminal port for OS/2
Uni-Telway bus connection accessories

kg
Terminal port Isolation of Uni-Telway signals TSX P ACC 01 0.690

TSX SCA 50 connection box for bus length > 10 m,
(TER) Premium end of line adaptation,
1 m connecting bus cable tap links
cable
Passive T-junction Tap link and extension of bus cable, TSX SCA 50 0.520
box end of line adaptation
TSX SCA 62
2-channel passive 2-channel tap link (15-way female SUB-D connector) TSX SCA 62 0.570
subscriber and extension of bus cable,
socket address coding and end of line adaptation
RS 232 C/RS 485 Connection of an RS 232 C device TSX SCA 72 0.520

active adaptor unit (using Uni-Telway protocol),
TSX SCA 72 adaptation and isolation of signals,
end of line adaptation (no address coding)
Other connection Uni-Telway bus Please consult our specialist catalogue –

accessories
(2) With Micro PLC.
43594/6
Uni-Telway bus
References
Characteristics :
page 43594/2
Uni-Telway bus connecting cables

From To kg
Double Uni-Telway bus – 100 m TSX CSA 100 5.680

shielded
twisted pair
RS 485
cables
200 m TSX CSA 200 10.920
500 m TSX CSA 500 30.000
Cables for TSX SCP 114 card TSX SCA 50 T-jun. box 3m TSX SCP CU 4030 0.160
isolated
RS 485 tap link
TSX SCA 62 sub. sock. 3m TSX SCP CU 4530 0.180
TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCA 50 T-jun. box 3m TSX SCY CU 6030 0.180
integrated channel
(channel 0)
TSX SCA 62 sub. sock. 3m TSX SCY CU 6530 0.200
Cables for Micro/Premium TSX P ACC 01 (AUX) 2m T FTX CB1 020 0.180
non isolated port, box
RS 485 PCX 57
tap link (TER or AUX)
5m T FTX CB1 050 0.420
Micro/Premium 9-way SUB-D 3 m (1) TSX PCU 1031 0.140

PCX 57 port RS 232 D port for
or TSX P ACC 01 FT 2100, PC compatible
connection box
(TER or AUX)
Other RS 232 D – – – See page 43596/3 –

and 20 mA CL
connecting
cables
(1) TSX PCU 1031 cable for use with terminal equipped with PL7 software V 4.0, reference TLX iii PL7 i P 40M. For
PL7 software V < 4.0, use cable TSX PCU 1030.
43594/7
Modbus/Jbus bus
References :
pages 43595/4 and 43595/5
Presentation
CCX Modbus/Jbus
XBT
Micro/Premium April 5000 Quantum
The Modbus/Jbus bus is used for Master/Slave architectures (however it is necessary to check that the Modbus/Jbus
services used by the application are implemented on the devices concerned).
The bus comprises one Master station and several Slave stations. Only the Master station can initiate the exchange (direct
communication between Slave stations is not possible). Two exchange mechanisms are possible :
i Question/answer, the requests from the Master are addressed to a given Slave. The master then waits for the response
from the Slave which has been interrogated.
i Broadcasting, the Master broadcasts a message to all the Slave stations on the bus, which execute the command
without transmitting a response.
Description
Integrated link
1 Via integrated port on the Micro processor.

The TER port (8-way mini DIN) also has Modbus/Jbus
1 RTU Slave protocol.
2 Via integrated port on the TSX SCY 21601 module.

This module has one isolated RS 485 serial link channel
(25-way SUB-D connector), Half-duplex with Modbus/
Jbus protocols (see page 43591/2).
TSX SCP 11i multiprotocol PCMCIA cards
3 A slot on the processor, the coprocessor and on the

TSX SCY 21601 module takes cards which comprise :
2
5 A removable cover with fixing screws (to access a

3 20-way miniature connector)

- ERR lamp: card or link fault
6
- COM lamp: data transmission or reception
3 5 Cable connector to be ordered separately :

TSX SCP/SCY cable.
4
43595/2
Modbus/Jbus bus
Characteristics
References :
pages 43595/4 and 43595/5
Characteristics (1)
Structure Type Heterogeneous industrial bus
Physical interface Terminal port PCMCIA card

Non-isolated Micro RS 485 RS 485 20 mA CL Non-isolated RS 232 D
Method of access Slave type Master/Slave type (only Slave on the Micro PLC integrated port)
Transmission Mode Asynchronous in baseband, RTU/ASCII frame (only RTU on the integrated port)
Frame RTU RTU/ASCII
Data rate 1.2 ...14.2 Kbps 0.3...19.2 Kbps (for TSX SCP 111)
1.2...19.2 Kbps (for TSX SCP 112/114 and for integrated port on TSX SCY 21601
module)
Medium Double shielded twisted pair Double shielded twisted Quintuple shielded twisted
pair, doubled pair
Configuration Number of devices 32 devices maximum 16 devices maximum 2 devices
98 datalink addresses maximum (1 device can have several addresses)
Length of bus 10 m maximum 1300 m excluding tap links 100 to 1000 m according to 15 m maximum
rate
Tap link – 15 m maximum – –
Services Requests Bits : 1920 bits per request

Words : 120 words per request
Security One CRC 16 check parameter on each frame
Monitoring No flow control Diagnostic counters, event counters
Modbus/Jbus functions (2) Code Type

available on
Premium PLCs 01 Read n consecutive output bits
02 Read n consecutive input bits
03 Read n consecutive output words
04 Read n consecutive input words
05 Write 1 output bit
06 Write 1 output word
07 Fast read 8 bits
08 Access diagnostic counters
11 Read exchange counter
12 Read trace buffer
15 Write n output bits
16 Write n output words
17 Read identification
(1) For characteristics of the TSX SCY 21601 communication module integrated channel, see page 43591/2.
(2) The Master PLC station can send all the Modbus/Jbus requests (without transmission and reception monitoring).
43595/3
Modbus/Jbus bus
References
Characteristics :
page 43595/3
Modbus/Jbus connection elements

Description Protocol Physical layer Reference Weight
(1) kg
Micro PLC Modbus/Jbus Non-isolated RS 485 Please consult our specialist catalogue –
integrated link (RTU)
(TER) Uni-Telway
Character mode
Communication Modbus/Jbus - 1 isolated RS 485 integrated TSX SCY 21601 0.360

module Uni-Telway channel (channel 0),
Character mode - 1 type III PCMCIA card
slot (channel 1)
TSX SCY 21601 Type III PCMCIA cards Modbus/Jbus RS 485 (RS 422 compatible) TSX SCP 114 0.105
for TSX/PCX Uni-Telway 1.2…19.2 Kbps
Premium Character mode
processor,
TSX 37-21/22 PLC
or TSX SCY 21601 RS 232 D (9 signals) TSX SCP 111 0.105
module 0.3…19.2 Kbps
20 mA CL TSX SCP 112 0.105

1.2…19.2 Kbps
Modbus/Jbus connection accessories

TSX SCP 11i Description Use Reference Weight
kg
Passive Bus tap link and extension, TSX SCA 50 0.520

junction box line termination
2-channel passive Tap link of 2 devices with 2 wires TSX SCA 64 0.570
subscriber socket Tap link of 1 Master device and/or
(2 or 4-wire) (2) 1 Slave device with 4 wires
Fitted with 2 female 15-way SUB-D
connectors
RS 232 C/RS 485 Connection of an RS 232 C device as RS 485 TSX SCA 72 0.520
TSX SCA 50 active adaptor Isolation of signals and line termination
Micro PLC Bus tap link cable (2 or 4-wire) TSX P ACC 01 0.690
TER terminal port Isolation of Modbus signals
cable connector Line termination
Supplied with TER port link cable (length 1 m)
Line terminators Can be 2/4-wire cabling TSX SCA 10 0.030

(sold in lots of 2) connected to the
front panel of the
TSX SCA 64
subscriber socket
TSX SCA 64
Other – Please consult our specialist catalogue –
accessories (3)
(1) Product supplied with a bilingual quick reference guide : English and French.
(2) 2 or 4-wire cabling, compatible with the TSX SCA 64 subscriber socket requires a Modbus cable with 10 mm maximum
external diameter.
(3) For Modbus Plus/multiplexed 4-channel Modbus gateway: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
43595/4
Modbus/Jbus bus
Characteristics :
page 43595/3
Modbus/Jbus connecting cables

From To kg
Isolated TSX SCP 114 TSX SCA 50 3m TSX SCP CM 4030 0.160
RS 422/485 card 2-wire box (1)
tap link cables
TSX SCA 64 3m TSX SCP CM 4530 0.180

subscriber sockets,
2/4-wire
Standard 3m TSX SCP CX 4030 0.160

Modbus/Jbus
device, 4-wire (1)
(point-to-point)
TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCA 50 3m TSX SCY CM 6030 0.160

module integrated 2-wire box (1)
channel
(channel 0)
TSX SCA 64 3m TSX SCY CM 6530 0.160

subscriber sockets,
2-wire
RS 232 D TSX SCP 111 Communication 3m TSX SCP CC 1030 0.190

tap link cables card device (Modem,
converter, etc)
(DCE) (2)
Point-to-point 3m TSX SCP CD 1030 0.190

terminal device
(DTE) (2)
10 m TSX SCP CD 1100 0.620
Tap link TSX SCP 112 Multidrop Modbus (1) 3m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160
cable card
20 mA CL
Other – – – See page 43606/2 –

connecting cables
(1) End of cable fitted with flying leads.

(2) End of cable fitted with a 25-way male SUB-D connector.
43595/5
Asynchronous serial links
Presentation, description, characteristics
References :
page 43596/3
Presentation
Micro/Premium PLCs provide, via their processor, coprocessor or TSX SCY 21601 communication module, several
possible ways for exchanging data in character mode with devices equipped with an asynchronous serial link interface :
i RS 485 integrated port
i Type III PCMCIA card with RS 232 D, RS 485 (RS 422 compatible) or 20 mA current loop link
Protocols supported are character mode (ASCII), Uni-Telway and Modbus/Jbus.

Other protocols are also available, or can be developed on request, on a RS 485 or RS 232 D link, which enables Micro/
Premium PLCs to communicate on third-party architectures. These products are offered within the framework of the
Schneider Alliances partnership programme (see page 43614/2). The list of modules available can be obtained from your
Regional Sales Office, or from our Internet site www.schneideralliances.com.
Description
Integrated links
1 Via integrated port on the processor or coprocessor
The AUX (1) port (8-way mini-DIN connector) has one
non-isolated RS 485 serial link channel (maximum
distance 10 m).
1 2 2 Via integrated port on the TSX SCY 21601 module
This module for Premium PLCs has one isolated RS 485
serial link channel (25-way SUB-D connector). Half
3 duplex multiprotocol, including Uni-Telway.
3
TSX SCP 11i i multiprotocol PCMCIA cards
3 A slot on the processor, coprocessor and on the TSX
SCY 21601 module takes cards which comprise :
5 4 A removable cover with fixing screws for access to the
20-way miniature connector.
- ERR lamp : card or link fault
4 - COM lamp : data transmission or reception
1 Connector cable to be ordered separately :
TSX SCP Ci iii cable
3
(1) TER port for Micro TSX 37-05/08/10 PLC.
Characteristics (1)
Physical Type Non-isolated Isolated RS 485 PCMCIA cards

layer RS 485 terminal port TSX SCY 21601 RS 232 D RS 485 20 mA current
integrated port RS 422 compatible loop (3)
Data rate 1.2…19.2 Kbps (2) 1.2…19.2 Kbps 0.3…19.2 Kbps 1.2…19.2 Kbps
Transmission Size 120 characters 4096 characters max.

Data 7 or 8 bits
Stop bit 1 or 2 bits
Parity bit Even, odd or none
Stop on silence
Services Reception echo

Repeat 1st char. echo
Auto LF
Back space
Beep
Flow by Xon-Xoff
mgmt by RTS/CTS
RTS/CTS delay
Stop on reception
End of message
PSR management
Parameters which can be accessed in configuration mode.
(1) For characteristics of the communication module integrated channel, see page 43591/2.
(2) With the TSX P57 3i3/453 processor, data rate up to 115 Kbps during program uploading.
(3) Point-to-point or multidrop link.
43596/2
Asynchronous serial links
References
Characteristics :
page 43596/2
Asynchronous serial link elements (character mode)

Description Protocol Physical layer PLC Reference Weight
(1) kg
Integrated link Character mode RS 485 Micro Please consult our specialist catalogue –
on processor Uni-Telway non-isolated
TSX/PCX See page 0451Q/2 –

Premium
Communication Character mode - 1 isolated RS 485 TSX/PCX TSX SCY 21601 0.360
module Uni-Telway integrated chan. Premium
TSX SCY 21601 Modbus/Jbus (channel 0),
- 1 type III
PCMCIA card slot
(channel 1)
Type III PCMCIA Character mode RS 232 D (9 signals) TSX SCP 111 0.105
cards for Uni-Telway 0.3…19.2 Kbps
TSX 37-21/22 Modbus/Jbus
PLC,
TSX/PCX RS 485 (RS 422 compatible) TSX SCP 114 0.105
Premium processor, 0.3…19.2 Kbps
or TSX SCY 21601
TSX SCP 11i
module
20 mA CL TSX SCP 112 0.105
0.3…19.2 Kbps
Asynchronous serial link connection accessories

kg
Terminal port Isolation of RS 485 signals, end of line adaptation, TSX P ACC 01 0.690
TSX P ACC 01 connection box supplied with cable for connection to PLC
(length 1 m)
Connecting cables for asynchronous serial links

From To kg
Cables for TSX SCP 114 RS 485/RS 422 3m TSX SCP CX 4030 0.160
isolated RS 485 card device (2)
connection
Integrated channel RS 485/RS 422 3m TSX SCY CU 6030 0.180

(channel 0) module device (3)
TSX SCY 21601 via TSX SCA 50
box
Cable for Micro/Premium RS 232 D port 3m TSX PCD 1030 0.170

non-isolated port (TER or AUX) of a terminal
RS 485 connection or TSX P ACC01 device (DTE)
box (3)
Cables for TSX SCP 111 card Communication 3m TSX SCP CC 1030 0.190
RS 232 D device : Modem,
connection converter, etc.
(DCE) (3)
Point-to-point 3m TSX SCP CD 1030 0.190

terminal device
(DTE) (3)
10 m TSX SCP CD 1100 0.620
Cable for TSX SCP 112 card Current loop 3m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160
20 mA CL device
connection (2)
Other – – – Please consult our specialist catalogue –

connecting cables
(2) End of cable fitted with flying leads.
(3) End of cable fitted with a 25-way male SUB-D connector.
43596/3
Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports
References
Micro/Premium Device to be Physical Protocol Length Reference Weight

PLCs connected link kg
TSX SCP 111 DTE terminal RS 232 D Character mode 3m TSX SCP CD 1030 0.190
PCMCIA card 2
1
10 m TSX SCP CD 1100 0.620
DCE terminal RS 232 D Character mode 3m TSX SCP CC 1030 0.190

(Modem, etc) 2 Uni-Telway
TSX SCP 114 TSX SCA 50 RS 485 Character mode 3m TSX SCP CU 4030 0.160
PCMCIA card T-junction box (2-wire Uni-Telway
1 3 isolated)
RS 422/485 Character mode 3m TSX SCP CM 4030 0.160

(2-wire) Modbus
TSX SCA 62 RS 485 Uni-Telway 3m TSX SCP CU 4530 0.160

2-channel (2-wire
socket 4
DTE terminal RS 422/485 Modbus 3m TSX SCP CX 4030 0.160

3 (4-wire)
TSX SCP 112 Active or 20 mA Character mode 3m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160
PCMCIA card passive current Uni-Telway
1 terminal 3 loop Modbus
TER/AUX TSX P ACC 01 RS 485 Uni-Telway 1m Included with TSX P ACC 01 –

ports 5 junction box
TSX P ACC 01 RS 485 Uni-Telway 2m T FTX CB1 020 0.100

junction box
for FTX 117
5
5m T FTX CB1 050 0.190
DTE terminal RS 232 Character mode 3m TSX PCD 1030 0.170

6 (1)
End of connecting cable fitted with:

1 25-way male miniature connector. 4 15-way male SUB-D connector.
2 25-way male SUB-D connector. 5 8-way female mini-DIN connector.
3 Flying leads. 6 9-way female SUB-D connector.
(1) Point-to-point, supplied with 2 SUB-D adapters : TSX CTC 07 9-way male/25-way female and TSX CTC 08 9-way
male/25-way male.
43606/2
Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports
Micro/Premium Device to be Physical Protocol Length Reference Weight

PLCs connected link kg
TER/AUX DTE terminal RS 232 Uni-Telway 2.5 m TSX PCU 1031 0.140
ports (Slave PC) minimum (1) (2)
(continued) 2
1
DTE terminal RS 232 Character mode 3m TSX PCX 1030 0.170

(printer, Uni-Telway (3)
Slave PC
without RTS)
2
DCE terminal RS 232 Character mode 3m TSX PCX 1130 0.140

(Modem M/Sl. Uni-Telway (4)
USA/Europe)
3
FT 2100 RS 485 Uni-Telway 2.5 m TSX PCU 1031 0.170

terminal minimum (2)
2
CCX 17 RS 485 Uni-Telway 2.5 m XBT-Z968 0.180

panel
XBT terminal
4
TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCA 50 RS 485 Uni-Telway 3m TSX SCY CU 6030 0.180
communication T-junction box (2-wire
module isolated)
integrated 5
port Modbus/Jbus 3m TSX SCY CM 6030 0.180
4
TSX SCA 62 RS 485 Uni-Telway 3m TSX SCY CU 6530 0.200

2-channel (2-wire
socket 6
RS 485 RS 485 Character mode 3m TSX SCY CM 6030 0.180

terminal (2-wire
5 isolated)
End of connecting cable fitted with :

1 8-way female mini-DIN connector. 4 25-way male SUB-D connector
2 9-way female SUB-D connector. 5 Flying leads.
3 9-way male SUB-D connector. 6 15-way male SUB-D connector
(1) Point-to-point, supplied with 1 SUB-D adapter : TSX CTC 07 9-way male/25-way female.
(2) TSX PCU 1031 cable to be used with terminal equipped with PL7 V 4.0 software reference TLX iii PL7 i P 40M.
For PL7 V < 4.0 software, use TSX PCU 1030 cable.
(3) Point-to-point, supplied with 2 SUB-D adapters : TSX CTC 07 9-way male/25-way female and TSX CTC 08 9-way
male/25-way male.
(4) Point-to-point, supplied with 1 SUB-D adapter : TSX CTC 09 9-way female/25-way male.
43606/3
Jnet network
Presentation, description, characteristics
References :
page 43603/3
Presentation
The Jnet network enables an automatic exchange of data between several Series 1000, SMC 50/600 and Premium PLCs,
using the shared table service (exchange by each PLC of a memory zone, internal words, broadcast zone, to other PLCs
on the network), see page 43301/4.
Jnet
Premium April 5000 April 2000 April 3000 April 7000 SMC 50/600
The Jnet network services exchange data between Series 1000, SMC 50/600 and Premium PLCs. The principle is based
on broadcasting of a local zone by each PLC (word memory zone), which is automatically copied to other PLCs on the
network ; no explicit programming for exchanges is required.
Description
Premium PLCs are connected to the Jnet network using type III PCMCIA communication cards :
i TSX JNP 112 card for which the physical layer is a 20 mA current loop serial link.
i TSX JNP 114 card for which the physical layer is a RS 485 serial link.
These PCMCIA cards are installed in the host slot 1 on the TSX SCY 21601 module.
TSX JNP cards comprise :
3 A removable cover

- ERR : card or link fault
- COM : activity on the line
1
TSX SCP CM 4030/CM 4530/CX 2030 cable
4
2 3
Characteristics
Structure Type Inter-PLC network

Topology Bus with passive tap links
Method of access Circulation by token
Physical interface RS 485 2 wire, 20 mA CL
Transmission Mode Half duplex on 2 wires

Format 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop
Data rate 19.2 Kbps
Medium Shielded twisted pair
Configuration Number of devices 32 (16 if the network includes SMC PLCs)

Length of bus 1300 m maximum without tap links
Tap links 15 m maximum
Services Data exchanged Distributed database :

- 128 16-bit words for a network with 32 stations (Series 1000/Premium),
- 64 16-bit words for a network including SMC PLCs.
Monitoring Network nominal duty control indicator lamp
43603/2
Jnet network
Software configuration, references
Software configuration
Installation procedures and access to the Jnet module configuration screen are identical to those for any PCMCIA type
communication module, using PL7 Junior/Pro software.
Configuration of a Jnet PCMCIA card is accessed using the

screen below :
Stations communicate between themselves automatically

once they are configured and connected to the same Jnet
network.
A debug screen is also linked to the module. It gives the

following information :
i Status of each station (RUN/STOP/ABSENT).
i Transmission error counter.
References
Connection elements to Jnet network

Description Number per Use Physical Reference Weight
PLC layer (1) kg
Jnet type III 3 maximum Type III 20 mA CL TSX JNP 112 0.110
PCMCIA cards slot on 19.2 Kbps
TSX SCY 21601
TSX JNP 112/114 module
RS 485 TSX JNP 114 0.110
19.2 Kbps
Description Use Power supply Reference Weight
(1) kg
2-channel Tap link of 2 x 2-wire devices – TSX SCA 64 0.570

subscriber socket Tap link of 1 Master device
(2 or 4 -wire) and/or 1 x 4-wire Slave device
(2) Fitted with 2 x 15-way female
SUB-D connectors
TSX SCA 64 Line Connection to the front panel – TSX SCA 10 0.030
terminators of TSX SCA 64 subscriber socket
(sold in lots of 2) 2/4-wire cabling
T-junction Connection to RS 485 via Passive TSX SCA 50 0.520

box tap link (Tee)
Connecting cables
From To kg
TSX SCA 50 Cables for TSX JNP 114 TSX SCA 50 3m TSX SCP CM 4030 0.160
isolated card box,
RS 422/485 2-wire (3)
tap link
TSX SCA 64 3m TSX SCP CM 4530 0.180
subscriber socket,
2/4-wire
Cable for TSX JNP 112 Multidrop Modbus 3m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160
20 mA CL card (3)
tap link
(2) 2 or 4-wire cabling, compatible with TSX SCA 64 subscriber sockets requires the use of a Modbus cable with an
external diameter of 10 mm maximum.
(3) Cable end fitted with flying leads.
43603/3
InterBus-S bus
Presentation
Characteristics :
page 43602/4
References :
page 43602/5
Presentation
The InterBus-S bus is a serial link type fieldbus for sensors and actuators which conforms to the requirements of an
industrial environment.
Premium
IP 65 Momentum I/O
Installation remote bus module
a 24 V
ATV-66
Installation remote bus module 2
1
Bus terminal module
a 24 V IP 65 Momentum I/O
Momentum
The topology of the InterBus-S bus is designed as a ring system with master /slave central access procedure.
It is subdivided into three parts :
i The remote bus 1 (bus devices use RS 485 point-to-point connection).
i The installation remote bus 2 (remote bus tap link via a bus terminal module). Its technology is particularly suitable for
IP 65 dust and damp proof systems.
i The local bus with TTL technology is particularly suitable for buses within a control cabinet.
Each bus subscriber comprises a transmitter and a receiver.

The InterBus-S system is like a data ring and has the structure of a shift register distributed on the bus. With its registers,
each module constitutes a component of this shift register ring. The InterBus-S master circulates the data in series on
this ring.
43602/2
InterBus-S bus
Description, connectable devices

Characteristics :
page 43602/4
References :
page 43602/5
Description
Premium PLCs are connected to the InterBus-S bus via the TSX IBY 100 InterBus-S bus module.
The TSX IBX 100 communication coprocessor can be used to connect a PCX 57 coprocessor integrated in a PC
compatible to the InterBus-S bus.
The front panel on the TSX IBY 100 module comprises :
1 1 A display block with 6 indicator lamps (on the card for the
TSX IBX 100)
2 A 9-way female RS 232 SUB-D connector : CMD Tool

software support (configuration software)
2
3 A 9-way female RS 232 SUB-D connector : InterBus-S
3 link (this connector integrates an additional power supply
for the fibre optic link)
Connectable devices
The TSX IBY 100 or TSX IBX 100 module acts as the master on the InterBus-S bus : other Schneider Electric devices
(slaves) which can be connected on the bus are :
i ATV variable speed drives
i XBT-BB operator terminals
i Telefast IP20 I/O interfaces
i Momentum I/O
i AS-i/InterBus-S gateway
i Any third-party device conforming to InterBus-S standard profiles
43602/3
InterBus-S bus
Characteristics, software configuration
References :
page 43602/5
Characteristics of the bus supported by TSX IBY 100 modules or TSX IBX 100 coprocessors
Type of bus Remote bus Installation remote bus Local bus InterBus loop
Structure
Type Industrial bus
Physical interface RS 485 RS 485 with a 24 V TTL Combined interface

in cable (vertically mounted signal
and a 24 V power supply)
Method of access Master/Slave
Transmission
Mode NRZ
Data rate 500 kbps
Medium - Twisted pair Special cable for : Special cable 2 x 1.5 mm2
- Fibre optic - Sensor and I/O module
- Wave guide rail 24V power supply
- Infra-red - data transmission
- Rotating collector
Physical configuration
Length of a segment 400 m maxi – – 200 max. in the loop
Maximum length of - Module and the 1st bus - Bus terminal module - Bus terminal module - Bus terminal module
cable between : terminal module : 400 m and 1st module : 50 m and 1st module : 1.5 m and 1st interface : 20 m
- 2 bus term. modules : 400 m - 2 modules : 50 m - 2 modules : 1.5 m - 2 modules : 10 m
Module and last The bus terminal module Bus terminal module Bus terminal module and
station on the remote bus : and last module : 50 m and last module : 10 m last module : 100 m
12.8 km
Number of tap links 16 max. – – 1 loop per bus term. module
Number of bus 254 max. – – –

terminal modules
Number of slaves 512 max. Total current of connected 8 63

modules : 4.5 A max.
Number of I/O 3872 I/3872 Q max. – – –

(4096 I/O in total)
InterBus-S services Implicit exchange of process data : 242 %IW and 242 %QW - Pre-processing - Logical addressing - Segmentation
Software configuration
The InterBus-S bus can be configured in 3 modes :
i Auto mode : This mode does not require the use of any special configuration software (I/O images are copied to
%IW, %QW implicitly). It facilitates the wiring check.
i Mode PL7 v IBY mode : This mode is used to define and load the configuration to the module (explicit assignment of
%IW, %QW). The CMD Tool software (1) is required in order to generate the configuration text file
i CMD v IBY mode : Reserved for configurations > 8 K words, and requires the use of the CMD Tool software.
PMS message handling (usable on PCP devices) is managed via standard OFs (Read-var, Write-var, etc).
The catalogue file which enables Schneider Electric devices to be integrated in the CMD Tool software is available on
our Web site :
i Address : www.schneiderautomation.com
i File for downloading : Schneider device catalog for CMD G4
(1) Contact your Phœnix Contact vendor.
43602/4
InterBus-S bus
References
Characteristics :
page 43602/4
References
Interbus-S bus modules

Description No. of modules Communication Services Reference Weight
per PLC/PC profile (1) kg
InterBus-S 0 on TSX 57-10 Master/Slave - cyclical variable TSX IBY 100 0.320
module 1 on TSX/PCX 57-20 0.5 M bps exchanges
for Premium 2 on TSX/PCX 57-30 - PMS messaging
PLC 2 on TSX 57-40 - bus operating
modes managemt
InterBus-S 0 on TSX 57-10 Master/Slave - cyclical variable TSX IBX 100 0.280
coprocessor 1 on TSX/PCX 0.5 Mbps exchanges
TSX IBY 100 for PCX 2 on TSX/PCX - PMS messaging
coprocessor 2 on TSX 57-40 - bus operating
modes managemt
Converter software
kg
Symbol Used to convert CMD symbols TLX LIBS CNVE –

converter into PL7 symbols
software
TSX IBX 100
Bus connection elements

(1) kg
Momentum Momentum I/O base units – 170 INT 110 00 –

communication on InterBus-S bus
module
170 INT 110 00
Remote bus – 100 m TSX IBS CA 100 –

cables
400 m TSX IBS CA 400 –
Installation Preformed cables for 0.110 m 170 MCI 007 00 –

remote bus linking 2 communication
cables modules
1m 170 MCI 100 00 –
Connecting TSX IBi to PC 3m 990 NAA 263 20 –

cable connection (with CMD Tool software)
9-way Remote bus cables – 170 XTS 009 00 0.045

SUB-D
connectors
(sold in lots of 2)
(1) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide : English and French.
43602/5
Profibus DP bus
Presentation, description, connectable devices

Characteristics :
page 43607/3
References :
page 43607/3
Presentation
The Profibus DP bus is a high-speed fieldbus which conforms to industrial communication requirements.
PC with PL7 and DP software
X-Way
Premium
Third-party Third-party
devices devices
Repeater
Momentum (3 max.)
With PL7 and DP software ATV
The Profibus DP is a linear bus with a centralised access procedure of the Master/Slave type. Only Master stations, also
known as active stations, have access rights to the bus. The Slave or passive stations can only respond to prompts.
Dialogue between Masters is also possible from some stations by means of a token bus protocol. The physical connection
is a single shielded twisted pair, but fibre optic interfaces are available to create tree, star, or ring structures. Compared
to the ISO model, only layers 1, 2 are implemented, since access from the user interface is made directly to the link layer
via simple mapping of variables.
Configuration
The Profibus DP bus should be configured by special software, reference TLX L FBC M, which should be ordered
separately.
The DP software can be used to generate an ASCII configuration file which should be imported into the PLC application
via PL7 Junior/Pro development software.
Description
Premium PLCs (TSX/PCX 57) are connected to the Profibus DP bus by a TSX PBY 100 module. This module can be
installed in any slot in the Premium PLC rack.
It comprises :
1 Host module for the PCMCIA card
2 Profibus DP PCMCIA card with its integral connecting

cable, 0.6 m long
3 T-junction box enabling the tap link of the main bus

490 NAE 911 00
1 2 3
Connectable devices
The TSX PBY 100 module acts as the master on the Profibus DP bus. The other Schneider Electric slave devices which
may be connected are :
i ATV variable speed drives
i Momentum I/O blocks
i Etc
i Any compatible third-party device with standard Profibus DP profiles
43607/2
Profibus DP bus
Characteristics, references
Characteristics of the bus supported by the module
Type of bus Profibus DP
Structure Type Industrial bus

Physical interface RS 485
Method of access Master/Slave
Transmission Mode NRZ

Medium Shielded twisted pair, fibre optic, infra-red
Physical Data rate/

configuration segment length 9.6 Kbps/1200 m (4800 m with 3 repeaters) to 12 Mbps/100 m (400 m with 3 repeaters)
Number of slaves 126
Number of I/O 3872 inputs/3872 outputs (242 %IW words, 242 %QW words)
Services Subset of Read/write DP slave I/O data

Class 1 Master Transfer slave diagnostic data
functions Set slave parameters (on power-up)
Check slave configurations (on power-up)
Subset of Manage monitoring requests : Global_CONTROL and Get_Master_Diag

Class 2 Master Master/Master dialogue is not supported
functions
References
Description Communication Services Reference Weight
profile kg
Profibus DP Master/Slave Class 1 and Class 2 Master TSX PBY 100 0.870
bus module 12 Mbps functions, see characteristics
assembly Profibus FMS message handling
for Premium not supported
TSX/PCX
PLCs
Profibus DP – Generates an ASCII configuration TLX L FBC M –

module file for the module to be imported
configuration into the PL7 application
software
+
Elements for connection to Profibus DP bus
kg
Momentum Profibus DP bus 170 DTN 110 00 –

communication on Momentum
module I/O sub-bases
Connectors Line 490 NAD 911 03 –

for communication terminator
module
+ Intermediate connection 490 NAD 911 04 –
Intermediate connection 490 NAD 911 05 –

and terminal port
TSX PBY 100
Description Length Reference Weight

kg
Profibus DP 100 m TSX PBS CA 100 –

connecting
cables
400 m TSX PBS CA 400 –

490 NAD 911 03
43607/3
CANopen bus
Presentation, description, connectable devices

Characteristics :
page 43615/3
References :
page 43615/3
Presentation
Originally used in the automotive industry, CAN is increasingly used in general industry. Several fieldbuses based on CAN
lower layers and components are available. The CANopen bus conforms to the ISO 11898 international standard,
promoted by the CAN In Automation association, which consists of users and manufacturers and offers an excellent
assurance of open access and interoperability due to its standardised devices and communication profiles.
The CANopen bus is a multimaster bus which ensures reliable deterministic access to realtime data in control system
devices. The CSMA/CA protocol is based on broadcast exchanges, sent cyclically or on an event, which ensures optimum
use of the passband. A message handling channel can also be used to define slave parameters.
The bus uses a double shielded twisted pair, on which 127 devices maximum are connected by simple tap junctions. The
variable data rate between 10 Kbps and 1 Mbps depends on the length of the bus (between 30 and 5000 m).
Description
Hardware description
The TSX P57 ii3M and T PCX 57 ii3M Premium platforms connect to the CANopen bus by means of the TSX CPP 100
type III PCMCIA card inserted in the processor or coprocessor communication port slot.
This card is supplied with a connection cable for the TSX CPP ACC 1 tap junction. This can be used to connect physically
2 CANopen buses, which are seen by the application as a single logic interface. In practice, this feature enables the useful
length of the bus to be doubled.
The TSX CPP 100 card comprises :

4
2 A removable cover (enabling mounting on a Premium
2 processor or coprocessor)
3 A connection cable length 0.6 m
1 3
4 2 diagnostic indicator lights
Connections to be ordered separately :

TSX CPP ACC1 tap junction equipped with one 15-way
SUB-D connector for connecting the TSX CPP 100 card
cable and two 9-way SUB-D connectors for connecting the
2 CANopen buses. This tap unit has 2 “bus activity” indicator
lights on the front panel.
Software description
The CANopen bus is configured using dedicated software, which should be ordered separately, reference TLX L FBC M.
This software is used to describe the configuration to be imported into the PLC application via the
PL7 Junior/Pro programming software.
If the configuration file is too large in relation to the Premium processor capacity (see characteristics table), it is possible
to load the Master configuration directly by inserting the TSX CPP 100 card in a PCMCIA port on the PC compatible.
In PL7, it is possible to configure the CANopen bus card so that the PLC processor/TSX CPP 100 card exchanges are
executed at the same rate as the Master task or the fast task. The process data exchanged with the Slaves can be
accessed by %MW standard words, the number of which depends on the type of processor and the task in which the
module has been declared. PL7 standard function blocks are used to define the device parameters.
Important note :
In addition to supporting the CANopen protocol which uses V2.0A standard CAN identifiers on 11 bits, the card enables
direct access to the CAN link layer via CAN V2.0B identifiers on 29 bits, used by the majority of CAN devices. In certain
applications this enables simultaneous control of CANopen devices and dedicated CAN products.
Connectable devices
The TSX CPP 100 module performs the role of the Master on the CANopen bus, and other Schneider Electric devices
(Slaves) which can be connected on the bus are :
i ATV-58 variable speed drives
i Ultimal motor combinations
i MHD Lexium servodrives
i Any third-party device which conforms to the CANopen standard profiles
i Any CAN device which uses CAN V2.0B identifiers on the ISO 11898 physical layer
43615/2
CANopen bus
Characteristics, references
Bus characteristics supported by the TSX CPP 100 module
Type of bus CANopen
Structure Type Industrial bus
Physical interface ISO 11898
Access method CSMA/CA, multimaster, producer/consumer principle
Transmission Data rate 10 Kbps to 1 Mbps
Medium Double shielded twisted pair
Physical Length of a 1 Mbps 800 Kbps 500 Kbps 250 Kbps 125 Kbps 62.5 Kbps 20 Kbps 10 Kbps
configuration segment according
to data rate (1) 30 m 50 m 100 m 250 m 500 m 1000 m 2500 m 5000 m
Number of slaves 127 max.
Software configuration TSX P57 2i3M TSX P57 3i3M TSX P57 453M
T PCX 57 203M T PCX 353M
Maximum number of internal words
supported as I/O according to
whether module configured as :
Master task 256 %MW words 512 %MW words 1792 %MW words
Fast task 32 %MW words 64 %MW words 128 %MW words
Size of file generated by 8 %KW constant words 16 %KW constant words 32 %KW constant words
the TLX L FBC M configurator
Services CANopen i Implicit exchange of Process Data Object via %MW words
i Explicit exchange of Service Data Object by READ_VAR/WRITE_VAR function block
i Compatibility with standardised device and communication profiles on CANopen
CAN i Explicit exchange of CAN PDU at link level using extended format identifiers on 29 bits (CAN V2.0B standard) by
SEND_REQ generic function block.
i Explicit transmission of CAN PDU using identifiers on 11 bits (CAN V2.0A standard ) by SEND_REQ generic function
block. Reception of this type of identifier is not supported.
(1) Possibility of doubling the length by connecting 2 buses on the same TSX CPP 100 PCMCIA card.
References
Description Services No. of modules Use Reference Weight
per PLC/PC (1) kg
CANopen - cyclic 1 on TSX P57 Processor or TSX CPP 100 0.120

Master exchange (PDO) 2i3/3i3/453M coprocessor
PCMCIA - CMS message 1 on T PCX 57 communication
card handling (SDO) 203/353 port slot.
- management Supplied with
of bus operating 6 m cable
modes
Separate parts
kg
TSX CPP 100
Tap Tap connection for the TSX CPP 100 card TSX CPP ACC 1 –
junction (15-way SUB-D connector) on 1 or 2
CANopen buses (9-way SUB-D connectors)
CANopen Can be used to generate a configuration file for the TLX L FBC M –
module TSX CPP 100 module, to be imported into the
configuration PL7 application
TSX CPP ACC1 software
43615/3
9 Services
Contents
Documentation pages 43900/2 and 43900/3
Indexes Product index page I0026/2
Product reference index page R0028/3
Technical information Power supply selection : consumption table i

TSX PSYi pages 43605/2 and 43605/3
Certification of control system products page X0010/2
Community regulations and protective treatment page X0011/3
The Schneider Alliances partnership programme pages 43614/2 to 43614/11
Schneider worldwide pages A0000/2 to A0000/4
S0214/3
Documentation
References
PLC products are generally supplied with :

i A B7 format multilingual Quick Reference Guide (128 x 92 mm) for TSX PLC bases and their modules
i A PL7 software installation and start-up guide, A5 format document (210 x 148 mm)
A multilingual online contextual help is integrated in PL7 software. Paper versions of hardware and software installation
manuals should be ordered separately.
Documentation on CD-ROM (English and French)

Description Composition Sold in Reference Weight
lots of (1) kg
TSX technical Includes all 1 TSX CD D MTE 11E 0.080

documentation documentation for
TSX PLCs, 25 TSX CD D MTE 2511E 2.000
TSX/TXT/TLX/PCX
software, networks,
buses and TSX/CCX
terminals
A5 bound documentation manuals (English)
PLCs
Description Included Reference Weight
with product (1) kg
Micro PLC hardware To be ordered separately TSX DM 37 33E 0.660

installation : bases, discrete
I/O modules, application-specific
modules, Telefast 2, process
power supplies and AS-i bus
Premium PLC hardware To be ordered separately TSX DM 57 40E 0.740

installation : bases, discrete
I/O modules, application-specific
modules, Telefast 2, process
power supplies and AS-i bus
Nano PLC T FTX 117 071E (FTX 117 terminal) TLX DM 07 117E 0.265
installation and
programming
TLX L PL7 07i30E (PL7-07 software) TLX DM 07 DSE 0.320
PL7 software
All PL7 software installation To be ordered separately TLX DOC PL7 40E 3.210
manuals
(reference, application-specific
functions, communication,
converters, runtime screens,
diagnostics)
SMC to PL7 Junior To be ordered separately TLX DC SMC PL7 J40M 0.080
application converter
(English and French)
SDKC software TLX L SDKC PL7 33M TLX DM SDKC PL7 40M 0.120
user manual
(English and French)
(1) Documentation in French, German, Spanish, etc, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
43900/2
Documentation
A5 bound documentation manuals (English)
Terminals
Description Included Reference Weight
with product (1) kg
XBT-H/P/E terminals To be ordered separately XBT-X000EN 0.200

user's manual
T XBT graphic stations T XBT F024i10E T XBT DM 00E 0.500

user's manual
CCX 17 application design TMX LP M17 XWF 6E TMX DM M17 W V6E 0.340
under Windows
Programming and maintenance FT 2010 1E FT 20 DOC 01E 0.180

terminal user's manual
Buses and networks
X-Way communication To be ordered separately TSX DR NET E 0.320

reference manual
Fipway network To be ordered separately TSX DG FPW E 0.140

installation and setup
Fipio bus To be ordered separately TSX DR FIP E 0.230

reference manual
Fipio/Fipway fibre optic To be ordered separately TSX DM OZD 01E 0.110

transceiver setup
Modbus Plus network To be ordered separately 890 USE 100 01 0.040

installation guide
Ethernet network (10base5) To be ordered separately TSX DR ETH E 0.120

reference manual
Ethernet-Transparent Factory To be ordered separately 490 USE 133 01 –

reference manual
Ethernet-Transparent Factory To be ordered separately 490 USE 134 01 –

pre-wired system
installation manual
AS-i sensor/actuator bus To be ordered separately XDOC5511EN 0.220

reference manual
Uni-Telway bus To be ordered separately TSX DG UTW E 0.060

installation and setup
Modbus bus To be ordered separately TSX DG MDB E 0.040

user's manual
InterBus-S module To be ordered separately TSX DM IBY 100E 0.140

installation manual
Profibus-DP module To be ordered separately TSX DM PBY 100E 0.140

installation manual
CANopen bus module To be ordered separately TSX DM CPP 100E –

installation manual
Jnet network To be ordered separately TSX DG JNT M 0.360

user's manual (English and French)
Momentum distributed I/O
Base unit To be ordered separately 870 USE 002 01 –

installation manual
Fipio communicator To be ordered separately 870 USE 105 01 –

installation manual
Modbus Plus communicator To be ordered separately 870 USE 103 01 –

installation manual
(1) Documentation in French, German, Spanish, etc, please consult your Regional Sales Office
43900/3
Product index
Description Reference Page Description Reference Page

8/16-channel sub-base with electromechanical Connecting cables
relays, plug-in terminal blocks ABE-7R08,16 14025/4 - Ethernet TSX ETY 48190/7, 43616/3
8/16-channel sub-base with solid state relays, - Fipio bus TSX FP CG 43593/3
plug-in terminal blocks ABE-7S08,16 14025/4 - Fipway TSX FP C 36360/3, 43597/7
16-channel sub-base with plug-in relays ABE-7P16, R16 14025/5, TSX FP CG 43592/3
14025/6 - for analogue I/O modules ABF-Y25 43530/7
A - for Bus X remote system TSX CBRY 43514/3
Accessories for - for communication module TSX SCY 43591/3
- distributed I/O modules TBX 42311/11 - for industrial operator panels CCX 17, TSX FP 43583/7
- Fipio dust and damp proof I/O modules TSX EF 42315/10 XBT-Z 43583/7
- power supply modules TSX PLP 43512/5 - for measurement and counter module TSX CCP, CDP 43540/5
- Telefast 2 sub-bases ABE-7ACC, 7BV 14040/2 and 43541/5
Adhesive label holder AR1-SB3 14040/2 - for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports T FTX 43606/2
AS-i bus power supply unit TSX SUP 43612/3 and 43606/3
B TSX PCD 43606/2
Batteries, back-up, for TSX PCU, PCX 43606/3
- coprocessor TSX BAT 43513/5 TSX SCP 43606/2
- industrial operator panels CCX 17 TSX PLP 43583/6 TSX SCY 43606/3
- processor internal RAM memory TSX PLP 43512/5 XBT-Z 43603/3
Bus X daisy chaining cables TSX CBY 43510/4 - for safety modules TSX CPP 43522/6
C - for terminals T CCX 43583/7
CCX 17 industrial operator panels T CCX 17 43583/6 - InterBus-S TSX IBS, IBI, 170 MCI
Communication card for operator TSX FPP, TSX MB 48243/5, 43602/5
dialogue terminals 36359/5, 36360/3 - Jnet TSX SCP 43603/3
Communication module TSX SCY 43591/3, - Magelis terminals 36360/3
43594/6, 43595/4, 43596/3 - Modbus/Jbus TSX SCP, SCY 43595/5
Connection accessories for - Modbus Plus 490 NAA 48232/3,
- analogue I/O modules ABE-7CP 43530/7 36360/3 and 43599/5
TSX BLY 43530/7 - Profibus DP TSX PBS 43607/3
TSX CAP 43530/7 - Profibus DP bus TSX PBS 43607/3
- AS-i bus XZ-SD, CB 43611/3 - serial link TSX SCP, SCY, PCD
- asynchronous serial link TSX P, PCD 43596/3 43596/3, 43606/2
TSX SCP, SCY 43596/3 - Uni-Telway TSX SCA, SCP, PCU
- counter modules ABE-7CP,7H 43540/5 43594/7
TSX CAP, CCP 43540/5 Connection leads for operator dialogue terminals TSX FP CG 36359/5
TSX CDP, TAP 43540/5 Connection modules for AS-i bus ribbon cable XZ-SDE 43611/3
- electronic cam module ABE-7 43542/4 Connection sub-bases
TSX CAP, TAP 43542/4 - “low-cost” passive ABE-7H20, 32 14025/2
- Ethernet 10base5 network TSX ETH 43616/3 - “miniature” passive ABE-7H16 14025/2
- Ethernet 10baseT network 490 NT, NO 48190/7 - passive ABE-7H08, 16 14025/3
- Fipio bus TSX FP ACC 48236/3 Connector for InterBus-S bus 170 XTS 43602/5
and 43597/6 Coprocessor
TSX EF 42315/10 - InterBus-S bus TSX IBX 43602/5
- Fipio/Fipway module TSX FP ACC 43589/5, - Premium with integrated Fipio link T PCX 57 43513/5, 43589/5
43593/3, 43592/3 Cover for connection module XZ-SDE XZ-SDP 43611/3
- InterBus-S bus 170 ENO, XTS 48243/5 D
- Jnet network TSX SCA, SCP 43603/3 Display units
- measurement and fast counter module ABE-7 43541/5 - with 2 lines of 20 characters XBT-H 36332/3
TSX TAP, CAP 43541/5 - with 8 lines of 40 characters XBT-HM 36351/3
- Modbus/Jbus bus TSX SCA 43595/4 Documentation TSX D, CD 43900/2
TSX SCP, SCY 43595/4 TLX D,
- Modbus Plus network 990 NAD 43599/5 490, 870 USE 43900/3
- Modem module TSXMDM 43598/3 Downloadable protocols for operator dialogue
- Momentum base units 170 XTS 48237/8, terminals XBT-L1 36359/5
48248/4 and 48238/9 Dust and damp proof connector for
- motion control modules for stepper motors ABE-7B 43551/5 - dust and damp proof output module TBX BAS 48243/5
ABE-7H16 43551/5 - Momentum 424 700 48243/5
TSX CAP,CDP 43551/5 E
- operator dialogue terminals XBT-Z 36359/5 Enclosure feedthrough
- racks TSX CBY, RKA 43510/4 - with CNOMO M23 connector ABE-7ACC8 14040/2
TSX TLY 43510/4 - with industrial connector ABE-7ACC80 14040/2
- SERCOS control modules 990 MCO 43555/5 F
- servomotor control modules ABE-7CP, 7H 43550/5 Fan modules TSX FAN 43510/4
TSX CAP 43550/5 Fibre optic cables 990 MCO 43555/5
TSX CCP, CDP, CXP Fipio/Fipway fibre optic transceiver OZD FIP 43590/3
43550/6 G
TSX TAP 43550/5 Graphic stations with keypad T XBT 36354/3
- Uni-Telway bus T FTX CB 43594/7 I
TSX CSA, SCA 43594/7 I/O modules
TSX P ACC 43594/6 - discrete TSX DMY 43520/10
TSX PCU, SCP C 43594/7 - distributed analogue TBX AMS 42313/5
TSX SCP, SCY 43594/6 - dust and damp proof monobloc remote TSX EMF 42315/10
Connecting cable - modular distributed TBX DMS 42311/10
- InterBus-S bus 990 NAA 43602/5 Input modules
- for Phytron power module TSX CXP 43551/5 - analogue TSX AEY 43530/6
I0026/2
Product index

- discrete TSX DEY 43520/9 PCMCIA memory cards for
- dust and damp proof monobloc remote TSX EEF 42315/10 - operator dialogue terminals XBT-MEM 36359/5
- modular distributed TBX DES 42311/10 - operator dialogue terminals with XBT-F screen XBT-MEM 36353/3
- monobloc distributed TBX CEP 42311/10 and 36361/3
- Momentum monobloc distributed 170 EDI 48243/5 - T XBT-F graphic stations T FTX RAM 36354/3
Installation remote bus cables for Momentum PL7 Junior, PL7 Micro, PL7 Pro
modules TSX IBI 48243/5 development software packages TLX 43100/17
InterBus-S bus module TSX IBY 43602/5 Power supply modules
K - AS-i bus TSX SUP 43612/3
Kit for fixing on solid plate ABE-7ACC 14040/2 - Premium TSX PSY 43512/5
L - process TSX SUP 43560/3
Line terminators Power supply units for distributed I/O modules TBX SUP 42311/11
- Bus X TSX TLY 43510/4, 43514/3 Process power supply unit TBX SUP 43560/3
- Fipio bus type M23 TSX EF 42315/10 Processors TSX P57 43511/8
- Fipio/Fipway TSX FP 43597/6 Processors with Fipio integrated link TSX P57 43589/5
- Modbus/Jbus/Jnet bus TSX SCA 43595/4 Profibus DP bus module assembly TSX PBY 43607/3
- Modbus Plus network AS MBKT 43599/5 R
990 NAD 43599/5 Racks, extendable TSX RKY 43510/4
170 XTS 43599/5 Racks, non-extendable TSX RKY 43510/4
M RAM memory extension for graphic stations
Memory extension cards for with keypad T FTX RAM 36354/3
- coprocessors TSX MFP 43513/5 Redundancy (Warm Standby) TLX CD 43566/6
- processors TSX MFP, MRP 43511/9 Relays
Modules - plug-in solid state input ABS-7E 14025/5
- analogue output TSX ASY 43530/6 - plug-in solid state output ABS-7S 14025/5
- Bus X remote system TSX REY 43514/3 - plug-in electromechanical ABR-7S 14025/5
- counter TSX CTY 43540/5 Removable continuity block ABE-7ACC2 14040/2
- electronic cam TSX CCY 43542/4 Replacement parts for
- Ethernet TCP/IP network TSX ETH, ETY - CCX 17 operator panels T CCX 43583/6
43667/7, 43601/13 - FT2100 terminal FT21 43586/5
- Master for AS-i bus TSX SAY 43611/3 - IP 67 I/O module XZ-LG, 170 XTS 42315/11
- measurement and fast counter TSX CTY 43541/5 - memory card handle TSX P 43511/9
- Modem TSX MDM 43598/3 and 43513/5
- Momentum installation remote bus 170 ENO 48243/5 - memory extension cards TSX BAT 43511/9
Momentum communication module - Momentum I/O modules 170 XCP, XTS 48237/8
- Ethernet network 170 ENT 48249/3 and 48238/9
- Fipio bus 170 FNT 48236/3 - processors TSX P 43511/9
- InterBus-S bus 170 INT 43602/5 - TBX analogue I/O modules TSX AAK 42313/5
- Modbus Plus network 170 PNT 48232/3, 43599/5 Ribbon cables for AS-i bus XZ-CB 43611/3
170 NEF 48232/3 S
- Profibus DP bus 170 DTN 43607/3 Safety modules TSX PAY 43522/6
Momentum documentation 870 USE 48248/4 Separate parts
Momentum dummy base unit 170 BDM 48237/8, 48238/7 - for CCX 17 industrial operator panels TSX FPP 43583/6
Momentum I/O base unit TSX MFP, MRP 43583/6
- discrete 170 ADM, ARM 48237/7 - for discrete I/O modules TSX BLY 43520/10
- discrete and analogue 170 AAM, ANR 48238/8 TSX CDP 43520/10
Momentum input base unit - TBX modules TBX CBS, GND 42311/11
- analogue 170 AAI 48238/8 Set of impedance matching resistors TSX AAK 42313/5
- discrete 170 ADI 48237/7 for TBX base units and 43530/7
Momentum input simulator 170 BSM 48237/8 Sheets of labels for operator dialogue terminals XBL-Y 36359/5
Momentum output base unit Software
- analogue 170 AAO 48238/8 - application development, for CCX 17
- discrete 170 ADO 48237/7 industrial operator terminals TMX LP 43583/7
Motion control modules - configuration, for CANopen module TLX L 43615/3
- for servomotors TSX CAY 43550/5 - configuration, for Profibus DP module TLX L 43607/3
- for stepper motor TSX CFY 43551/5 - for customer label marking ABE-7LOGV 14040/2
- SERCOS TSX CSY 43555/5 - for operator dialogue terminals XBT-LXBT-L 36359/5
O - InterBus-S symbol converter TLX L 43602/5
Output modules - OFS data server TLX CD 43105/3
- discrete TSX DSY 43520/9 - PL7 DIF application comparison TLX CD 43107/3
- dust and damp proof monobloc remote TSX ESF 42315/10 - PL7 SMC application converter TLX LC 43103/3
- Momentum dust and damp proof distributed 170 EDO 48243/5 Software extensions
- modular distributed TBX DSS 42311/10 - PL7 DIF TLX CD 43107/3
- monobloc distributed TBX CSP 42311/10 - PL7 SDKC TLX L 43101/3
P - PL7 SMC TLX L 43103/3
PC drivers TLX CD 43601/13, Sub-bases
43592/3, 43594/6 - I/O simulator ABE-7TES 43520/10
PCMCIA card for and 14040/2
- CANopen bus TSX CPP 43615/3 - redundant I/O ABE-7ACC1 14040/2
- Fipio bus, Agent function TSX FPP 43593/3 - splitter ABE-7ACC02 14040/2
- Fipway network TSX FPP 43592/3 - Telefast for safety modules ABE-7CPA 43522/6
- Jnet network TSX JNP 43603/3 T
- Modbus/Jbus bus TSX SCP 43595/4 Tap junction for
- Modbus Plus network TSX MBP 43599/5 - CANopen bus TSX CCP 43615/3
- serial link TSX SCP 43596/3 - Modbus Plus network 990 NAD 48232/3, 36360/3
- Uni-Telway bus TSX SCP 43594/6 and 43599/5
I0026/3
Product index

Tap link cables for Modbus Plus network TSX MBP CE 36360/3
and 43589/5
TBX communication module TBX LEP 42311/11
and 42313/5
Terminal block
- additional snap on ABE-7BV 43540/5
- for Momentum connection 170 XTS 48237/8, 48238/9
- for TBX connection TBX BLP 42311/11
Terminals
- with 2 lines of 20 characters XBT-P 36336/3
- with 2/4 lines of 40 characters XBT-E 36337/3
- with touch-sensitive graphic screen XBT-FC 36361/3
- with touch-sensitive graphic screen and keys XBT-F 36353/3
U
User’s manual for terminals XBT-H/P/E/HM 36332/3,
and XBT-X 36336/3,
36337/3 and 36351/3
W
Warm Standby TLX CD 43566/6
Weighing modules TSX ISP 43552/7
I0026/4
Product reference index
Reference Description Page Reference Description Page

043 509 Accessory for Modbus Plus network 43599/5 ABE-7H08R 8-channel passive connection sub-bases
170 AAI Momentum analogue input base units 48238/8 for discrete signals 14025/3
170 AMM, Momentum discrete and analogue I/O ABE-7H12R 12-channel passive connection sub-bases
ANR base units 48238/8 for discrete signals 14025/3
170 AAO Momentum analogue output base units 48238/8 ABE-7H16 16-channel connection sub-base
170 ADI Momentum discrete input base units 48237/7 for discrete signals 14025/3
170 ADM, Momentum discrete I/O base units ABE-7H18C “Miniature” passive connection sub-bases 14025/2
ARM 48237/7 ABE-7H20E “Low-cost” passive connection sub-bases 14025/2
170 ADO Momentum discrete output base units 48237/7 ABE-7LOGV Software for customer label marking 14040/2
170 BDM Momentum dummy base unit 48237/8, 48238/9 ABE-7P08T Sub-base for electromechanical or solid state relays 14025/4
170 BSM Momentum input simulator 48237/8 ABE-7P16F Sub-bases for plug-in solid state input relays 14025/5
170 DTN Momentum Profibus DP bus communication module 43607/3 ABE-7P08T, Sub-base for electromechanical or solid state
170 EDI Dust and damp proof distributed discrete input 16T output relays 14025/6
modules 48243/5 ABE-7R08, 8/16-channel sub-bases with electromechanical
170 EDO Momentum dust and damp proof distributed discrete 7R16 relays, removable terminal blocks 14025/4
output modules 48243/5 ABE-7R16T Output sub-bases with plug-in electromechanical
170 ENO InterBus-S installation remote bus module 48243/5 relays 14025/5
170 FNT Momentum communication modules ABE-7S08S Sub-base with solid state relay outputs,
for Fipio bus 48236/3 plug-in terminal blocks 14025/4
170 INT Momentum InterBus-S bus communication module 43602/5 ABE-7S16E Sub-bases with solid state relay inputs,
170 MCI InterBus-S installation bus cables 43602/5 plug-in terminal blocks 14025/4
Modbus Plus network drop cables 43599/5 ABE-7S16S Sub-bases with solid state outputs, plug-in terminal
170 NEF Momentum communication module for blocks 14025/3
Modbus Plus network 48232/3 ABE-7TES Discrete I/O simulator sub-base 43520/10, 14040/2
170 PNT Momentum communication module for ABF-Y25 Connecting cables for analogue I/O modules 43530/7
Modbus Plus network 48232/3, 43599/5 ABR-7S Plug-in electromechanical relays 14025/7
170 XCP Momentum replacement parts 48237/8, 48238/9 ABS-7E Plug-in solid state input relays 14025/7
and 48248/4 ABS-7S Plug-in solid state output relays 14025/7
170 XTS Connector for InterBus-S bus 43602/5 AS MBKT For Modbus Plus network
Modbus Plus network connection accessories 43599/5 - connectors for Momentum communication module 48232/3
Momentum replacement parts 48237/8,48238/9 - line terminators 48232/3, 36360/3, 43599/5
174 CEV Bridges for Ethernet network 48190/7 B
416 NHM Modbus Plus module for FT 2100 terminals 43586/4 Bus X Open Development of application-specific modules
424 700 Momentum M23 dust and damp proof connectors 48243/5 on Bus X 43614/2
490 NAA, Connecting cables for Modbus Plus F
NAD network 48232/3, 36360/3, 43599/5 FT 21 Programming terminals 43586/4
Connection components for Momentum Profibus DP Separate and replacement parts for FT 2100 43586/5
bus 43607/3 O
Modbus Plus network connection accessories 43599/5 OZD FIP Fipio/Fipway fibre optic transceiver 43590/3
490 NTW Shielded cables for Ethernet network 48190/7 T
490 NTC Shielded cables for Ethernet network 48190/7 T CCX Connecting cables for CCX 17 industrial
490 NOC, Fibre optic cables for Ethernet network 48190/7 operator panels 43583/7
NOT, NOR Front panels for CCX 17 industrial operator
490 USE Installation manuals 43900/3 panels 43583/6
499 NEH, Hubs for Ethernet network 48190/7 T CCX 17 CCX 17 industrial operator panels 43583/6
NOH T FTX CB Connecting cables for TER/AUX ports 43594/7, 43606/2
499 NES, Switches for Ethernet network 48190/7 T FTX RAM Memory extension for T XBT graphic stations 36354/3
NOS T PCX Premium coprocessor with integrated Fipio link 43589/5
499 NTR Transceivers for Ethernet network 48190/7 T PCX 57 PCX 57 coprocessors 43513/5
870 USE Momentum installation manuals 43900/3 T XBT Graphic stations with keypad 36354/3
990 MCO Fibre optic cables for SERCOS module 43555/5 TBX Accessories for distributed I/O modules 42311/11
990 NAA InterBus-S bus PC connecting cable 43602/5 TBX AES, Distributed analogue I/O modules 42313/5
990 NAD Local site tap for 48232/3, 36360/3 AMS, ASS
Modbus Plus network and 43599/5 TBX BLP Connection terminal block 42311/11, 42313/5
A TBX CEP Distributed monobloc input modules 42311/10
ABE-7ACC01 Kit for fixing on solid plate 14040/2 TBX CSP Distributed monobloc output modules 42311/10
ABE-7ACC02 Splitter sub-base 14040/2 TBX DES Distributed modular input modules 42311/10
ABE-7ACC1 Redundant output sub-base 14040/2 TBX DMS Distributed modular I/O modules 42311/10
ABE-7ACC2 Removable continuity blocks 14040/2 TBX DSS Distributed modular output modules 42311/10
ABE-7ACC8 Enclosure feedthrough with CNOMO M23 connector 14040/2 TBX LEP Fipio communication module 42311/11
ABE-7ACC80 Enclosure feedthrough with industrial connector 14040/2 on TBX sub-bases and 42313/5
ABE-7BV Additional snap-on terminal block 14040/2, 43540/5, TBX SUP Power supply unit 42311/11, 43560/3
43541/5, 43551/5 TCP Open Open access of Ethernet TCP/IP communication
ABE-7CPA Telefast sub-base for protocols 43601/8
- analogue I/O modules 43530/7 TLX CD PL7 Junior, Micro and Pro software development
- counter modules 43540/5 packages 43100/17
- electronic cam modules 53542/4 Software
- measurement and fast counter modules 43541/5 - OFS data server 43105/3
- motion control modules 43550/5 - PL7 DIF application comparison 43107/3
- safety modules 43522/6 TLX CD D X-Way drivers for PC 43601/13, 43592/3, 43594/6
ABE-7FU Fast-blow fuses 5 x 20 14040/2 TLX CD W Software for Warm Standby redundant architecture 43566/7
ABE-7H Telefast sub-base for TLX D Software installation manuals 43900/2
- counter modules 43540/5 TLX L Software extensions
- electronic cam modules 43542/4 - PL7 SDKC 43101/3
- measurement and fast counter modules 43541/5 - PL7 SMC application converter 43103/3
- motion control modules 43550/5, 43551/5 TLX L IBS InterBus-S symbol converter software 43602/5
I0028/3

TLX L FBC Configuration software TSX FP CA, Fipio/Fipway connecting cables 42315/11, 36360/3,
- for CANopen module 43615/3 CC, CP, CR 43597/7
- for Profibus-DP module 43607/3 TSX FP CG Connecting cables for terminals 43586/4, 36359/5,
TLX RCD, Update and upgrade software 43100/7 36360/3
UCD Fipio bus connecting cables 43597/3
TMX LP M Application development software for CCX 17 Fipway network connecting cables 43592/3
operator panels 43583/7 TSX FPP Fipio/Fipway communication card
T PCX 57 PCX 57 coprocessor 43513/5, 43589/5 for terminals 43586/4, 36360/3, 36359/5
TSX AAK Set of impedance matching resistors for Fipio card, Agent function 43583/6, 43593/3, 43590/3
analogue inputs 42313/5, 43530/7 Fipway card 43592/3
TSX AEY Analogue input modules 43530/6 TSX IBI InterBus-S installation remote bus cables for
TSX ASY Analogue output module 43530/6 dust and damp proof modules 48243/5
TSX BAS Dust and damp proof connector for output module 48243/5 TSX IBS InterBus-S remote bus cables 43602/5
TSX BAT Back-up battery for RAM memory card 43511/9, 43513/5 TSX IBX InterBus-S coprocessor for PCX coprocessor 43602/5
TSX BLY Screw terminal block for TSX IBY InterBus-S bus module for Premium PLCs 43602/5
- analogue I/O modules 43530/7 TSX ISP Weighing modules 43552/7
- discrete I/O modules 43520/10 TSX JNP PCMCIA cards for Jnet network 43603/3
TSX CAP Connecting cables for TSX MBP Modbus Plus communication card
- analogue I/O modules 43530/7 for operator dialogue terminals 36359/5, 36360/3
- counter modules 43540/5 TSX MBP PCMCIA card for Modbus Plus network 43599/5
- electronic cam modules 43542/45 TSX MBP C Cables for Modbus Plus network 36360/3, 43599/5
- measurement and fast counter modules 43541/5 TSX MDM Kits for connection to Modem module 43598/3
- motion control modules 43550/5, 43551/ Modem module 43598/3
TSX CAY Motion control modules for servomotors 43550/5 TSX MFP Flash EPROM memory extension cards for
TSX CBY Bus X daisy chaining cables for racks 43510/4 - CCX 17 industrial operator panels 43583/6
TSX CBRY Cables for Bus X remote system 43512/5 - coprocessors 43513/5
TSX CCY Electronic cam module 43542/4 - processors 43511/9
TSX CCP S Connecting cables for TSX MRP RAM memory extension cards for
- counter modules 43540/5 - CCX 17 industrial operator panels 43583/6
- electronic cam modules 43542/4 - coprocessors 43513/5
- measurement and fast counter modules 43541/5 - processors 43511/9
- motion control modules 43550/6 TSX P57 TSX 57 processors 43511/8
TSX CD D Documentation on CD-ROM 43900/2 TSX 57 processors with integrated Fipio link 43589/5
TSX CDP Connecting cables for TSX PAY Safety modules 43522/6
- counter modules 43540/5 TSX PBS Profibus DP bus cables 43607/3
- discrete I/O modules 43520/10 TSX PBY Profibus DP bus module assembly 43607/3
- electronic cam modules 43542/4 TSX P ACC Terminal port connection box 43594/6, 43595/4
- measurement and fast counter modules 43541/5 and 43596/3
- motion control modules 43550/6, 43551/5 TSX P CAP Handle for memory cards
- motion control modules for stepper motor 43551/5 TSX PCD Asynchronous serial link connection accessories 43606/3
TSX CFY Motion control modules for stepper motor 43551/5 Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards
TSX CPP CANopen Bus Master PCMCIA card, tap junction 43615/3 and TER/AUX ports 43603/2
Connecting cables for safety modules 43522/6 TSX PCU Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards
TSX CSA Uni-Telway bus connection accessories 43594/7 and TER/AUX ports 43606/3
TSX CSY SERCOS motion control module 43555/5 Uni-Telway bus connection accessories 43594/7
TSX CTC PLC, bus and network connection components TSX PCX Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards
for CCX 87 stations 43585/3 and TER/AUX ports 43606/3
TSX CTY Counter modules 43540/5 TSX PLP Back-up batteries for
Measurement and counter module 43541/5 - CCX 17 panel data
TSX CXP Connecting cables for - processor RAM memory 43512/5
- Lexium, NUM servo drives 43550/6 TSX PSY Power supply modules for racks 43512/5
- Phytron translator 43551/5 TSX REY Bus X remote module 43514/3
TSX DEY Discrete input modules 43520/9 TSX RKA Connection accessories for racks 43510/4
TSX DG, Installation manuals 43900/2, 43900/3 TSX RKY Extendable and non-extendable racks 43510/4
DM, DR TSX SAY Master module for AS-i bus 43611/3
TSX DMY Discrete I/O modules 43520/10 TSX SCA Connection accessories for
TSX DSY Discrete output modules 43520/9 - Jnet network 43603/3
TSX EEF, IP 67 remote I/O modules on Fipio 42315/10 - Modbus/Jbus bus 43595/4
EMF, ESF - Uni-Telway bus 43594/6
TSX EF ACC Dust and damp proof junction box, line terminators 42315/10 TSX SCP Connecting cables for
TSX EF ACC 2Connecting cables for IP 67 I/O modules 42315/10 - asynchronous serial link 43596/3
TSX EF C Connectors for IP 67 I/O modules 42315/10 - Jnet network 43603/3
TSX ETH - Ethernet TCP/IP network modules 43566/6, 43601/13 - Modbus/Jbus bus 43595/5
- Ethernet TCP/IP network mini transceiver 48190/7 - PCMCIA cards 43594/6, 43595/4, 43596/3
TSX ETH ACC Ethernet AUI connection accessories 43616/3 - PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports 43606/2
TSX ETH C, Ethernet AUI connecting cables 43616/3 - Uni-Telway bus 43594/7
ETY C TSX SCY Connecting cables for
TSX FAN Fan modules 43510/4 - asynchronous serial link 43596/3
TSX FP Connecting cables for CCX 17 - communication module 43591/3, 43592/3,
industrial operator panels 43583/7 43594/6, 43595/4
Fipio bus connecting cables - Modbus/Jbus bus 43595/5
and accessories 43589/5, 43593/3, 43597/6 - PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports 43606/3
Fipway network/Fipio bus fibre optic - Uni-Telway bus 43594/7
connection accessories 43590/2 TSX SCY C Connecting cables for integrated channel 43591/3, 43594/7
TSX FP ACC Fipio bus connection accessories 48236/3, 36360/3, TSX SUP 1 Process power supply units and modules 43560/3
43589/5, 43593/3, 43597/6 TSX SUP A AS-i bus power supply unit and module 43612/3
I0028/4

Process power supply units and modules 43560/3
TSX TAP M Splitter block 43550/5
TSX TAP S Encoder connection interface for
- counter module 43540/5
- electronic cam module 43542/4
- measurement and counter module 43541/5
- motion control module 43550/5
TSX TLY Bus X line terminators for racks 43510/4, 43514/3
T XBT-F Graphic stations 36354/3
V
VY1-X Cable with splitter block for
ATV-58F variable speed drive 43550/6
X
XBT-E Terminals with 2 or 4 lines of 40 characters 36337/3
XBT-F Terminals with graphic screen with
touch-sensitive keys and screen 36353/3
XBT-FC Terminals with touch-sensitive screen 36361/3
XBT-H Display units with 2 lines of 20 characters 36332/3
XBT-HM Display units with 8 lines of 40 characters 36351/3
XBT-L Software for operator dialogue terminals 36359/5
XBT-L1 Downloadable protocols for operator
dialogue terminals 36359/5
XBT-MEM PCMCIA memory cards for terminals
with graphic screen 36353/3, 36359/5
XBT-P Terminals with 2 lines of 20 characters 36336/3
XBT-PM Terminals with 8 lines of 40 characters 36351/3
XBT-Z Connecting cables for
CCX 17 industrial operator panels 43583/7
Operator dialogue terminals 36359/5
PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports 43603/3
XZ-CB AS-i bus ribbon cables 43611/3
XZ-SDE Connection modules for AS-i bus ribbon cable 43611/3
XZ-SDP Cover for XZ-SDE connection module 43611/3
I0028/5
TSX PSY power supply module selection document

(specimen to be photocopied)
The power required to supply each TSX RKY rack depends on the type and number of modules installed. It is therefore necessary to create a power consumption
table for each rack in order to define the most suitable TSX PSY power supply module for each rack.
The table below can be used to calculate the consumption on the three different voltages to be supplied (a 5V, a 24 V, a 24 VR).
Procedure :
i Check and choose a power supply module corresponding to the power supplies available for the 3 voltages.
i Check that the total power absorbed on these three voltages does not exceed the overall power of the power supply module.
i Values to be entered according to the type of Premium PLC configuration.
Reference Format Number Consumption in mA (1)
Rack no. S : standard Voltage a 5V Voltage a 24 VR Voltage a 24 V
D : double Module Total Module Total Module Total
Processor
with memory extension card TSX P57 103M S 440
TSX P57 153M S 530
TSX P57 203M D 750
TSX P57 253M D 820
TSX P57 303M D 1000
TSX P57 353M D 1060
TSX P57 453M D 1080
Discrete I/O
TSX DEY 08D2 S 55 80
TSX DEY 16A2 S 80
TSX DEY 16A3 S 80
TSX DEY 16A4 S 80
TSX DEY 16A5 S 80
TSX DEY 16D2 S 80 135
TSX DEY 16D3 S 80 135
TSX DEY 16FK S 250 75
TSX DEY 32D2K S 135 160
TSX DEY 32D3K S 140 275
TSX DEY 64D2K S 155 315
TSX DSY 08R4D S 55 80
TSX DSY 08R5 S 55 70
TSX DSY 08R5A S 55 80
TSX DSY 08S5 S 125
TSX DSY 08T2 S 55
TSY DSY 08T22 S 55
TSX DSY 08T31 S 55
TSX DSY 16R5 S 80 135
TSX DSY 16S4 S 220
TSX DSY 16S5 S 220
TSX DSY 16T2 S 80
TSX DSY 16T3 S 80
TSX DSY 32T2K S 140
TSX DSY 64T2K S 155
TSX DMY 28FK S 300 75
TSX DMY 28RFK S 300 75
Bus X remote system
TSX REY 200 S 500
Analogue I/O
TSX AEY 414 S 660
TSX AEY 420 S 500
TSX AEY 800 S 270
TSX AEY 810 S 475
TSX AEY 1600 S 270
TSX AEY 1614 S 300
TSX ASY 410 S 990
TSX ASY 800 (2) S 200 300
Safety
TSX PAY 262 S 150 200
TSX PAY 282 S 150 200
Counting,
motion control, TSX CTY 2A S 280 30
weighing TSX CTY 4A S 330 36
TSX CTY 2C S 850 15
TSX CCY 1128 S 660 15
TSX CAY 21 S 1100 15
TSX CAY 41 D 1500 30
TSX CAY 22 S 1100 15
TSX CAY 42 D 1500 30
TSX CAY 33 D 1500 30
TSX CFY 11 S 510 50
TSX CFY 21 S 650 100
TSX CSY 84 D 1800
TSX ISP Y100 S 150 145
Total (carry over to page 43605/3) Current (mA)
(1) Typical value given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.

(2) If using an external a 24 VR power supply, the 300 mA consumption on the internal 24 VR should not be included when selecting the rack power supply.
43605/2
TSX PSY power supply module selection document (continued)

(specimen to be photocopied)
Reference Format Number Consumption in mA (1)

Rack no. S : standard Voltage a 5V Voltage a 24 VR Voltage a 24 V
D : double Module Total Module Total Module Total
Carried forward
Communication
TSX ETY 110/210 (2) S 800
TSX ETY 110/210 (3) S 1200
TSX ETY 110 WS (2) S 800
TSX ETY 110 WS (3) S 1200
TSX ETY 410/5101 S 360
TSX IBY 100 S 500
TSX PBY 100 S 400
TSX SAY 100 S 110
TSX SCY 21601 S 350
TSX SCP 111 – 140
TSX SCP 112 – 120
TSX SCP 114 – 150
TSX FPP 10 – 330
TSX FPP 20 – 330
TSX JNP 112 – 120
TSX JNP 114 – 150
TSX MBP 100 – 220
TSX CPP 100 – 60
TSX MDM 10 – 195
TSX P ACC 01 – 150
Terminal
T FTX 117 ADJ 02 – 310
Total of
Consumption per voltage Total current (mA) the 3
x5V x 24 VR x 24 V powers
Power (mW) + (4) + =
Power available in mW Overall

Choice of power supply module
TSX PSY 1610 S 15 000 15 000 – 30 000
TSX PSY 2600 S 25 000 15 000 12 000 26 000
TSX PSY 3610 D 35 000 19 000 – 50 000
TSX PSY 5520 D 35 000 19 000 – 50 000
TSX PSY 5500 D 35 000 19 000 19 000 50 000
TSX PSY 8500 D 75 000 – 38 000 77 000 (5)
(1) Typical value given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.

(2) Without remote power supply (RJ 45).
(3) With remote power supply (AUI).
(4) If using an external a 24 V sensor power supply, the consumption on the a 24 V voltage should not be included.
(5) 77,000 mW at 60 °C, 85,000 mW at 55 °C or 100,000 mW at 55 °C when using TSX FAN fan modules.
43605/3
PremiumAutomation Platform
Automation Product Certifications
Product certifications and marine classification authorities
In some countries, certification of certain electrical components is enforced by law. A standard conformity certificate is
then issued by the official organization. Each certified product must carry approval symbols when enforced.
Use on board merchant navy vessels generally requires prior approval (= certification) of an electrical device by certain
marine classification authorities.
Key Certification body Country

CSA Canadian Standards Association Canada
C-Tick Australian Communication Authority Australia
UL Underwriters Laboratories USA
Key Classification authority Country

BV Bureau Veritas France
DNV Det Norske Veritas Norway
GL Germanischer Lloyd Germany
GOST Institut de recherche Scientifique Gost Standardt C.I.S.
LR Lloyd's Register United Kingdom
RINA Registro Italiano Navale Italy
RRS Register of Shipping C.I.S.
The table below shows the situation as of the 01.06.2000 for certifications obtained or pending from organizations for base
PLCs. Further information regarding certified modules can be obtained from your Regional Sales Office.
Normal execution Certifications Marine classification authorities

Certified
Pending certification
C-Tick
CSA ACA UL BV DNV GL GOST LR RINA RRS
Canada Australia USA France Norway Germany CIS Great Italy CIS
Britain
ABE-7
CCX 17
FT2100
Lexium MHD servodrives
Lexium BPH motors
Micro
Momentum
Nano
Premium
Quantum
TBX
TSX/PMX 47 to 107
TSX PRG LDR
TXBT-F
XBT-F/FC
XBT-H/P/E/HM/PM
X0010/2
Community regulations and protective treatment
Community regulations
European Directives
The opening of European markets implies a harmonization of regulations in the various European Union member states.
European Directives are documents used to remove obstacles to the free movement of goods and their application is
compulsory in all states of the European Union.
Member states are obliged to transcribe each Directive into their national legislation and, at the same time, to withdraw
any conflicting regulations.
The Directives, particularly those of a technical nature with which we are concerned, only set objectives, called “general
requirements”.
The manufacturer must take all necessary measures to ensure that his products conform to the requirements of each
Directive relating to his equipment.
As a general rule, the manufacturer affirms that his product conforms to the necessary requirements of the Directive(s)
by applying the è label to his product.
è marking is applied to Telemecanique products where relevant.
The significance of è marking
i è marking on a product means that the manufacturer certifies that his product conforms to the relevant European
Directives ; it is necessary in order that a product which is subject to a Directive(s) can be marketed and freely moved
within the European Union.
i è marking is intended solely for the national authorities responsible for market regulation. 4
For electrical equipment, only conformity of the product to standards indicates that it is suitable for use, and only a
guarantee by a recognised manufacturer can ensure a high level of quality.
One or more Directives, as appropriate, may apply to our products, in particular :
i The Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68/EEC : è marking under the terms of this Directive
could not be applied before 1 January 1995 and is compulsory as of 1 January 1997.
i The Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by Directives 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC : è
marking on the products covered by this Directive has been compulsory since 1 January 1996.
Protective treatment of equipment
Premium and Quantum PLCs meet the requirements of “TC” treatment (1).
For installations in industrial production workshops or in an environment which corresponds to “TH” treatment (2),
Premium PLCs should be enclosed in casings with a minimum of IP 54 protection as prescribed by standards IEC 664
and NF C 20 040.
Premium and Quantum PLCs are supplied with an IP 20 protection index. They can therefore be installed without
enclosure in locations with restricted access which do not exceed pollution degree 2 (control room which does not contain
a machine or dust-producing activity).
(1) “TC” treatment : all climate treatment.

(2) “TH” treatment : treatment for hot and humid environments.
© Copyright Schneider Automation 2000.
All rights reserved. No part of this work may be translated and/or reproduced or All products, hardware, software and services shown in this document are
copied in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic or mechanical including subject to modification and change without notice. Any descriptions or
photocopying, recording, taping or storage in an information retrieval system. specifications given herein shall not be capable as being interpreted as part of
or a condition of any contract relative to such product, software or service.
All software quoted in this document is the property of Schneider Automation,
or a third party which has granted rights to Schneider Automation. The supply Concept, Lexium, PL7 are registered trademarks of Schneider Automation.
of such software confers a non-exclusive licence on the recipient to use such Modicon, NUM, Telefast, Telemecanique, XBT are registered trademarks of
software solely for the purpose for which it was supplied. Schneider Electric.
Any copying of such software, etc. (except solely for the purpose of producing All other products and brands quoted in this document are registered trademarks
back-up and security copies) is totally forbidden. of their respective holders.
X0011/3
Schneider Alliances
Programme overview
The Schneider Alliances partnership programme is an answer to the many customers who are expecting their preferred
vendors to provide much more than simple products : complete integrated and validated automation solutions.
Schneider Alliances is both an industrial and commercial programme between Schneider and its partners providing
hardware or software automation products, system integration or services complementary to the Schneider offer.
www.schneideralliances.com The Schneider Alliances partnership programme comprises :
i Product vendors :
Design and distribute hardware or software automation products complementary to the Schneider offer which are being
integrated in Schneider solutions and architectures. This Schneider Alliances product offer includes industrial
peripheral equipment, network hardware and software, HMI and supervisory software, application software packages,
development and test tools.
The design and manufacture of these products may require a transfer of technology from Schneider.
Several hundred partner products, compatible with our various technologies, are available in a wide range of
applications : industrial peripheral equipment, communication interfaces and software, human-machine interface,
supervisory control software, variable speed drives, electro-pneumatic interfaces, etc.
Please consult our directories :
- Partnership directory, pages 43614/3 to 43614/5.
- Directory of partner products, pages 43614/6 to 43614/11.
i System integrators :
Create automation solutions using Schneider products and third-party devices and equipment. They deploy their
industry and application expertise to the implementation, installation and management of complete automation
projects.
Thanks to Schneider Alliances, customers are able to choose the best products on the market with an assurance of full
integration within Schneider architectures. They also have access to a network of system integrators specialized in their
industry and able to create their automation project in the best conditions of time and cost.
The Schneider Alliances partnership network is a win-win association which brings to everyone, product vendor or
system integrator, more business and turnover.
Bus X Open program
The Bus X Open program is aimed at Schneider Alliances partners who need to expand Premium platform-based
solutions by developing specialized application-specific I/O modules (which can be integrated on Bus X in TSX RKY racks
like any other module).
This offer, which enables a module to be developed within the framework of a Schneider Alliances partnership agreement,
comprises :
i A development kit (software and documentation)
i An industrial kit comprising a set of customizable Bus X hardware cards.
43614/2
Schneider Alliances
Partnership directory
Partner products
Miscellaneous sensor
Automation controller
Product category
HMI/Operator panel
Motion/axis control
interface boards
Communication
Communication
Communication
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Programming
HMI/SCADA
I/O interface
I/O interface
Pneumatic
hardware
hardware
Electrical
Services
software
software
software
actuator
Drive
Company
A
ABB Industrial Systems
ABB Power T&D Co.,
ABB Robotic
ACC Systemes
Acuity Imaging, Inc.
AFCON
Applicom International
Arc Informatique
Areal
Aro
ARORA Software
ARTEC Systems
Asco Joucomatic
AspenTech
Atlas Copco
Automated Mining Systems
Automated Solutions, Inc.
Automation & Control Technologies, Inc.
Automation & Systèmes
Automation Science, Inc.
AVG Automation
B
Beckwood Services, Inc.
Bihl & Wiedemann
Bitronics, Inc.
BLH Electronics, Inc.
C
Cape Software
Ci Technologies Pty Ltd.
CimQuest, Inc.- Products Group
Cimtech
Codra
Commercial Timesharing, Inc.
Control Techniques Drives, Inc.
ControlSoft, Inc.
Curry Controls Company
Cutler-Hammer, Inc.
CyberLogic Technologies, Inc.
Cycle Software, Inc.
D
Danfoss Electronic Drives
Data-Linc Group
Delta Computer Systems, Inc.
DLRA Projects (Pty) Ltd.
Doble Engineering
E
ELECTRO Industries / Gaugetech
Endress + Hauser
Escort Memory Systems
Etic
ExperTune, Inc.
43614/3
Schneider Alliances
Partner products
Product category
HMI/Operator panel
Motion/axis control
interface boards
Communication
Communication
Communication
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Programming
HMI/SCADA
I/O interface
I/O interface
Pneumatic
hardware
hardware
Electrical
Services
software
software
software
actuator
Drive
Company
F
Festo
Fiber Options, Inc.
Fisher Rosemount
FORTH, Inc.
Foxboro Company
G
Gener
Gensym Corporation
Georges Renault (GRIN)
GSE Systems, Inc.
H
Hewlett Packard
Hilco Technologies, Inc.
Hilscher GmbH
Hirschmann
HMS Fieldbus Systems AB
Honeywell
Honeywell Industrial Automation
I
Iconics, Inc.
Indramat
Industrial Systems Monitoring/AdVoTech
Integrated Control Technology Inc.
Integrated Industrial Technologies, Inc.
Intellution
IPAC Technologies, Inc.
Itmi Aptor
K
Kuka
M
Mac Valves, Inc.
MagneTek, Inc.
Mauell Corporation
MDT Software
Mettler-Toledo, Inc.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation Inc.
N
Nemasoft, Inc.
NexxCorp Information Systems, Inc.
Niobrara Research & Development Corp.
NovaTech, LLC
P
Panel-Tec, Inc.
Parker
ProSoft Technology, Inc.
Prosyst
43614/4
Schneider Alliances
Partner products
Product category
HMI/Operator panel
Motion/axis control
interface boards
Communication
Communication
Communication
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Programming
HMI/SCADA
I/O interface
I/O interface
Pneumatic
hardware
hardware
Electrical
Services
software
software
software
actuator
Drive
Company
R
RACO Manufacturing & Engineering
Robicon
S
SAF Drive Systems Ltd.
Schweitzer Engineering Lab., Inc.
Sciaky
Secheron Ltd.
Silicomp
Simulation Sciences
SISCO, Inc.
Sofrel Telecontrol
Spectrum Controls, Inc.
S-S Technologies Inc.
Steeplechase Software
SWAC
T
TA Engineering Co., Inc.
Tasnet, Inc.
Toshiba
TR Electronic
TURCK, Inc.
W
Weed Instrument
Westermo
Wonderware
X
Xycom, Inc.
43614/5
Schneider Alliances partner products
Product directory
Company Tel../Fax/URL Reference Category Technology

ABB Industrial Systems, Inc. Tel. +1 414-785-3416 CDI 300 Drive Modbus Plus
16250 W. Glendale Fax +1 414-785-0397 Advant OCS Miscellaneous hardware Modbus Plus
New Berlin, WI 53151 URL www.abb.com
United States
ABB Industrial Systems, Inc. Tel. +1 614-261-2000 ABB DCS 500 Miscellaneous hardware Modbus
16250 W. Glendale Fax +1 614-261-2172 Advant OCS Miscellaneous hardware Modbus Plus
New Berlin, WI 53151 URL www.abb.com
United States
ABB Power T&D Co., Inc. Tel. +1 610-395-7333 2000, 2000R series product family Miscellaneous hardware Modbus Plus
7036 Snowdrift Road Fax +1 610-395-1055 REL 512/506 Miscellaneous hardware Modbus Plus
Allentown, PA 18106 URL www.abb.com/papd REL 356 Miscellaneous hardware Modbus Plus
United States REL 350/352 Miscellaneous hardware Modbus Plus
PRICOMT HMI/SCADA Modbus Plus
ABB Robotic Tel. +33 (0)1 34 40 23 49 S4C Robot controller Motion/axis control Fipio
5, chemin de l’Equerre Fax +33 (0)1 34 40 23 80
ZI des Bethunes URL www.abb.se/flexible
F-95310 Saint Ouen L’Aumône
France
ACC Systemes Tel. +33 (0)3 44 38 66 66 CEASAR HMI/SCADA Ethway
5 rue des aTel.iers-BP 203 Fax +33 (0)3 44 38 66 67 Uni-Tel.way
F- 60 202 Compiegne Cedex URL www.acc.fr Modbus
France
Acuity Imaging, Inc. Tel. +1 603-598-8400 InTel.ligent Visual Sensor (IVS) Miscellaneous sensor Modbus Plus
9 Townsend West Fax +1 603-598-4684
Nashua, NH 03063 URL www.acuityimaging.com
United States
AFCON Tel. +1 847-397-6900 P-CIM HMI/SCADA Ethway
1014 East Algonquin Road Fax +1 847-397-6987 Fipway
Schaumburg, IL 60173 URL www.afcon-inc.com Uni-Tel.way
United States Modbus Plus
Applicom International Tel. +33 (0)2 32 96 04 20 PC1000, PCI1000, PC2000, Communication interface boards Modbus
43 Rue Mazagran Fax +33 (0)2 32 96 04 21 PC4000 and PCI4000 Uni-Tel.way
F-76320 Caudebec-les-Elbeufs URL www.applicom-int.com Fipway
France Ethway
Arc Informatique Tel. +33 (0)1 41 14 36 00 PCVUE 32, FRONTVUE, HMI/SCADA Modbus, Modbus Plus,
2 Avenue de la cristallerie Fax +33 (0)1 46 23 86 02 DATAVUE Fipway, Ethway, Uni-Tel.way,
F-92310 Sèvres France URL www.arcinfo.com Symax/Synet, Autres
Areal Tel. +33 (0)1 60 63 07 52 Topkapi HMI/SCADA Ethway
16 Avenue Jean Moulin Fax +33 (0)1 64 41 90 15 Fipway
F-77167 Savigny le Temple Uni-Tel.way
France Modbus
Aro Tel. +33 (0)2 43 44 74 00 Micro 2x16 III Miscellaneous actuator Fipio
1 Avenue de Tours Fax +33 (0)2 43 44 74 01 welding controller Uni-Tel.way
F-72500 Château du Loir URL www.aronet.com Modbus
France
ARORA Software Tel. +1 702-348-1816 System 816 HMI/SCADA Modbus, Modbus Plus
1755 East Plumb Lane, Fax +1 702-348-7336 Dialer2000 Communication software Modbus
Suite 159, Reno, NV 89502 URL [email protected]
United States
ARTEC Systems Tel. +1 954-771-9007 Drivers Communication software Modbus Plus
5530 NE 33rd Avenue Fax +1 954-771-9524
Fort Lauderdale, FL 33308 URL www.artec-systems.com
United States
Asco Joucomatic Tel. +33 (0)1 47 14 32 00 BUSLINK and BUSLINK ISO Pneumatic I/O interface Fipio
32 Avenue Albert 1°-BP 312 Fax +33 (0)1 47 08 53 85 pneumatic valves
F-92506 Rueil Malmaison URL www.ascojoucomatic.fr
France
AspenTech Tel. +1 281-584-1000 SetCim HMI/SCADA Modbus Plus
14701 St Mary’s Lane Fax +1 281-584-4329
Houston, TX 77079-2995 URL www.aspentech.com
United States
Atlas Copco Tel. +41 (0)21 863 63 63 Socapel PAM Drive Fipio
En Montillier,4 Fax +41 (0)21 863 63 99
CH-1303 Penthaz URL www.atlascopco.com/controls
Switzerland
Automated Mining Systems Tel. +1 905-713-3700 Broadband Gateway Communication hardware Modbus Plus
16 Mary Street, Unit 3 Fax +1 905-713-3708
Aurora, Ontario L4G 1G2 URL www.robominer.co
Canada
Automated Solutions, Inc. Tel. +1 707-578-5882 ASMBPLUS.OCX Communication software Modbus Plus
1415 Fulton Road, #205 Fax +1 707-579-5756 ASMBSERIAL Modbus
Santa Rosa, CA 95403 URL www.automatedsolutions.com
United States
Automation & Control Tel. +1 314-993-4080 GEMINI Miscellaneous software S800,
Technologies, Inc. Fax +1 314-993-7183 Quantum
11838 Borman Dr., Suite 200 URL www.act/stl.com
St. Louis, MO 63146-4113
United States
Automation & Systèmes Tel. +33 (0)4 93 07 51 07 IN’COM Communication interface boards Ethway, Fipway, Uni-Tel.way,
Domaine de l’Etoile Fax +33 (0)4 93 07 52 09 Modbus, Modbus Plus
Hameau Topaze Software development Services Ethway, Fipway, Uni-Tel.way,
F-06610 La Gaude France Modbus, Modbus Plus
43614/6
Product directory
Company Tel./Fax/URL Reference Category Technology

Automation Science, Inc. Tel. +1 508-358-4186 OMNIRAMA HMI/SCADA Modbus
150 Buckskin Drive Fax +1 508-358-4186 Modbus Plus
Weston, MA 02193
United States
AVG Automation Tel. +1 630-668-3900 Resolver Motion/axis control Modbus Plus
343 St. Paul Boulevard Fax +1 630-668-4676 Interface-DeviceNet Scanner Communication interface boards Quantum
Carol Stream, IL 60188 URL www.AVG.net Module
United States
Beckwood Services, Inc. Tel. +1 603-382-3840 DeviceNet interface Miscellaneous hardware Autres
P.O. Box 985, 27 Hale Spring Fax +1 603-382-3852
Road - Plaistow, NH 03865 URL www.beckwood.com
United States
Bihl & Wiedemann Tel. +49-621-339-2723 AS-i/Modbus Plus Gateway Communication hardware Modbus Plus
Kaefertaler Str. 164 Fax +49-621-339-2239 1090/1091
Mannheim, D-68167 URL www.bihl-wiedemann.de
Germany
Bitronics Inc. Tel. +1 610-865-2444 MultiComm Power Meter & Power Miscellaneous sensor Modbus
P.O. Box 22290 Fax +1 610-865-2743 Plex Digital Transducer
261 Brodhead Road URL www.bitronics.com
Lehigh Valley, PA 18002
United States
BLH Electronics, Inc. Tel. +1 781-821-2000 LCp-100, LCp-200, DXp-40 Miscellaneous sensor Modbus
75 Shawmut Road Fax +1 781-828-1451 Weight indicator controllers Modbus Plus
Canton, MA 02021 URL www.blh.com
United States
Cape Software Tel. +1 281-448-5177 VP Link Miscellaneous software Modbus Plus
333 N. Sam Houston Pkwy, Fax +1 281-448-2607
Suite 290, Houston, URL www.capesoftware.com
TX 77060
United States
Ci Technologies Pty Ltd. Tel. + 61 2-9855-1000 Citect HMI/SCADA Modbus Plus
Pymble NSW 2088 Fax + 61 2-9488-9164
Australia URL www.cit.com.au
CimQuest, Inc.- Products Group Tel. +1 610-935-8282 IN-GEAR ActiveX Communication software Modbus
518 Kimberton Road, Fax +1 610-935-1902 Modbus Plus
Suite 325 URL www.cimquest.com
Phoenixville, PA 19460
United States
Cimtech Tel. +32 (0) 67 88 36 66 CIMVIEW HMI/SCADA Ethway
20 rue de l’industrie Fax +32 (0) 67 88 36 88 Fipway
B-1400 Nivelles URL www.cimview.com Uni-Telway
Belgium Modbus
Codra Tel. +33 (0)1 60 92 34 34 Panorama HMI/SCADA Ethway
10 Avenue de Norvège, Fax +33 (0)1 60 92 34 35 Fipway
Narvik URL www.codra.fr Uni-Telway
F-91953 Courtaboeuf Cedex Modbus, Modbus Plus
France Autres
Commercial Timesharing, Inc. Tel. +1 330-644-3059 SA85 for Windows NT/Unix Communication software Modbus Plus
2650 South Arlington Road Fax +1 330-644-8110
Akron, OH 44319 URL www.comtime.com
United States
Control Techniques Drives, Inc. Tel. +1 716-773-2321 Unidrive, Mentor II/ Quantum III Drive Modbus Plus
359 Lang Boulevard Fax +1 716-774-8327
Grand Island, NY 14072 URL www.ctdrives.com
United States
ControlSoft, Inc. Tel. +1 216-397-3900 INTUNE V4 Miscellaneous software Modbus
14077 Cedar Avenue, Fax +1 216-381-5001 MANTRA NT Miscellaneous software Modbus
Suite 200 URL www.controlsoftinc.com Modbus Plus
Cleveland, OH 44118
United States
Curry Controls Company Tel. +1 941-646-5781 Modpac Plus RF Modem Communication hardware Modbus
P.O. Box 5408 Fax +1 941-646-3899 Modbus Plus
1019 Pipkin Road URL www.currycontrols.com
Lakeland, FL 33811
United States
Cutler-Hammer, Inc. Tel. +1 614-882-3282 PanelMate 500 HMI/operator panel Modbus Plus
P.O. Box 6166 Fax +1 614-895-7111 AMI 6000 HMI/operator panel Modbus Plus
173 Heatherdown Drive URL www.cutlerhammer.com
Westerville, OH 43081
United States
CyberLogic Technologies, Inc. Tel. +1 248-740-9842 MBX Driver Communication software Modbus, Modbus Plus
340 East Big Beaver Rd Fax +1 248-740-9821 Remote MBX Driver Communication software Modbus, Modbus Plus
Suite 208 URL www.cyberlogictech.com Virtual MBX Driver Communication software Modbus, Modbus Plus
United States MBX Bridge Communication software Modbus, Modbus Plus
Cycle Software, Inc. Tel. +1 617-576-6900 Live Data Communication software Modbus, Modbus Plus
130 Prospect Street, Fax +1 617-576-6501 Live Data Quantum Communication software Quantum
Suite 202 URL www.livedata.com
Cambridge, MA 02139
United States
Danfoss Electronic Drives Tel. +1 815-398-2770 VTL Series 5000 Drive Modbus Plus
2995 Eastrock Drive Fax +1 815-398-2869
Rockford, IL 61109 URL www.danfoss.com
United States
43614/7
Product directory

Data-Linc Group Tel. +1 425-882-2206 FDM7000, MDL500 FSK, Communication hardware Modbus
2635 151st PL. NE Fax +1 425-867-0865 LCM100 FSK, SRM6000,
Redmond, WA 98052 URL www.data-linc.com DLM4000-DL, DLM4000-LL,
United States CCS9000, LLM1 100 Bell 202 FSK,
SRM6200E Communication hardware Ethway
Delta Computer Systems, Inc. Tel. +1 360-254-8688 MMC120 00 2 axis Motion/axis control Quantum
11719 Northeast 95th Street, Fax +1 360-254-5435 MMC188/40/41 4 axis Motion/axis control S800
Suite D URL www.deltacompsys.com RMC100 2/8 axis Motion/axis control Modbus Plus
Vancouver, WA 98682
United States
DLRA Projects (Pty) Ltd. Tel. +27 11-886-4704 Adroit HMI/SCADA Modbus Plus
P.O. Box 483 - 108 Hendrick Fax +27 11-886-5739
Verwoerd Dr., Randburg URL www.dlra.co.za
Pinegowrie 2123
South Africa
Doble Engineering Tel. +1 617-926-4900 INSITE Miscellaneous software Modbus Plus
85 Walnut Street Fax +1 617-926-0528
Watertown, MA 02473 URL www.doble.com
United States
ELECTRO Industries/Gaugetech Tel. +1 516-334-0870 Futura+ Series Miscellaneous sensor Modbus, Modbus Plus
1800 Shames Drive Fax +1 516-338-4741 DWVA 300 Miscellaneous sensor Modbus
Westbury, NY 11590 URL www.electroind.com DMMS 300+ Miscellaneous sensor Modbus, Modbus Plus
United States
Endress + Hauser Tel. +33 (0)3 89 69 67 68 ZA 674 gateway Communication hardware Fipio
3 rue du Rhin Fax +33 (0)3 89 69 48 02
F-68330 Huningue URL www.endress.com
France
Escort Memory Systems Tel. +1 831-438-7000 CM900 Communication hardware Compact
3 Victor Square Fax +1 831-438-5768 CM1000 Communication hardware S800
Scotts Valley, CA 95066 URL www.ems-rfid.com CM41/CM42 Communication hardware Modbus Plus
United States
Etic Tel. +33 (0)4 76 04 20 00 FT300 concentrator Communication hardware Uni-Telway
13, Chemin du Vieux Chêne Fax +33 (0)4 76 04 20 01 Modem Communication hardware Modbus Plus, Uni-Telway
ZIRST 4201 URL www.etictelecom.com
38942 Meylan Cedex
France
ExperTune, Inc. Tel. +1 414-628-0088 PID analyser tuner Communication software Modbus
4734 Sonseeahray Drive Fax +1 414-628-0087
Hubertus, WI 53033 URL www.expertune.com
United States
Festo Tel. +33 (0)1 49 35 23 23 type 02, 03 and 04B (ISO), Pneumatic I/O interface Fipio
5 Rue Montgolfier Fax +33 (0)1 49 35 23 33 type 10 (CPV) and 12 (CPA) Pneumatic I/O interface Fipio
F-93116 Rosny sous Bois URL www.festo.com
France
Fiber Options, Inc. Tel. +1 516-567-8320 2291M Communication hardware Modbus Plus
80 Orville Drive, Suite 102 Fax +1 516-567-8322 2281M Communication hardware Autres
Bohemia, NY 11716 URL www.fiberoptions.com
United States
Fisher Rosemount Tel. +33 (0)1 49 79 73 00 MG-HRT-WF-002-FR Hart / Fipio Communication hardware Fipio
1 Rue Traversière, Silic 125 Fax +33 (0)1 49 79 73 99 gateway
F-94523 Rungis Cedex URL www.frco.com
France
FORTH, Inc. Tel. +1 310-372-8493 Express Miscellaneous software Modbus Plus
111 N. Sepulveda Blvd., Fax +1 310-318-7130
Suite 300 URL www.forth.com
Manhattan Beach, CA 90266
United States
Foxboro Company Tel. +1 508-543-8750 Intelligent Automation Series Communication interface boards Modbus
33 Commercial Street Fax +1 508-549-4800 Modbus Plus
Foxboro, MA 02035 URL www.foxboro.com
United States
Gener Tel. +33 (0)2 41 83 13 00 Modem Communication hardware Modbus
Z.I de Saint Lambert des Levées Fax +33 (0)2 41 67 19 20 Uni-Telway
BP 163 URL www.gener.fr
49414 Saumur cedex
France
Gensym Corporation Tel. +1 617-547-2500 G2 Real-time Expert System Communication software Modbus Plus
125 Cambridge Park Drive Fax +1 617-547-1962
Cambridge, MA 02140 URL www.gensym.com
United States
Georges Renault (GRIN) Tel. +33 (0)2 40 80 20 00 SMA 68000 screwing controller Miscellaneous actuator Uni-Telway
99 Route de Clisson Fax +33 (0)2 40 33 27 07
F-44230 Sebastien sur Loire
France
GSE Systems, Inc. Tel. +1 410-772-3500 SNCC D/3 Miscellaneous hardware Modbus Plus
9189 Red Branch Road Fax +1 410-772-3611 S800
Columbia, MD 02145 URL www.gses.com
United States
Hewlett Packard Tel. +33 (0)1 69 82 60 60 Driver HP UX Communication software Ethway
2, avenue du Lac Fax +33 (0)1 69 91 84 32
F- 91040 Evry URL www.hp.com
France
43614/8
Product directory

Hilco Technologies, Inc. Tel. +1 314-298-9100 Monitrol HMI/SCADA Modbus Plus
3300 Rider Trail South Fax +1 314-298-1729
Suite 300 URL www.hilco.com
Earth City, MO 63045-1338
United States
Hilscher GmbH Tel. +49 6190 9907 0 KPO 104-MBP, PVK 20-MBP Communication interface boards Modbus Plus
Rheinstrabe 78 Fax +49 6190 9907 50 CIF 30-MBP, SCA-MBP
Hattersheim, D-65796 URL www.hilscher.com
Germany
Hirschmann Tel. +49 7127 14 1479 OZD FIP Communication hardware Fipio, Fipway
PO Box 1649 Fax +49 7127 14 1495
D-72606 Nürtingen URL www.hirschmann.com
Germany
HMS Fieldbus Systems AB Tel. +46 (0)35 168 200 AnyBus AB64 Communication interface boards Fipio
Pilefeltsgatan 73 Fax +46 (0)35 168 210 AnyBus Data Transfer Communication interface boards Modbus
S-302 50 Halmstad URL www.hms.se Modbus Plus
Sweden
Honeywell Tel. +33 (0)1 60 19 80 00 Excel 500 Automation controller Fipway
Parc Technologique Fax +33 (0)1 60 19 81 81
Bât. Mercury BP 87 URL www.honeywell.com
F-91193 Gif sur Yvette
France
Honeywell Industrial Automation Tel. +1 602-313-5000 SCAN 3000 Miscellaneous hardware Modbus
16404 N. Black Canyon Fax +1 602-313-4990 Modbus Plus
Highway Phoenix, AZ 85053 URL www.iac.honeywell.com
United States
Iconics, Inc. Tel. +1 508-543-8600 GENISIS-32 HMI/SCADA Modbus Plus
100 Foxborough Boulevard Fax +1 508-543-1503
Foxborough, MA 02035 URL www.iconics.com
United States
Indramat Tel. +49 (0)93 5240 0 MTC 200 CNC Motion/axis control Fipway
Dr Nebel strasse, 2 Fax +49 (0)93 5240 4885
D-97816 Lohr am Main URL www.indramat.com
Germany
Industrial Systems Tel. +1 205-824-0222 Voice MMI HMI/operator panel Modbus, Modbus Plus
Monitoring/AdVoTech Fax +1 205-824-0291 ISM communicator HMI/operator panel Modbus
3201 Lorna Road URL www.voicemmi.com
Birmingham, AL 35216
United States
Integrated Control Tel. +1 978-557-5882 IBS-802 gateway Interbus-S Communication hardware Modbus Plus
Technology Inc. Fax +1 978-557-5884
871 Turnpike Street, Suite 208 URL www.ictglobal.com
North Andover, MA 01845
United States
Integrated Industrial Tel. +1 412-828-1200 IFC 020 2-Axis resolver Motion/axis control Quantum
Technologies, Inc. Fax +1 412-828-0320
221 Seventh Street, Suite 200 URL www.i2t-inmotion.com SCM 020/120 Stepper Motor Motion/axis control Quantum
Pittsburgh, PA 15238 Control Compact
United States
Intellution Tel. +1 781-769-8878 Fix Dmacs HMI/SCADA Modbus Plus
1 Edgewater Drive Fax +1 781-769-1990
Norwood, MA 02062 URL www.intellution.com
United States
IPAC Technologies, Inc. Tel. +1 219-464-7212 IPACT SA85 Device Driver Communication software Modbus Plus
260 South Campbell Fax +1 219-462-5387 IPACT Communication Library Communication software Modbus Plus
Valparaiso, IN 46385 URL www.ipact.com
United States
Itmi Aptor Tel. +33 (0)4 76 41 40 00 CIU communicator Communication hardware Ethway
61 Chemin du Vieux Chêne Fax +33 (0)4 76 41 28 05 Fipway
F-38244 Meylan France
Kuka Tel. +33 (0)1 69 79 80 00 KR C1 robot controller Motion/axis control Fipio
1 Rue Blaise Pascal Fax +33 (0)1 69 79 80 01
F-91380 Chilly Mazarin URL www.kuka.com
France
Mac Valves, Inc. Tel. +1 248-624-7700 Air Valve Interface Pneumatic I/O interface Modbus Plus
30569 Beck Road Fax +1 248-624-0549
Wixom, MI 48393-7011 URL www.macvalves.com
United States
MagneTek, Inc. Tel. +1 414-782-0200 GPD 515 Drive Modbus Plus
16555 W Ryerson Road Fax +1 414-782-1283 GPD333AC Drive Modbus Plus
New Berlin, WI 53151 URL www.magnetek.com
United States
Mauell Corporation Tel. +1 717-432-8686 DI64 Plus 99-61-886 Electrical I/O interface Modbus Plus
31 Old Cabin Hollow Road Fax +1 717-432-8688 DO128 Plus 99-61-P91N Electrical I/O interface Modbus Plus
Dillsburg, PA 17019-8815 URL www.mauell-us.com
United States
MDT Software Tel. +1 678-297-1050 Mass Autosave Miscellaneous software Modbus
2520 NorthWinds Parkway Fax +1 678-297-1003 Modbus Plus
Suite 100 URL www.mdtsoft.com
Alpharetta GA678/297-1000
United States
43614/9
Product directory

Mettler-Toledo, Inc. Tel. +1 614-438-4511 Jaguar Weigh Scale Miscellaneous sensor Modbus Plus
350 West Wilson Bridge Road Fax +1 614-438-4770
Worthington, OH 43085 URL www.mt.com
United States
Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc. Tel. +1 847-478-2000 FR-A500 Drive Modbus Plus
500 Corporate Woods Parkway Fax +1 847-478-0327
Vermon Hills IL60061 URL www.meau.ea.com
United States
Nemasoft, Inc. Tel. +1 508-698-3611 Paragon 500/550, AutoNet, HMI/SCADA Modbus
124 Washington St., Suite 201 Fax +1 508-698-3782 PowerVIEW Modbus Plus
Foxboro, MA 02035 URL www.nemasoft.com
United States
NexxCorp Information Tel. +1 905-433-7566 ModLINX Communication software Modbus
Systems, Inc. Fax +1 905-579-5699 Modbus Plus
235 Beatty Avenue
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 3B4
Canada
Niobrara Research & Tel. +1 417-624-8918 MEB-TCP Communication hardware Modbus Plus
Development Corp. Fax +1 417-624-8920 Bridge PMN Modbus Plus to Communication hardware Modbus Plus
P.O. Box 3418 URL www.niobrara.com POWERLOGIC
2400 Tanyard Road QSPXM Seriplex Master Communication interface boards Quantum
Joplin, MO 64803 QUCM Universal Communications Communication interface boards Quantum
United States MUCM-B Communication interface boards Momentum
NovaTech, LLC Tel. +1 913-451-1880 Modem Micro PLC Communication interface boards Autres
13604 West 107th Street Fax +1 913-451-2845
Lenexa, KS 66215 URL www.novatech-llc.com
United States
Panel-Tec, Inc. Tel. +1 256-534-8132 BG-3500 Communication interface boards Modbus Plus
P.O. Box 23942607 Fax +1 256-534-4769 MD-3000 Communication interface boards Modbus Plus
Leeman Ferry Road, Suite 7 URL www.panel-tec.com
Huntsville, AL 35804
United States
Parker Tel. +33 (0)2 32 23 34 00 Valvetronic 164 Pneumatic I/O interface Fipio
Rue Henri Becquerel Fax +33 (0)2 32 28 98 07
F-27031 Evreux URL www.parker.com
France
ProSoft Technology, Inc. Tel. +1 805-664-7208 SCANport Communication Communication hardware Modbus Plus
9801 Camino Media, # 105 Fax +1 805-664-7233 Adapter 1560-MBP
Bakersfield, CA 93311 URL www.prosoft-technology.com
United States
Prosyst Tel. +33 (0)3 20 90 43 33 SIMAC Miscellaneous software Modbus Plus
70 Rue Jean Jaures Fax +33 (0)3 20 90 43 34
59770 - Marly France URL www.prosyst.fr
RACO Manufacturing Tel. +1 510-658-6713 Verbatim Gateway HMI/operator panel Modbus Plus
& Engineering Fax +1 510-658-3153
1400 62nd Street URL www.racoman.com
Emeryville, CA 94608
United States
Robicon Tel. +1 724-339-9500 Clean Power, 454, Perfect Drive Modbus
500 Hunt Valley Drive Fax +1 724-339-8100 Harmony Modbus Plus
New Kensington, PA 15068 URL www.robicon.com
United States
SAF Drive Systems Ltd. Tel. +1 519-743-5491 SAFphire - Programmable Automation controller Modbus
88 Ardelt Avenue Fax +1 519-743-3610 Linear Controller Modbus Plus
Kitchener, Ontario N2C 2C9 URL www.safdrives.com Symax/Synet
Canada
Schweitzer Engineering Tel. +1 509-332-1890 SEL-2711 Communication interface boards Modbus Plus
Laboratories, Inc. Fax +1 509-332-6187
2350 NE Hopkins Court URL www.seline.com
Pullman, WA 99163-5603
United States
Sciaky Tel. +33 (0)1 45 73 43 00 CPS2000 RL2 Miscellaneous actuator Fipio
119 Quai Jules Guesde, BP 43 Fax +33 (0)1 46 82 58 80
F-94401 Vitry sur Seine URL www.sciaky.com
France
Secheron Ltd. Tel. +41 22 739 4111 VMB OZ Communication interface boards Modbus Plus
14 Avenue de Secheron Fax +41 22 738 7305
Geneva 21 URL www.secheron.com
Switzerland
Silicomp Tel. +33 (0)4 76 41 66 66 Software development Services Fipio
195 Rue Lavoisier Fax +33 (0)4 76 41 66 67 Fipway
F-38330 Montbonnot St Martin URL www.silicomp.com
France
Simulation Sciences Tel. +1 713-683-1710 AIM HMI/SCADA Modbus
2500 City West Boulevard, Fax +1 713-683-6613 AIM\AT Modbus Plus
Ste. 1200, Houston, TX 77042 URL www.simsci.com
United States
SISCO, Inc. Tel. +1 810-254-0020 AX-S4 MMS Miscellaneous software Modbus
6605 19 1/2 Mile Road Fax +1 810-254-0053 Modbus Plus
Sterling Heights, URL www.sisconet.com
MI 48314-1408
United States
43614/10
Product directory

Sofrel Telecontrol Tel. +33 (0)2 99 04 89 00 SOFREL S50, RTU HMI/SCADA Uni-Telway
2 rue du Plessis Fax +33 (0)2 99 04 89 01 for technical facilities Modbus
F-35770 Vern sur Seiche SOFREL S50 Thermix, RTU HMI/SCADA Uni-Telway
France for HVAC applications Modbus
Spectrum Controls, Inc. Tel. +1 425-746-9481 140 ACI 051 : 32-Ch analog input Electrical I/O interface Quantum
P.O. Box 5533 Fax +1 425-641-9473 SOI-260 HMI/operator panel S800
2700 Richards Road, URL www.spectrumctls.com
Suite 200
Bellevue, WA 98005
United States for HVAC applications Modbus
S-S Technologies Inc. Tel. +1 519-725-5136 Universal Communication System Communication interface boards Modbus
50 Northland Road Fax +1 519-725-1515 Modicon RIO Interface Card Communication interface boards S800
Waterloo, Ontario N2V 1N3 URL www.sstech.on.ca QNX 4.X Device Administrator Communication software Modbus Plus
Canada PICS Simulation software Miscellaneous software Autres
X-Link Communication software Modbus, Modbus Plus
Steeplechase Software Tel. +1 734-975-8100 Visual Logic Controller - VLC-PDK Miscellaneous software Autres
1330 Eisenhower Place Fax +1 734-975-8123
Ann Arbor, MI 48108 URL www.steeplechase.com
United States
SWAC Tel. +49 89 316 8660 BTK 16, 32, 64, BT.GDA HMI/operator panel Modbus Plus
Odenpullach 1 Fax +49 89 316 866 80
82041 Oberhaching URL www.swac.de
Germany
TA Engineering Co., Inc. Tel. +1 925-376-8500 AIMAX for Windows HMI/SCADA Modbus
1150 Moraga Way Fax +1 925-376-4977 Modbus Plus
Moraga, CA 94556 URL www.ta-eng.com
United States
Tasnet, Inc. Tel. +1 727-544-1555 Substation Automation and Communication interface boards Modbus
5271 102nd Ave. North Fax +1 727-545-8975 Communication Software Systems
Pinellas Park, FL 33782 URL www.tasnet.com
United States
Toshiba Tel. +1 713-466-0277 G3 Inverter Drive Modbus Plus
13131 West Little York Rd Fax +1 713-466-8773
Houston, TX 77041 URL www.toshiba.com
United States
TR Electronic Tel. +49 (0) 7425 228 0 CE65 absolute rotary encoders Miscellaneous sensor Fipio
Eglishalde, 6 Fax +49 (0) 7425 228 33 LA 68K linear absolute coders Miscellaneous sensor Fipio
D-78647 Trossingen URL www.trelectronic.com
Germany
TURCK, Inc. Tel. +1 612-553-7300 Sensoplex MC Communication interface boards Modbus Plus
3000 Campus Drive Fax +1 612-553-0708
Plymouth, MN 55441 URL www.turck.com
United States
Weed Instrument Tel. +1 512-434-2844 Fiber Optic Modem 6000 EoTec Communication hardware Modbus
P.O. Box 300 Fax +1 512-434-2851 Modbus Plus
707 Jeffrey Way URL www.weed instrument.com S800
Round Rock, TX 78680-0300
United States
Westermo Tel. +46 16 61200 Modem Communication hardware Modbus
Teleindustri AB SE-640 Fax +46 16 61180 Uni-Telway
40 Stora Sundby URL www.westermo.se
Sweeden
Wonderware Tel. +1 949-727-3200 Intouch HMI/SCADA Ethway
100 Technology Drive Fax +1 949-727-3270 Fipway
Irvine, CA 92718 URL www.wonderware.com Uni-Telway
United States Modbus Plus
Xycom, Inc. Tel. +1 734-429-4971 34XX HMI/operator panel Uni-Telway
750 North Maple Road Fax +1 734-429-1010 Modbus
Saline URL www.xycom.com Modbus Plus
Michigan MI 48176
United States
43614/11
Schneider Electric worldwide Up-dated : 21-12-1999
Country Address Country Address
Algeria t Schneider Electric Tel: (213) 269 80 03 / 08 Finland t Schneider Electric Oy Tel: (358) 9 527 000
Bureau de Liaison Algérie Fax: (213) 269 80 02 Sinikalliontie 16 Fax: (358) 9 5270 0376
04 rue du Berry - El Mouradia 02630 Espoo www.schneider-electric.fi
16070 Algiers France t Schneider Electric SA Tel: 33 (0)1 41 29 82 00
Argentina t Schneider Argentina Tel: (54) 17 16 88 88 5, rue Nadar Fax: 33 (0)1 47 51 80 20
Viamonte 2850 Fax: (54) 17 16 88 77 92500 Rueil Malmaison www.schneider-electric.fr
1678 Caseros (provincia Buenos Aires) www.schneider-electric.com.ar Germany t Schneider Electric GmbH Tel: (49) 2102 4040
Australia t Schneider Electric (Australia) Pty Ltd Tel: (61) 298 51 28 00 Gothaer Straße 29 Fax: (49)2102 4049256
2, Solent circuit Fax: (61) 296 29 83 40 D-40880 Ratingen www.schneider-electric.de
Norwest Business Park www.schneider.com.au Greece t Schneider Electric AE Tel: (30) 16 29 52 00
NSW 2153 Baulkham Hill 14th km - RN Athens-Lamia Fax: (30) 16 29 52 10
Austria t Schneider Austria Ges.m.b.H. Tel: (43) 1 610 540 GR - 14564 Kifissia www.schneider-electric.com.gr
Birostrasse 11 Fax: (43) 1 610 54 65 Guadeloupe t Schneider Electric Tel : (05) 96 51 06 00
1239 Wien www.schneider-electric.at Immeuble Cottrell Fax : (05) 96 51 11 26
Bahrain t Schneider Electric Tel : (973) 227 897 ZI de la Lézarde
Floor 1 - Juma Building Fax : (973) 218 313 97232 Le Lamentin
Abu Horaira Avenue Hong Kong t Schneider Electric (Hong-Kong) Ltd Tel : (852) 25 65 06 21
P.O. Box 355
304 Manama Room 3108-28, 31th Floor, Fax : (852) 28 11 10 29
Belgium t Schneider Electric nv/sa Tel: (32) 2 373 7711 Sun Hung Kai Centre
Dieweg 3 Fax: (32) 2 375 3858 30 Harbour Road, Wanchai
1180 Brussels www.schneider-electric.be Hungary t Schneider Electric Hungaria Villamossagi Rt. Tel : (36) 1 382 26 06
Brazil t Schneider Electric Brasil S.A. Tel: (55) 115 24 52 33 Fehérvari ut 108 - 112 Fax : (36) 1 206 14 29
Avenida Das Nações Unidas 23223 Fax: (55) 115 22 51 34 H-1116 Budapest www.schneider-electric.hu
Jurubatuba www.schneider.com.br India t Schneider Electric India Pvt Ltd. Tel : (91) 116 25 76 58
CEP 04795-907 São Paulo-SP D-27 South Extension Part II Fax : (91) 116 25 80 80
Bulgaria t Schneider Electric Tel: (359) 2 919 42 110 049 New Dehli www.schneiderelectric.in.com
Expo 2000 - Boulevard Vaptzarov Fax: (359) 2 962 44 39 Indonesia t P.T. Schneider Indonesia Tel: (62) 217 50 44 06
1407 Sofia www.schneiderelectric.bg Ventura Building 7th Floor Fax: (62) 217 50 44 15/16
Cameroon t Schneider Electric SA - Cameroun Tel: (237) 42 69 30 Jalan R.A. Kartini - Kav.26 www.schneider-electric.co.id
16, rue de l'hôtel de ville - BP12087 Fax: (237) 43 11 94 Cilandak
Douala 12430 Jakarta
Canada t Schneider Canada Tel: (1) 416 752 8020 Iran t Telemecanique Iran Tel: (98) 218 71 01 42
19, Waterman Avenue Fax: (1) 416 752 4203 1047 Avenue VALI ASSR Fax: (98) 218 71 81 87
M4 B1Y2 Toronto - Ontario www.schneider.ca P.O. Box 15875-3547
Chile t Schneider Electric Chile S.A. Tel: (56) 2 444 3000 15116 Teheran
Avda. Presidente Eduardo Frei Montalva, 6115-B Fax: (56) 2 444 3097 Ireland t Schneider Electric Ireland Tel: 353(0) 1 601 22 00
Conchali www.schneider-electric.co.cl Maynooth Road Fax: 353(0) 1 601 22 01
Santiago Cellbridge - Co. Kildare www.schneiderelectric.ie
China t Schneider Beijing Tel: (86) 10 65 90 69 07 Italy t Schneider Electric S.p.A. Tel: (39) 39 655 8111
Landmark bldg-Room 1801 Fax: (86) 10 65 90 00 13 Centro Direzionale Colleoni Fax: (39) 39 609 1510
8 North Dong Sanhuan Rd, www.schneider-electric.com.cn Palazzo Sirio - Viale Colleoni, 7 www.schneiderelectric.it
Chaoyang District 20041 Agrate Brianza (Mi)
100004 Beijing Japan t Schneider Electric Japan Ltd Tel: (81) 354 74 44 74
Columbia t Schneider de Colombia S.A. Tel: (57) 1 413 80 08 SK Bldg, Sendagaya Fax: (81) 354 74 44 70
Calle 45A#102-45 Fax: (57) 1 413 90 12 4-14-4, Sendagaya www.schneider-electric.co.jp
Santafe de Bogota - Bogota Shibuya-Ku - 151 Tokyo
Costa-Rica t Schneider Centroamérica Ltda. Tel: (506) 232 60 55 Kenya t Schneider East Africa Tel: (254) 2 824 156
1,5 kmts Oeste de la Embajada Americana, Fax: (506) 232 04 26 Power Technics Complex Fax: (254) 2 824 157
Apartado 4123 - 1000 San Jose www.schneider-ca.com PO Box 46345 - Nairobi
Côte d'ivoire t Schneider Electric Afrique de l'Ouest Sarl Tel: (225) 25 69 69 Kuwait t Schneider Electric Kuwait Tel: (965) 240 75 46
18 B.P.2027 Fax: (225) 25 69 86 Al Gaas Tower Fax: (965) 240 75 06
Abidjan 18 Sharq 2nd Floor
Croatia t Schneider Electric SA Tel: (385) 1 367 100 PO Box 20092 - 13 061 Safat
Fallerovo Setaliste 22 Fax: (385) 1 367 111 Latvia t Schneider Electric Tel : (371) 750 32 32
10000 Zagreb Rue Tornia, 4 IIIB, office 203 and 32 34
Cuba t Schneider Electric Tel: (53) 724 15 59 LV1050 Riga Fax : (371) 732 07 97
Bureau de Liaison de La Havane Fax: (53) 724 12 17 Lebanon t Schneider Electric Liban Tel : (961)1 613 006/007
Calle 36- N°306-Apto1- SODECO Square Fax : (961) 1 613 008
Entre 3ra y 5ta Avenida Miramar Office Tower Bloc B - 13th Floor
Playa Habana Rue de Damas
Czech Republic t Schneider Electric CZ, s.p.o. Tel: (420) 2 810 88 111 Beyrouth
Thamova 13 Fax : (420) 2 24 81 08 51 Lithuania t Schneider Electric Tel : (370) 275 31 73
186 00 Praha 8 www.schneider-electric.cz rue Juozapaviciaus, 11 and 32 64
Denmark t Schneider Electric A/S Tel: (45) 44 73 7888 2600 Vilnus Fax : (370) 272 19 78
Baltorpbakken 14 Fax: (45) 44 68 5255 Malaysia t Schneider Malaysia Sdn Bhd Tel: (60) 37 05 11 50
DK - 2750 Ballerup www.schneider-electric.dk No.11 Jalan U1/19, Seksyen U1 Fax: (60) 37 05 11 70
Dominican t Schneider Electric Tel: 1 (809) 334 66 63 Hicom-Glenmarie Industrial Park www.schneider-electric.com.my
Republic Calle Jacinto Manon Fax : 1 (809) 334 66 68 Shah Alam
Esq. Federico Geraldino 40150 Selangor Darul Ehsan
Edificio D'Roca Plaza Suite 402, Martinique t Schneider Electric Tel: (596) 51 06 00
Ens. Paraiso Immeuble Cottrell Fax: (596) 51 11 26
Santo Domingo ZI de la Lézarde - 97232 Le Lamentin
Ecuador t Schneider Ecuador Tel: (593) 2 25 03 23 Mexico t Groupe Schneider Mexico Tel : (525) 686 3000
Av. de los Shyris y Rio Coca Esq. Fax: (593) 2 43 49 40 Calz. Rojo Gomez N° 1121 Fax : (525) 686 2409
Edificio Eurocentro - Segundo Piso Col. Guadalupe del Moral www.schneider-electric.com.mx
6466 Quito Mexico 09300
Egypt t Schneider Electric Egypt Tel: (20) 24 01 01 19 Morocco t Schneider Electric Maroc Tel: (212) 299 08 48 to 57
68, El Tayaran Street Fax: (20) 24 01 66 87 26, rue Ibnou Khalikane Fax: (212) 299 08 67 and 69
Nasr City, 11371 www.schneider.com.eg Quartier Palmiers www.schneider.co.ma
Cairo 20100 Casablanca
A0000/2 Te
Country Address Country Address
Netherlands t Schneider MGTE B.V. Tel: (31) 23 512 4124

Spain t Schneider Electric España, S.A. Tel: (34) 93 484 3100
Waarderweg 40 - Postbus 836 Fax: (31) 23 512 4100
Pl. Dr. Letamendi, 5-7 Fax: (34) 93 484 3308
2003 RV Haarlem www.schneider-electric.nl
08007 Barcelona www.schneiderelectric.es
New Zealand t Schneider Electric (NZ) Ltd Tel: (64) 98 20 18 20
Sweden t Schneider Electric AB Tel: (46) 8 623 84 00
14 Charann Place - Avondale Fax: (64) 98 20 18 21
Djupdalsvägen 17/19 Fax: (46) 8 623 84 85
P.O. Box 15355
19129 Sollentuna www.schneider-electric.se
New Lynn - Auckland
Switzerland t Schneider Electric (Switzerland) S.A. Tel: (41) 31 917 3333
Nigeria t Merlin Gerin Nigeria Ltd Tel: (234) 14 93 63 99
Schermenwaldstrasse 11 - Postfach Fax: (41) 31 917 3355
Plot 25, Sanni Tola Sonolki Close Off Fax: (234) 14 97 45 99
3063 Ittigen www.schneider-electric.ch
Harold Sodipo Crescent
Syria t Schneider Electric Syria Tel: (963) 11 333 10 26
PO Box 12 505
Shakib Arslan Street Fax: (963) 11 331 08 67
Ikeja - Lagos
Abou Roumaneh
Norway t Schneider Electric Norge A/S Tel: (47) 6924 9700
PO Box 33876 - Damas
Solgaard Skog 2 Fax: (47) 6925 7871
Taiwan t Schneider Electric Taiwan Co Ltd Tel: (886) 2 27 33 14 64
Postboks 128
1501 Moss 11F-2, N°51, Keelung Road, Sec.2 Fax: (886) 2 27 33 64 10
Oman t Schneider Electric CA Tel : (968) 77 163 64 110 Taipei www.schneider-electric.com.tw
c/o Arab Development Co Fax : (968) 77 104 49 Thailand t Schneider (Thailand) Ltd Tel: (662) 261 18 99
PO Box 439 20th Floor Richmond Building Fax: (662) 260 82 35
113 Muscat 75, Sukhumvit 26 rd, Klongtoey www.schneider-electric.co.th
Pakistan t Schneider Electric Pakistan Tel : (92) 21 586 3561 Bangkok 10110
302 Clifton Center to 3563 Tunisia t Schneider Electric Tunisie Tel : (216) 1 960 477
Clifton Block J Fax : (92) 21 586 3564 2045 Les Berges du Lac Fax : (216) 1 960 342
Karachi 75500 Tunis
Peru t Schneider Electric Peru S.A. Tel: (511) 221 54 60 Turkey t Schneider Elektrik . Tel: (90) 21 63 86 95 70
Fransisco Canaval y Moreyra #452 Fax: (511) 221 81 84 Sanayi Ve Ticaret A.S Fax: (90) 21 63 86 38 75
Piso 15, of.2 www.schneider-electric.com.pe Tütüncü Mehmet Efendi www.schneiderelectric.com.tr
San Isidro Cad.N°:110 Kat: 1-2
L - 27 Lima 81080 Götztepe-Istanbul
Philippines t Schneider Electric Philippines, Inc Tel: (63) 28 44 84 18 Ukraine t Schneider Electric Tel: (380) 44 462 04 25
1314 Batangas Street Fax: (63) 28 16 00 63 Rue Krechtchatik 2 Fax: (380) 44 462 04 24
Makati City 1234 252601 Kiev
Metro-Manila United Arab t Schneider Electric Abu Dhabi Tel: (971) 2 33 94 44
Poland t Schneider Electric Polska Sp.zo.o. Tel: (48) 22 606 25 00 Emirates PO Box 29580 - Fax: (971) 2 31 66 06
UI. Domaniewska 41 Fax: (48) 22 606 11 66/58 Office Floor 2/Lulu Street
02-672 - Warszawa www.schneider-electric.pl Al Marina Plaza Tower
Portugal t Schneider Electric Portugal Tel: (351) 21 416 5800 Abu Dhabi
Av.do Forte, 3 Fax: (351) 21 416 5857 United Kingdom t Schneider Ltd Tel: (44) 01628 508 500
Edificio Suécia II, Piso 3-A www.schneiderelectric.pt Braywick House East Fax: (44) 01628 508 508
CP 2028 Carnaxide Windsor Road . Maidenhead www.schneider.co.uk
2795 Linda-A-Velha Berkshire SL6 1 DN
Qatar t Schneider Electric Qatar Branch Tel: (974) 424 358 United States t Schneider Electric Tel: (1) 847 397 2600
c/o Khalifa BinFahred Al Thani Trad. and Co Fax: (974) 424 358 North American Division Fax: (1) 847 925 7500
P.O. Box 4484 1415 Roselle Road www.squared.com
Doha Palatine - IL 60067
Reunion t Schneider Electric Tel: (262) 28 14 28 Uruguay t Schneider Electric Uruguay S.A. Tel: (598) 27 07 23 92
Immeuble Futura Fax: (262) 28 39 37 Gabriela Pereira 30398 Fax: (598) 27 09 07 13
190, rue des 2 canons - BP 646 CP11300 Montevideo
97497 Sainte Clothilde Venezuela t Schneider Mg SD TE, S.A. Tel: (58) 2 241 13 44
Romania t Schneider Electric Tel: (40) 1 203 06 50 Calle 162 / Piso 2 Fax: (58) 2 243 60 09
Bd Ficusului n° 42 Fax: (40) 1 232 15 98 Edificio Centro Cynamid www.schneider-electric.com.ve
«Apimondia», Corp.A, et.1, Sector 1 www.schneider-electric.ro La Urbina, 1070
Bucuresti 75319 Caracas
Russia-CIS t Schneider Electric CEI Tel: (7) 502 224 5050 Vietnam t R.R.O. Of Schneider Electric S.A. Tel : (84) 8 829 60 72
80, Leningradsky Prospekt Tel: (7) 502 224 5033/34 Unit 808, 8th Floor Fax : (84) 8 829 60 67
125178 Moscow Fax: (7) 502 224 5220 Me Linh Point Tower
Saudi Arabia t Schneider Electric Tel: (966) 1 265 1515 2 Ngo Duc Ke Street, District 1
Second Industrial City Fax: (966) 1 265 1860 Ho Chi Minh City
P.O. Box 89249 Yugoslav t Schneider Electric A.S. Tel: (381) 11 319 15 03
11682 Riyadh Federation Nikole Tesle 3 Fax: (381) 11 319 15 20
Senegal t Schneider Electric Afrique de l'Ouest Tel: (221) 820 68 05 11181 Beograd
Zambia t Schneider Zambia Tel: (260) 222 22 52
BP 15952 Fax: (221) 820 58 50
Zambia Office Fax: (260) 222 83 89
Dakar-Fann - Quartier Almadies
c/o Matipi Craft Center Building Plot 1036
Dakar
Accra Road
Singapore t Schneider Electric Singapore Pte Ltd Tel: (65) 484 78 77
PO Box 22792 - Kitwe
10 Ang Mo Kio Street 65 Fax: (65) 484 78 00
Zimbabwe t Schneider Electric Tel: (263) 4 707 179
#02 - 17/20, Tech Point www.schneider-electric.com.sg
Zimbabwe Liaison Office Tel: (263) 4 707 180
Singapore 569059
75A Second Street (corner Livingstone Avenue) Fax: (263) 4 707 176
Slovak Republic t Schneider Electric Slovakia, spol. s.r.o. Tel: (421) 7 552 40 10/20
Harare
Borekova 10 Fax: (421) 7 552 40 00
SK-821 06 Bratislava www.schneider-electric.sk
Slovenia t Schneider Electric Tel: (386) 61 168 5007
NUM SA 21, avenue Marechal Foch - BP 68 Tel: 33 (0)1 3423 6666
Techniski Biro - Dunasjka 106 pp 69 Fax: (386) 61 168 5426
95101 Argenteuil Cedex Fax: 33 (0)1 3423 678
61000 Ljubljana
France www.num.com
South Africa t Schneider Electric South Africa (PTY) Ltd Tel : (27) 11 254 6400
Partnership t Phytron Electronik GmbH Tel: 49 (0)8142-503 0
Cnr Bekker & Montrose roads Fax : (27) 11 315 8830
company Industriestr. 12 Fax:49 (0)8142 503 190
1685 - Midrand. www.schneider-electric.co.za
D-82194 Gröbenzell www.phytron.com
South Korea t Schneider Electric Korea Tel: (82) 226 30 97 00 Germany
3Floor, Cheil Bldg., 94-46, 7-Ka Fax: (82) 226 30 98 00
Youngdeungpodong, Youngdeungpo-ku www.csinfo.co.kr/schneider/
150-037 Seoul For all the other countries, contacts are ensured by the Regional Divisions (see next page).
Te A0000/3
Country Address
Africa & Middle-East Zone

Arabic t Schneider Electric Tel : (966) 1 265 15 15
Peninsula Second Industrial City Fax: (966)1 265 18 60
Région P.O. Box 89249
11682 Riyadh
Saudi Arabia
Middle-East t Schneider Elektrik A.S. Tel : (90) 2163 86 95 70
Région Sanayi Ve Ticaret A.S. Fax : (90) 21 63 86 38 75
Tütüncü Mehmet Efendi www.schneider-electric.com.tr
Cad. N°:110 Kat. 1-2
81080 Götztepe-Istanbul
Turkey
North-East t Schneider Electric Egypt Tel : (20) 24 01 01 19
Africa Region 68, El Tayaran Street Fax: (20) 24 01 66 87
Nasr City, 11371 www.schneider.com.eg
Cairo
Egypt
North-West t Schneider Electric Maroc Tel : (212) 299 08 48 à 57
Africa Region 26, rue Ibnou Khalikane Fax: (212) 299 08 67 et 69
Quartier Palmiers www.schneider.co.ma
20100 Casablanca
Morocco
South Africa t Schneider Electric South Africa (PTY) Ltd Tel : (27) 11 254 6400
Region Cnr Bekker & Montrose roads Fax: (27) 11 315 8830
1685 - Midrand. www.schneider-electric.co.za
South Africa
South Asia t Schneider Electric India Pvt Ltd. Tel : (91) 116 25 76 58
Region D-27 South Extension Part II Fax: (91) 116 25 80 80
110 049 New Dehli www.schneiderelectric.in.com
India
Asian Zone
Great China t Schneider Beijing Tel : (86) 10 65 90 69 07
Landmark bldg-Room 1801 Fax: (86) 10 65 90 00 13
8 North Dong Sanhuan Rd, Chaoyang District www.schneider-electric.com.cn
100004 Beijing
China
South-East t Schneider South East Asia (HQ) Tel : (65) 270 23 66
Asia Pte Ltd. Fax: (65) 273 46 10
460 Alexandra Road
#15-01 PSA building
119963 Singapore
European Zone
ECE-CIS t Schneider Electric CEI Tel : (7) 502 224 5050,
Countries 80, Leningradsky Prospekt 5033 et 5034
125178 Moscou Fax: (7) 502 224 5220
Russia
Nordic t Schneider Electric A/S Tel : (45) 44 73 7888
countries Baltorpbakken 14 Fax: (45) 44 68 5255
DK - 2750 Ballerup www.schneider-electric.dk
Denmark
East Adriatic t Schneider Electric SA Tel : (385) 1 367 100
countries Fallerovo Setaliste 22 Fax: (385) 1 367 111
10000 Zagreb
Croatia
North-America Zone
t Schneider Electric Tel : (1) 847 397 2600
North American Division Fax: (1) 847 925 7500
1415 Roselle Road www.squared.com
Palatine IL 60067
USA
South America & Caribbee zone

t Schneider Electric Emp. Partic. Tel : (55) 11 816 45 00
Head Office Zone Fax: (55) 11 813 09 43
Avenida Brigadeiro Faria Lima www.schneider.com.br
1478 15° A
01451-913 São Paulo-SP
Brazil
Pacific Zone
t Schneider Electric (Australia) Pty. Limited Tel : (61) 298 51 28 00
2, Solent Circuit Fax: (61) 296 29 83 10
Norwest Business Park www.schneider.com.au
NSW 2153 Baulkham Hill
Australia
A0000/4 Te

Automate Premium Application

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Automate Premium Application

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Automate Premium Application

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

4 Application-specific modules and solutions

Analogue I/O Selection guide pages 0472Q/2 and 0472Q/3

Analogue I/O modules i

Process control TSX P57 i i

Counter and Selection guide pages 0452Q/2 and 0452Q/3

Counter module TSX CTY 2A/4A page 43540/5

Counter and measurement modules TSX CTY 2C page 43541/5

Electronic cam module TSX CCY 1128 page 43542/4

Motion control Selection guide pages 0453Q/2 and 0453Q/3

For servomotors with analogue setpoint i

For SERCOS® digital ring drives TSX CSY 84 page 43555/5

For stepper motors TSX CFY 11/21 page 43551/5

Lexium motion control pages 43545/2 and 43545/3

ISP Plus integrated weighing i

Process power supply i

Warm Standby redundant TLX CD WSBY page 43566/6

Applications Analogue inputs

Type Multirange Multirange Voltage/current

Range ± 10 V, ± 5 V, 0-10 V, 0…5 V, 1…5 V - 80…+ 80 mV ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V, 1…5 V

Modularity 4 channels 16 channels 8 channels

Read time 550 ms 1120 ms (normal scan) 27 ms (normal scan)

Resolution 16 bits 16 bits 12 bits

16 channels 8 channels 4 channels 8 channels

51 ms (normal scan) 126.4 ms (normal scan) 1 ms – –

User-definable filtering User-definable filtering – 2.5 ms 5 ms

12 bits 16 bits 11 bits + sign 13 bits + sign for voltage

Analogue I/O modules for Premium PLCs are equipped with :

The front panels of TSX AEY/ASY analogue I/O modules comprise :

1 A display and module diagnostics block

1 2 A connector for receiving the screw terminal block

3 A rotating support containing the module locating device

4 A removable screw terminal for direct connection of the

5 A pivoting cover for accessing the terminal block screws

Connection using Connection

Connection principle for TSX AEY/ASY modules with SUB-D connector

i The Telefast ABE-7CPA02 sub-base enables 8

i The Telefast ABE-7CPA03/31 sub-base enables the

24 V sensors (for sub-base ABE-7CPA31)

ABE-7CPA02 - ensures continuity of current loops when the SUB-D

TSX AEY 414, TSX AEY 1614 analogue input modules

i Scanning of input channels, gain selection according to input signals, multiplexing.

TSX ASY 410, TSX ASY 800 analogue output modules

i Protection of the module against overvoltages.

PL7 Junior software performs configuration and debugging functions :

Characteristics of analogue input modules

Input range ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V,

Analogue/digital conversion 12 bits 16 bits

Max. error ± 10 V 0…5 V 0…20 mA ± 10 V 0…5 V 0…20 mA ± 10 V 0…5 V 0…20 mA

Isolation Betw. ch. and bus V rms 1000

Common mode betw. channels None ± 200 None

Max. overvoltage/overcurrent on ± 30 V voltage

Standards IEC 1131

Consumption mA See page 43605/2

Type of input module TSX AEY 414 TSX AEY 1614

Input range i B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U thermocouples or electrical range : i B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U

Analogue/digital conversion 16 bits 16 bits

Isolation Betw. ch. and bus V rms 1780 1000

Max. overvoltage/overcurrent on ± 30 V powered up without 250 Ω external resistance a ± 30 V in differential mode

Consumption mA See page 43605/2

Input range for TSX AEY 414